SEMESTER VII

APPLIED ELECTRONICS AND INSTRUMENTATION

 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

AET401 COMMUNICATION CATEGORY L T P CREDITS

PCC 2 1 0 3
ENGINEERING

Preamble: This course aims to study about analog communication and digital
communication systems

Prerequisite: ECT204 Signals and System

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Explain the basic components of a communication system

CO 2 Apply the concepts of random processes to LTI systems.

CO 3 Illustrate the concepts of various analog communication techniques.

CO 4 Apply source coding techniques in digital communication system

CO5 Apply digital modulation techniques in communication system

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 3 3
CO 2 3 3 3
CO 3 3 3 3
CO 4 3 3 3
CO 5 3 3 3

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember K1 10 10 20
Understand K2 30 30 60
Apply K3 10 10 20
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part
A contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each
question. Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each
module of which student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2
sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Explain the basic components of a communication system

1. What is the need of a modulator in a radio communication system?
2. What are the various frequency bands used in radio communication
3. Why base band communication is infeasible for terrestrial air transmission?

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Apply the concepts of random processes to LTI systems.
1. Compute the entropy of a Gaussian random variable.
2. Explain the pdf and CDF for the random variable.

3. Discuss about LTI system.

Course Outcome 3 (CO3): Illustrate the concepts of various analog communication

techniques.
1. What are the needs for analog modulation

2. Give the mathematical model of FM signal and explain its spectrum

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Apply source coding techniques in digital communication

system

1. Compute the A and mu law quantized values of a signal that is normalized to 0.8
with A=32 and mu=255.
2. Define Delta modulation.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Apply digital modulation techniques in communication system

1. Give the mathematical model of a BPSK signal and plot its signal constellation.
2. Draw the BER-SNR plot for the BPSK system
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

SYLLABUS
Module 1:
Basics of communication systems
Introduction, Elements of communication systems, Examples of analog communication systems,
Frequency bands, Need for modulation. Noise in communication system, Definitions of Thermal
noise (white noise), Various types of noise -- Shot noise, Partition noise, Flicker noise, Burst noise,
(No analysis required) Signal to noise ratio, Noise factor, Noise temperature, Narrow band noise.

Module 2:
Review of Random Variables and Random Processes
Review of random variables – both discrete and continuous. CDF and PDF, statistical averages. (Only
definitions, computations and significance) Entropy, differential entropy. Conditional entropy,
mutual information. Stochastic processes, Stationarity. Conditions for WSS and SSS.
Autocorrelation and power spectral density. LTI systems with WSS as input.

Module 3:
Analog Communication
Block diagram of a communication system. Need for analog modulation. Amplitude modulation.
Equation and spectrum of AM signal. DSB-SC and SSB systems. Block diagram of SSB transmitter
and receiver. Frequency and phase modulation. Narrow and wide band FM and their spectra. FM
transmitter and receiver.

Module 4:
Source Coding
Source coding theorems I and II (Statements only). Waveform coding. Sampling and Quantization.
Pulse code modulation, Transmitter and receiver. Companding. A and mu-law companders. DPCM
transmitter and receiver. Design of linear predictor. Delta modulation. Slope overload.

Module 5:
Digital Modulation Schemes
Pass band transmission model, Coherent Modulation Schemes- BPSK, QPSK, BFSK. Non Coherent
orthogonal modulation schemes - Detection of Binary modulation schemes in the presence of noise,
BER for BPSK, QPSK.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Text Books
1. “Communication Systems”, Simon Haykin, Wiley.
2. “Digital Communications: Fundamentals and Applications”, Sklar, Pearson.

Reference Books
1. “Principles of Digital Communication,” R. Gallager, Oxford University Press
2. “Digital Communication”, John G Proakis, Wiley

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of
Lectures
1 Basics of communication systems
1.1 Introduction, Elements of communication systems 1
1.2 Examples of analog communication systems, Frequency bands 1

1.3 Need for modulation 1

1.4 Noise in communication system, Definitions of Thermal noise (white 2
noise), Various types of noise -- Shot noise, Partition noise, Flicker
noise, Burst noise, (No analysis required)
1.5 Signal to noise ratio, Noise factor, Noise temperature, Narrow band 1
noise.

2 Review of Random Variables and Random Processes

.
2.1 Review of random variables – both discrete and continuous. 2
2.2 CDF and PDF, statistical averages. (Only definitions, computations and 1
significance)
2.3 Entropy, differential entropy. Conditional entropy, mutual information. 1
2.4 Stochastic processes, Stationarity. Conditions for WSS and SSS. 2
2.5 Autocorrelation and power spectral density. LTI systems with WSS as 2
input
3 Analog Communication

3.1 Block diagram of a communication system. Need for analog modulation. 2

3.2 Amplitude modulation. Equation and spectrum of AM signal. DSB-SC 3
and SSB systems. Block diagram of SSB transmitter and receiver
3.3 Frequency and phase modulation. Narrow and wide band FM and their 2
spectra. FM transmitter and receiver.
4 Source Coding
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

4.1 Source coding theorems I and II (Statements only). Waveform coding. 1

Sampling and Quantization.
4.2 Pulse code modulation, Transmitter and receiver 2
4.3 Companding. A and mu-law companders. DPCM transmitter and 2
receiver.
4.4 Design of linear predictor. Delta modulation. Slope overload. 2

5 Digital Modulation Schemes

5.1 Pass band transmission model, Coherent Modulation Schemes- BPSK, 2

QPSK, BFSK.
5.2 Non Coherent orthogonal modulation schemes - Detection of Binary 2
modulation schemes in the presence of noise
5.3 BER for BPSK, QPSK. 3

Assignment:
At least two assignments should be given.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Model Question paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

SEVENTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION (Model Question Paper)
Program: Applied Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering/ Electronics &
Instrumentation Engineering
Course Code: AET401
Course Name: COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours
PART A

Answer ALL Questions. Each Carries 3 marks.

1. Explain the need for modulation K2

2 A receiver connected to an antenna whose resistance is 50 ohm has K3

an equivalent noise resistance of 30 ohm. Calculate receiver noise
figure in decibels & its equivalent noise temperature?

3 Give the conditions for WSS. K1

4 In a game a six faced die is thrown. If 1 or 2 comes the player gets K3

Rs 30, if 3 or 4 the player gets Rs 10, if 5 comes he loses Rs. 30
and in the event of 6 he loses Rs. 100. Plot the CDF and PDF of
gain or loss.

5 Plot the spectrum of an FM signal. K2

6 Draw the block diagram of a communication system K2

7 State source coding theorems I and II. K1
8 Define companding. K1
9 Plot BER against SNR for a BPSK system K2
10 Draw the signal constellation of a QPSK system K2

PART – B
Answer one question from each module. Each question carries 14 marks.

Module – I

11.a) Explain the following (i) Thermal noise (ii) Flicker noise 6 CO1 K2

11.b) Explain the elements of communication systems in detail? 8 CO1 K2

OR
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

12.a) Define the signal to noise ratio and noise and noise figure of a 9 CO1 K1
receiver? How noise temperature related to noise figure?

12.b) List the basic functions of a radio transmitter & the corresponding 5 CO1 K2
functions of the receiver?

Module – II

13.a) Compute the entropy of Gaussian random variable 8 CO2 K3

13.b) Explain mutual information. Give its relation with self-information. 6 CO2 K2

OR

14.a) Explain a LTI systems with WSS as input. 8 CO2 K2

14.b) Give the relation between autocorrelation and power spectral 6 CO2 K2
density of a WSS.

Module – III

15.a) Give the model of AM signal and plot its spectrum. 9 CO3 K2

15.b) Write short notes about narrow band FM. 5 CO3 K2

OR

16.a) Explain how SSB is transmitted and received. 8 CO3 K2

16.b) Explain DSB-SC transmitter and receiver. 6 CO3 K2

Module – IV

17 With figure, Explain Pulse code modulation Transmitter and 14 CO4 K2

receiver
OR
18.a) Describe about Delta modulation with suitable figures. 10 CO4 K2
18.b) Define A and mu-law companders 4 CO4 K1

Module – V

19.a) Derive the probability of error for a QPSK system with Gray coding. 10 CO5 K3

19.b) Draw the BER-SNR plot for a QPSK system 4 CO5 K1

 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

OR

20.a) Derive the probability of error for a BPSK system 10 CO5 K3

20.b) Compare coherent and non-coherent modulation 4 CO5 K2

 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

AET413 NONLINEAR AND ADAPTIVE CATEGORY L T P CREDITS

PEC 2 1 0 3
CONTROL SYSTEMS

Preamble: This course aims to develop the skill to design and analyze Nonlinear and
Adaptive Control Systems

Pre-requisites: AET301 CONTROL SYSTEM

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Explain Phase plane analysis of Linear and Non-Linear Systems.

CO 2 Analyze stability of a Non-Linear Systems using Lyapunov Theory.

CO 3 Analyze a Non-Linear Systems using Describing Function.

CO4 Explain SISO LTI Identification Algorithms.

CO5 Describe various Adaptive Control Schemes and analyze its stability.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO 12
10 11
CO 1 3 2 2 3
CO 2 3 2 2 3
CO 3 3 2 2 3
CO 4 3 2 2 3
CO 5 3 2 2 3

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember K1 10 10 10
Understand K2 30 30 60
Apply K3 10 10 30
Analyse K4
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain
10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should
answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer
any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Explain Phase plane analysis of Linear and Non-Linear
Systems.

1. Explain how the properties of a system can be best explained by analyzing the nature of singular
points.
2. Generate the phase portrait of system by employing the method of isoclines.
3. Explain the concept of limit cycles in the stability analysis of non-linear systems.
4. Explain the Poincare -Bendixson theorems.
Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Analyze stability of a Non-Linear Systems using Lyapunov
Theory.
1. Differentiate between autonomous and non-autonomous systems.
2. Discuss about asymptotic stability and exponential stability.
3. State and explain the Lyapunov’s linearization method.
4. Explain Lyapunov’s direct method and apply it to a non-linear mass damper spring system.
5. Explain Lyapunov’s theorem for local stability.
Course Outcome 3 (CO3): Analyze a Non Linear Systems using Describing Function.
1. Define Describing function. Explain how describing functions can be used to discover the
existence of limit cycles and their stability.
2. Compute the describing function for saturation non-linearity.
3. Deduce the describing function for backlash non-linearity.
4. Explain the Limit cycle detection for frequency dependent describing functions.
5. State and explain the criterion for existence and stability of limit cycles.
6. Comment on the reliability of describing function analysis.
Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Explain SISO LTI Identification Algorithms.

1. Explain identification error. Elaborate on the applicability of gradient and least squares algorithms
in minimizing identification error.
2. Explain model reference identifier structure and its implementation.
3. Differentiate between positive real and strictly positive real error functions.
4. Deduce the condition for convergence of parameter error to zero.
5. State and explain partial convergence theorem.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Describe various Adaptive Control Schemes and analyze its
stability.
1. Obtain the controller and identifier structure in the input error direct adaptive control scheme.
2. Explain the implementation of output error direct adaptive control algorithm.
3. Differentiate between input error and output error direct adaptive control schemes.
4. Explain the implementation of indirect adaptive control algorithm
5. Perform the stability analysis of input error direct adaptive control scheme.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

SYLLABUS
AET413 NON-LINEAR AND ADAPTIVE CONTROL SYSTEMS
Module 1:
Introduction: Common Physical Nonlinearities in control systems-accidental and Intentional. Phase
Plane Analysis: Concept of Phase plane analysis- phase portraits- singular points- symmetry.
Construction of phase portraits-the method of isoclines-Phase plane analysis of linear systems, Phase
plane analysis of non-linear systems- local behaviour of non-linear systems-limit cycles- Poincare-
Bendixson theorems.
Module 2:
Stability of nonlinear systems-Lyapunov theory- Non-Linear systems- autonomous and non-
autonomous- equilibrium points, Concept of Stability in the sense of Lyapunov, asymptotic stability
and exponential stability, Local and Global stability- Linearization and local stability, Lyapunov’s
direct method, positive definite functions and Lyapunov functions, Lyapunov theorems for local
stability and global stability
Module 3:
Describing Function: Describing Function Fundamentals -Describing functions of common
nonlinearities- saturation, dead-zone, backlash – Describing Function analysis- Non-Linear Systems-
Limit Cycles- Stability of Limit Cycles.
Module 4:
Adaptive Control: Parametric models of dynamical systems-SISO LTI Identification- Linear Error
Equation- Gradient Algorithm-Least Squares Algorithm-Model Reference Identifier.
Module 5:
Adaptive Control Schemes: Model Reference Adaptive Control-Input Error Direct Adaptive
Control- Output Error Direct Adaptive Control- Indirect Adaptive Control, Stability- Input Error
Direct Adaptive Control- Output Error Direct Adaptive Control- Indirect Adaptive Control.

Text Books:
1. Jean- Jacques Slotine and Weiping Li, Applied nonlinear Control, Prentice Hall,1991, ISBN: 0-13-
040890.
2. Shankar Sastry, Nonlinear Systems; Analysis, Stability and Control, Springer. 1999
3. Sankar Sastry and Marc Bodson, Adaptive Control- Stability, Convergence and Robustness, Springer,
2011.
4. K.J. Astrom and B. Wittenmark, Adaptive Control, 2nd ed., Pearson Education, 1995.
References:
1. H.K. Khalil, Nonlinear Systems, 3rd ed., Prentice hall, 2002.
2. M Gopal “Digital Control and State Variable Methods”, Tata McGraw-Hill Ltd, New Delhi, 2003.
3. Nagoor Kani, “Advanced Control System”, Rba Publications

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures

1 Non-Linear Control System
1.1 Introduction: Common Physical Nonlinearities in control systems- 1
accidental and Intentional.
1.2 Concept of Phase plane analysis- phase portraits- singular points- 1
symmetry.
1.3 Construction of phase portraits-the method of isoclines 2
1.4 Phase plane analysis of linear systems, Phase plane analysis of non- 3
linear systems- local behaviour of non-linear systems-limit cycles-
Poincare- Bendixson theorems.

2 Stability of nonlinear systems

2.1 Lyapunov theory- Non-Linear systems- autonomous and non-autonomous- 1
equilibrium points.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

2.2 Concept of Stability in the sense of Lyapunov, asymptotic stability and 2

exponential stability, Local and Global stability- Linearization and local
stability,
2.3 Lyapunov’s direct method, positive definite functions and Lyapunov 2
functions,
2.4 Lyapunov theorems for local stability and global stability 2

3 Describing Function
3.1 Describing Function Fundamentals 1
3.2 Describing functions of common nonlinearities- saturation, dead-zone, 2
backlash
3.3 Describing Function Analysis- Non-Linear Systems-Limit Cycles- Stability 3
of Limit Cycles.

4 Adaptive Control
4.1 Parametric models of dynamical systems 1
4.2 SISO LTI Identification - Frequency Domain Approach- Time Domain 2
Approach-Linear Error Equation
4.3 Gradient Algorithm 2
4.4 Least Squares Algorithm 1
4.5 Model Reference Identifier 3

5 Adaptive Control Schemes

5.1 Model Reference Adaptive Control-Input Error Direct Adaptive Control 1
5.2 Output Error Direct Adaptive Control 1
5.3 Indirect Adaptive Control 1
5.4 Stability- Input Error Direct Adaptive Control- Output Error Direct Adaptive 3
Control- Indirect Adaptive Control.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Model Question paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

SEVENTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
Applied Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering/ Electronics & Instrumentation
Engineering
Course Code: AET 413

Course Name: NON-LINEAR AND ADAPTIVE CONTROL SYSTEMS

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART-A
Answer all Questions. Each carry 3 marks.

1. Define linear and non-linear control systems and explain their differences. CO1
2. Differentiate between inherent and intentional non-linearities. CO1
3. Explain phase plane and phase trajectory with neat sketch. CO2
4. Explain about the Singular points in phase plane analysis. CO2
5. Derive the describing function of Saturation Non-Linearity. CO3
6. Explain the design of nonlinear system using describing function method. CO3
7. Obtain and explain the update law for standard gradient algorithm. CO4
8. Explain the frequency domain approach to identification of single input single CO4
output linear time invariant systems.
9. Explain the bounded input bounded state stability concept for adaptive systems. CO5
10. Explain the major differences between input error and output error adaptive control CO5
schemes.

PART-B
Answer ONE question from each module. Each carries 14 marks.

Module 1
11. Explain the construction of phase trajectories and explain procedure for (14) CO1
constructing phase trajectories by Isocline method.
OR
12. What is phase plane, phase trajectory and phase portrait? Draw and explain (14) CO1
how to determine the stable and unstable limit cycles using phase portrait.
Module 2
13. What is a limit cycle? Discuss about the theorems, by which, the existence of (14) CO2
limit cycle can be predicted
OR
14. Define the following: (i) System. (ii) Equilibrium state (iii) Stability in the (14) CO2
sense of Lyapunov (iv) Asymptotic stability (v) Instability.
Module 3
15 Derive the describing function of Dead-zone non-Linearity? (7) CO3
a).
15 Derive the describing function of Backlash Non-Linearity? (7) CO3
b)
OR
16 What is the significance of describing function analysis? (5) CO3
a).
16 Derive the describing function of Relay with Dead-zone and Hysteresis Non- (9) CO3
b). Linearity?
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Module 4

17 Define the update law for standard gradient algorithm. Explain the (7) CO4
a). implementation of identifier with normalized gradient algorithm.
17 Define covariance propagation equation for least squares algorithm. Explain (7) CO4
b). the implementation of identifier with normalized least squares algorithm and
covariance resetting.
OR
18. Explain the implementation of model reference identifier algorithm and obtain (14) CO4
the Identifier structure.
Module 5

19. Obtain the input error identifier structure and explain the implementation of (14) CO5
input error direct adaptive control algorithm.

OR

20. Explain the implementation of indirect adaptive control algorithm. (14) CO5
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

AET423 SCADA AND DISTRIBUTED CATEGORY L T P CREDITS

PEC 2 1 0 3
CONTROL SYSTEMS

Preamble: This course aims to provide concepts of PLC, SCADA and DCS used in industrial
automation.

Prerequisite: AET303 Industrial Instrumentation

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

Explain the architecture and I/O processing of PLC

CO 1
CO 2 Apply the concepts of PLC programming and apply it to solve real life problems
CO 3 Describe the implementation of SCADA system in industrial automation

CO 4 Illustrate DCS architecture

CO 5 Explain various interfacing techniques and algorithms used in DCS

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
1 2 10 11 12
CO 1 3 3 3
CO 2 3 3 3 3
CO 3 3 3 3
CO 4 3 3 3
CO 5 3 3 3

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember K1 10 10 20
Understand K2 35 35 70
Apply K3 5 5 10
Analyze

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. PartA
contains 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each
question. Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each
module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and
carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Explain the architecture and I/O processing of PLC (K2)

1. Explain the internal architecture of PLC with neat diagram.

2. Explain in detail about some input output units used in PLC.

3. Why the signal conditioning is important in PLC I/O units?

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Apply the concepts of PLC programming and apply it to
solve real life problems (K3)

1. Write a PLC ladder program to operate 3 motors M1,M2 and M3 according to the
following conditions of switches S1,S2 and S3
When any one of the switches are ON M1 is ON.
When any two of the switches are ON M2 is ON.
When all the three switches are ON M3 is ON. And only one motor should work at a
time.
2. Draw the PLC ladder for Bottle filling system

Course Outcome 3 (CO3): Describe the implementation of SCADA system in industrial

automation (K2)

1. Describe the elements of a SCADA system.

2. What is RTU? Explain its significance.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Illustrate DCS architecture (K2)

1. Explain automation pyramid with reference to a DCS system.

2. Explain the functions of local and global highways in DCS

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Understand interfaces in DCS (K2)

1. Explain the hardware elements in high level operator interface in DCS.
2. List and explain the various functions of an operator interface in a DCS.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

SYLLABUS

Module 1:
Introduction to the programmable logic controller (PLC) - hardware, internal architecture, PLC
Systems, The IEC Standard, I/O Processing - Input/output Units, Signal Conditioning, Remote
Connections, Examples of Commercial Systems, Processing Inputs, I/O Addresses
Module 2:
Ladder and Functional Block Programming: - Ladder Diagrams- Logic Functions, Latching,
Multiple Outputs, and Entering Programs. Function Blocks- Logic gates, Boolean algebra,
Programming examples.
Timers- Types of Timers, On-Delay Timers, Off-Delay Timers, Pulse Timers, Retentive Timers,
Programming Examples. Counters-Forms of Counter, Programming, Counter Application, Up- and
Down-Counting, Timers with Counters, Sequencer.
Data Handling, Arithmetic Functions, Closed Loop Control.
Module 3: Introduction to SCADA- applicable processes and elements of a SCADA system, a
limited two-way system. History of SCADA-development from telemetry, Dependence on
communications and computers. Real time systems- introduction to real time system,
communication access and master slave. Remote terminal units- function of RTU, communication
interface, protocol, discrete, analog, pulse and serial control, monitoring of analog, discrete, pulse
and serial signals. Master terminal units- communications interface, configuring a picture of the
process, some simple applications, data storage. Application of SCADA-monitoring and controlling
of a gas lift system.
Module 4:
Distributed Control System: DCS - Architectures, Comparison, Local control unit, Process
interfacing issues, Communication facilities. Distributed Control System Basics: DCS introduction,
Various function Blocks, DCS components/block diagram, DCS Architecture of different makes,
comparison of these architectures with automation pyramid, DCS specification, latest trend and
developments, DCS support to Enterprise Resources Planning (ERP), performance criteria for DCS
and other automation tools.
Module 5:

Interfaces In DCS: Operator interfaces, Low level and high-level operator interfaces, Operator
displays, Engineering interfaces, Low level and high-level engineering interfaces, General purpose
computers in DCS, DCS detail Engineering, configuration and programming, functions including
database management, reporting, alarm management, diagnosis.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Text Books

1. W. Bolton, Programmable Logic Controllers, Fifth Edition – Newnes, 2009

2. Stuart A. Boyer, SCADA Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition, 3rd edition, ISA, 2004
3. Michael P. Lukas, ‘Distributed Control Systems’, Van Nostrand Reinhold Co.,Canada,1986

Reference Books

1. Béla G. Lipták, Instrument Engineers’ Handbook -Process Control, ISA, 1995.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of
Lectures
1 Introduction to the programmable logic controller (PLC) -
1.1 Hardware, internal architecture 2
1.2 PLC Systems, The IEC Standard 1
1.3 I/O Processing, Input/Output Units 1
1.4 Signal Conditioning, Remote Connections 1
1.5 Examples of Commercial Systems, Processing Inputs, I/O Addresses 1
2 PLC programming timers and counters
2.1 Ladder Diagrams- Logic Functions, Latching, Multiple Outputs, and 2
Entering Programs
2.2 Function Blocks- Logic gates, Boolean algebra, Programming examples 1
2.3 Timers- Types of Timers, On-Delay Timers, Off-Delay Timers, Pulse 2
Timers, Retentive Timers, Programming Examples
2.4 Counters-Forms of Counter, Programming, Counter Application, Up- 2
and Down-Counting, Timers with Counters, Sequencer
2.5 Data Handling, Arithmetic Functions, Closed Loop Control 1
3 SCADA
3.1 Introduction to SCADA- applicable processes and elements of a 1
SCADA system, a limited two-way system.
3.2 History of SCADA-development from telemetry, Dependence on 1
communications and computers.
3.3 Real time systems- introduction to real time system, communication 2
access and master slave.
3.4 Remote terminal units- function of RTU, communication interface, 2
protocol, discrete, analog, pulse and serial control, monitoring of analog,
discrete, pulse and serial signals
3.5 Master terminal units- communications interface, configuring a picture 1
of the process, some simple applications, data storage.
3.6 Application of SCADA-monitoring and controlling of a gas lift system 1
4 Distributed Control System
4.1 DCS - Architectures, Comparison, Local control unit, Process interfacing 1
issues
4.2 Communication facilities. Distributed Control System Basics: DCS 1
introduction, Various function Blocks
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

4.3 DCS components/block diagram, DCS Architecture of different makes, 1

comparison of these architectures with automation pyramid
4.4 DCS specification, latest trend and developments, DCS support to Enterprise 2
Resources Planning (ERP)
4.5 Performance criteria for DCS and other automation tools. 1
5 Interfaces in DCS
5.1 Operator interfaces, Low level and high-level operator interfaces, Operator 2
displays
5.2 Engineering interfaces, Low level and high-level engineering interfaces 1
5.3 General purpose computers in DCS, DCS detail Engineering, 2
5.4 configuration and programming, functions including database management, 1
5.5 Reporting, alarm management, diagnosis. 1
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Model Question paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

SEVENTH SEMESTER B. TECH. DEGREE EXAMINATION
(Model Question Paper)
Applied Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering/ Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering
Course Code: AET423
Course Name: SCADA and Distributed Control Systems
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours
PART A

Answer ALL Questions. Each Carries 3 marks.

1. What is IEC standard? K1

2. Explain I/O addressing used in PLC. K2
3. Explain the working of on-delay timer. K1
4. Draw ladder diagram to realize AND, OR and NOT gate. K3
5. List the various functions of RTU K1
6. What are real time systems? Explain. K2
7. Explain the basic elements in a DCS system. K2
8. What are the functions of LCU? K1
9. Explain alarm management in DCS. K1
10. What is meant by high level operator interface (HLOI)? K1

PART – B
Answer any one full question from each module. Each question carries 14 marks.
MODULE -1

11 a) With neat diagram explain the architecture of PLC 7 CO1 K2

b) Explain various signal conditioning methods applied before passing to input 7 CO1 K2
unit.
OR
12 a) How remote connection is made in PLC? Explain in detail 7 CO1 K2
b) Explain some examples of systems used with installations involving PLCs 7 CO1 K2

MODULE -2

13 a) Explain Functional block programming used in PLC with examples. 7 CO2 K2

b) Devise ladder programs for systems that will carry out the following tasks: 7 CO2 K3
(a) Give an output after a photocell sensor has given 10 pulse input signals as
a result of detecting 10 objects passing in front of it.
(b) Give an output when the number of people in a store reaches 100, there
continually being people entering and leaving the store.
OR
14 a) What is sequencer? Explain in Detail. 7 CO2 K2
b) Explain forms of counter and its programming. 7 CO2 K2
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

MODULE -3

15 a) Explain the monitoring and controlling of a gas lift system using SCADA 14 CO3 K3
OR
16 a) The liquid level in a column gravity separator is observed to cycle with a two- 7 CO3 K3
minute period from one maximum level to the next. What would be the effect
of sampling this level with the following:

a. A two-minute scan rate?

b. A thirty-second scan rate?
b) Describe one way that the scan rate for a single RTU could be increased 7 CO3 K2
beyond the scan rate for the other RTUs

MODULE -4

17 a) With neat sketches, explain different types of displays in DCS systems 10 CO4 K2
b) How an automation pyramid helps in industrial automation? 4 CO4 K2
OR
18 a) With a neat diagram, illustrate the architecture of a DCS. 10 CO4 K2
b) Write notes on Local Control Unit 4 CO4 K2

MODULE -5

19 a) Explain the various operator interface requirement in DCS? 7 CO5 K2

b) What are the guidelines for human factor in operator interface design? 7 CO5 K2
OR
20 a) What is meant by high level operator interface (HLOI)? How does it differ 8 CO5 K2
from a Low Level OI?
b) How do alarm management systems fit into process operating situations? 6 CO5 K2
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

AET433 Electromagnetic Interference and CATEGORY L T P CREDITS

PEC 2 1 0 3
Compatibility

Preamble: This course aims to provide the principles of Electromagnetic Interference (EMI)
and Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) and provide an insight into various techniques and
procedures required for the design of electronic systems, which are in compliance with the EMC
standards and guidelines.

Prerequisites: Nil

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Explain the fundamentals that are essential for electronics industry in the field of EMI / EMC

CO 2 Illustrate various types of EMI sources and coupling.

CO 3 Describe the different techniques for electromagnetic compatibility.

CO 4 Interpret various EMI standards and organizations.

CO 5 Model a given electromagnetic environment/system so as to comply with the standards.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO1 PO2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO10 PO 11 PO 12

CO 1 3 3 3
CO 2 3 3 3
CO 3 3 3 3
CO 4 3 3 3
CO 5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember K1 10 10 20
Understand K2 30 30 60
Apply K3 10 10 20
Analyse K4
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part
A contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each
question. Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each
module of which student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2
sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

Explain the fundamentals that are essential for electronics industry in the field of EMI / EMC.
1. Explain the fundamentals of EMI and EMC.
2. Discuss various types of EMI emission
3. Explain radiation hazards.
Course Outcome 2 (CO2):
Illustrate various types of EMI sources and coupling.
1. Explain various types of electromagnetic sources.
2. Describe different kinds of coupling methods.
3. Discuss on cross talk.
Course Outcome 3 (CO3):
Describe the different techniques for electromagnetic compatibility.
1. Explain the principle of shielding.
2. Explain Murphy’s Law.
3. Describe gasketing and sealing
4. Explain various grounding methods.
Course Outcome 4 (CO4):
Interpret various EMI standards and organizations.
1. Explain general EMI standards for Industrial and residential environment.
2. Discuss about the national and international EMI Standardizing Organizations.
3. Describe electro magnetic emission and susceptibility standards and specifications.
Course Outcome 5 (CO5):
Model a given electromagnetic environment/system so as to comply with the standards.
1. Discuss on various EMI Shielding effectiveness tests.
2. Explain about EMI test receivers.
3. Describe on EMI test wave simulators.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

SYLLABUS
Module 1:

Introduction to EMI/EMC:
Electromagnetic spectrum, basics of EMI and EMC, intra and inter system EMI, elements of
interference, sources of EMI, conducted and radiated EMI emission and susceptibility,
radiation hazards to humans and living cells, various issues of EMC, EMC testing categories.

Module 2:
Electromagnetic Sources and coupling:
Electromagnetic field sources, coupling paths, coupling via the supply network, common
mode coupling, differential mode coupling, impedance coupling, inductive and capacitive
coupling, radiative coupling, ground loop coupling. cross talk. ESD and EMP.

Module 3:
Electromagnetic Compatibility:
Principle of Shielding and Murphy’s Law, LF Magnetic shielding, Apertures and shielding
effectiveness, Choice of Materials for H, E, and free space fields, Gasketing and sealing, PCB
Level shielding, Principle of Grounding, Isolated grounds, Grounding strategies for Large
systems, Grounding for mixed signal systems, Surge protection devices, Transient protection.

Module 4:
EMI Standards and Organizations:
General Standards for Residential and Industrial environment, Basic Standards, Product
Standards, National and International EMI Standardizing Organizations; IEC, ANSI, FCC,
AS/NZS, CISPR, BSI, CENELEC, ACEC. Electro Magnetic Emission and susceptibility
standards and specifications, MIL461E Standards.

Module 5:
EMI Shielding:
EMI Shielding effectiveness tests, Open field test, TEM cell for immunity test, shielded
chamber, shielded anechoic chamber, EMI test receivers, Spectrum analyzer, EMI test wave
simulators, EMI coupling networks.

Text Books

1. Clayton Paul, “Introduction to Electromagnetic Compatibility”, Wiley Interscience, 2006.

2. Electromagnetic Compatibility Principles and Applications, Yang Zhao, Wei Yan, Jun
Sun, Springer 2021
3. V Prasad Kodali, “Engineering Electromagnetic Compatibility”, IEEE Press, Newyork,
2001, Printed in India by S. Chand & Co. Ltd., New Delhi, 2000

Reference Books

1. Henry W. Ott, “Electromagnetic Compatibility Engineering”, John Wiley & Sons Inc, New
York, 2009: ISBN: 978-981-16-6452-6
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

2. Daryl Gerke and William Kimmel, “EDN’s Designer’s Guide to Electromagnetic

Compatibility”, Elsevier Science & Technology Books, 2002
3. W Scott Bennett, “Control and Measurement of Unintentional Electromagnetic Radiation”,
John Wiley & Sons Inc., (Wiley Interscience Series) 1997.
4. Dr Kenneth L Kaiser, “The Electromagnetic Compatibility Handbook”, CRC Press 2005.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of
Lectures
1 Introduction to EMI/EMC:
1.1 Electromagnetic spectrum, basics of EMI and EMC 1
1.2 Intra and inter system EMI, elements of interference 2
1.3 Sources of EMI, conducted and radiated EMI emission and susceptibility 2
1.4 Radiation hazards to humans and living cells 1
1.5 Various issues of EMC, EMC testing categories 1
2 Electromagnetic Sources and coupling:
2.1 Electromagnetic field sources 1
2.2 Coupling paths, coupling via the supply network 1
2.2 Common mode coupling, differential mode coupling 2
2.3 Impedance coupling, inductive and capacitive coupling 1
2.4 Radiative coupling, ground loop coupling, cross talk 2
2.5 ESD and EMP 1
3 Electromagnetic Compatibility:
3.1 Principle of Shielding and Murphy’s Law, LF Magnetic shielding, 2
Apertures and shielding effectiveness.
3.2 Choice of Materials for H, E, and free space fields 1
3.3 Gasketing and sealing, PCB Level shielding 1
3.3 Principle of Grounding, Isolated grounds, Grounding strategies for 2
Large systems, Grounding for mixed signal systems
3.4 Surge protection devices, Transient protection 1
4 EMI Standards and Organizations:
4.1 General Standards for Residential and Industrial environment 1
4.2 Basic Standards 1
4.3 Product Standards, 1
4.5 National and International EMI Standardizing Organizations; IEC, 1
ANSI, FCC, AS/NZS, CISPR, BSI, CENELEC, ACEC..
4.6 Electro Magnetic Emission and susceptibility standards and 2
specifications, MIL461E Standards
5 EMI Shielding:
5.1 EMI Shielding effectiveness tests, Open field test 1
5.2 TEM cell for immunity test 1
5.3 shielded chamber, shielded anechoic chamber 1
5.4 EMI test receivers 1
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

5.5 Spectrum analyzer 1

5.6 EMI test wave simulators 1

5.7 EMI coupling networks 1
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Model Question paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

SEVENTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
(Model Question Paper)
Program: Applied Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering/ Electronics &
Instrumentation Engineering
Course Code: AET433
Course Name: Electromagnetic Interference and Compatibility
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours
PART A

Answer ALL Questions. Each Carries 3 mark.

1 Briefly explain the terms electromagnetic spectrum and radio spectrum. CO1 K1
2 What is meant by electromagnetic compatibility? CO1 K2
3 Define and explain transient Coupling. CO1 K2
4 What is radiated Coupling? CO1 K2
5 Sate and explain Murphys law. CO2 K2
6 What is meant by shielding effectiveness? CO2 K2
7 List out the EMI/EMC civilian standards. CO4 K1
8 Give the reason why CISPR standards evolved. CO4 K3
9 What is a TEM Cell? CO5 K2
10 Illustrate the significance of narrow band testing. CO5 K3

PART – B
Answer one question from each module; each question carries 14 marks.
Module – I

11. What are the different types of electromagnetic interference? 14 CO1 K2

Explain in detail.
OR
12. Explain in detail the possible harm various electromagnetic 14 CO1 K2
frequencies can cause to human cells.
Module – II

13 What is meant by cross talk? How cross talk affects signal to 14 CO2 K2
noise ratio in communication systems? What are the methods
used to reduce cross talk? Explain in detail.
OR
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

14 Define common mode coupling and differential mode coupling. 14 CO2 K2

Explain the practical methods to reduce common mode coupling
and differential mode coupling.

Module – III

15 Discuss the shielding mechanism and derive the expression for the 14 CO3 K2
attenuation due to single shield and multimedia laminated shield
with neat diagrams and equations.

OR
16 Explain in detail about the different types of system grounding for 14 CO3 K2
electromagnetic interference and compare their performance.

Module – IV

17 a) Discuss briefly of FCC regulations. 7 CO4 K2

b) Discuss details about EMI specifications and its limits with 7 CO4 K2
respect to civilian and military standards.

OR
18 What does the standard MIL 461E emphasize? What are the 14 CO4 K2
problems one may face by violating the regulations in it?

Module – V

19 a) Explain open area test site measurements. What are its limitations? 7 CO5 K2

b) Write short notes on couplers. 7 CO5 K2

OR
20 a) Explain briefly about the measurements using an anechoic 7 CO5 K2
chamber.
b) With a neat diagram explain the working of a spectrum analyser. 7 CO5 K2
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

AET443 FPGA Based System Design CATEGORY L T P CREDITS

PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: This course aims to develop the skill of FPGA based system design.

Prerequisite: ECT 203 LOGIC CIRCUIT DESIGN

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Design simple digital systems with programmable logic devices

CO 2 Analyze the architecture of FPGA

CO 3 Analyze the design considerations of FPGA
Design simple combinational and sequential circuits using FPGA
CO4

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
1 2 10 11 12
CO 1 3 3 3 3
CO 2 3 3 3 3
CO 3 3 3 3 3
CO 4 3 3 3 3

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember K1 10 10 10
Understand K2 30 30 60
Apply K3 10 10 30
Analyze K4
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test(2numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part
A contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each
question. Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each
module of which student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2
sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Design simple digital systems with programmable logic
devices.

1. Design a decade counter using Verilog.

2. Implement a full adder using ROM

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Analyze the architecture of FPGA

1. Compare coarse- and fine-grained FPGA.

2. Explain the architecture of logic block of FPGA

Course Outcome 3 (CO3): Analyze the design considerations of FPGA

1. What are the vendor specific issues in FPGA design.

2. Analyze Timing and Power dissipation in a typical FPGA.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Design simple combinational and sequential circuits

using FPGA.

1. Implement a counter in Xilinx Virtex.

2. Explain how sequential circuit can be mapped into Xilinx Virtex LUT.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

SYLLABUS
Module 1:
Introduction: Digital system design options and tradeoffs, Design methodology and technology
overview, High Level System Architecture and Specification: Behavioral modelling and simulation,
Hardware description languages (emphasis on Verilog), combinational and sequential design, state
machine design, synthesis issues, test benches.

Module 2:
Programmable logic Devices: ROM, PLA, PAL, CPLD, FPGA Features, Limitations, Architectures
and Programming. Implementation of MSI circuits using Programmable logic Devices.

Module 3:
FPGA architecture: FPGA Architectural options, granularity of function and wiring resources,
coarse V/s fine grained, Logic block architecture: FPGA logic cells, timing models, I/O block
architecture: Input and Output cell characteristics, clock input, Timing

Module 4:
Placement and Routing: Programmable interconnect - Partitioning and Placement, Routing resources,
delays. Applications -Embedded system design using FPGAs, DSP using FPGAs

Module 5:
Commercial FPGAs: Xilinx (Different series description only), Case study Xilinx Virtex:
implementation of simple combinational and sequential circuits.

Text Books
1. FPGA-Based System Design Wayne Wolf, Verlag: Prentice Hall
2. Modern VLSI Design: System-on-Chip Design (3rd Edition) Wayne Wolf, Verlag
Reference Books
1. Field Programmable Gate Array Technology - S. Trimberger, Edr, 1994, Kluwer Academic
2. Digital Design Using Field Programmable Gate Array, P.K. Chan & S. Mourad, 1994,
Prentice Hall
3. Field programmable gate array, S. Brown, R.J. Francis, J. Rose, Z.G. Vranesic, 2007, BS
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of
Lectures
1 Introduction
1.1 Digital system design options and tradeoffs 1
1.2 Design methodology and technology overview 1
1.3 High Level System Architecture and Specification: Behavioral modelling and 2
simulation
1.4 Hardware description languages, combinational and sequential design 2
1.5 State machine design, synthesis issues, test benches. 2

2 Programmable logic Devices

2.1 ROM, PLA, PAL, CPLD 2

2.2 FPGA Features, Limitations, Architectures and Programming. 2

2.3 Implementation of MSI circuits using Programmable logic Devices. 3

3 FPGA architecture
3.1 FPGA Architectural options 1
3.2 Granularity of function and wiring resources, coarse V/s fine grained 2
3.3 Logic block architecture: FPGA logic cells, timing models 2

3.4 I/O block architecture: Input and Output cell characteristics, clock input, 2
Timing

4 Placement and Routing

4.1 Programmable interconnect - Partitioning and Placement 1
4.2 Routing resources, delays 2

4.3 Applications -Embedded system design using FPGAs, DSP using FPGAs 3
5 Commercial FPGAs
5.1 Xilinx (Different series description only) 1
5.2 Case study Xilinx Virtex 3
5.3 Implementation of simple combinational and sequential circuits 3
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Model Question paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

SEVENTH SEMESTER B. TECH. DEGREE EXAMINATION,
(Model Question Paper)
Program: Applied Electronics & Instrumentation/Electronics & Instrumentation
Course Code: AET443
Course Name: FPGA Based System Design
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3Hours
PART A

Answer ALL Questions. Each Carries 3 mark.

1. What are the synthesis issues in FPGA design. K2

2 Describe FPGA design methodology. K2
3 Differentiate PLA with PAL K2
4 What are the limitations of FPGA. K2
5 Compare coarse- and fine-grained FPGA architecture. K2
6 What are the timing models in logic block architecture. K2
7 List the applications of FPGA. K2
8 Describe routing resources in FPGA routing. K2
9 Describe how a combinational circuit can be mapped into Xilinx K2
Virtex LUT.
10 List different commercially available FPGAs. K2

PART – B
Answer one question from each module; each question carries 14 marks.
Module – I

11. a) Design a full adder using Verilog. 7 CO1 K3

b) Explain behavioral modeling and simulation with an example. 7 CO1 K2
OR
12.a) What is FSM? How it is used for FPGA. 7 CO1 K2
b) Explain the purpose of test bench and how it is written in a HDL. 7 CO1 K2

Module – II

13 a) Design the function F=XYZ’+Y’ Z+X Y’ using PLA 8 CO2 K3

b) Compare CPLD with FPGA 6 CO2 K2
OR
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

14 a) Implement the following Boolean function using PAL: 8 CO2 K3

F(w, x, y, z) = Σm (0, 2, 4, 10, 11, 12, 14, 15)
b) Draw the structure of PAL and explain it. 6 CO2 K2

Module – III

15 a) Draw and explain I/O block architecture of FPGA. 7 CO2 K2

b) Draw and explain coarse grained FPGA architecture. 7 CO2 K2
OR
16 a) Explain timing in Logic block and I/O block. 7 CO2 K2
b) Draw and explain fine grained FPGA architecture. 7 CO2 K2

Module – IV

17 a) Explain partitioning and placement processes in FPGA 8 CO4 K2

b) Explain embedded system design using FPGAs 6 CO4 K2
OR
18 a) Explain the delays associated with placement and routing 7 CO4 K2
b) Explain DSP design using FPGAs 7 CO4 K2

Module – V

19 a) With neat diagram explain the architecture of Xilinx Virtex IOB. 7 CO3 K2

b) Design a four bit up counter with parallel load feature using Xilinx 7 CO3 K3
Virtex.
OR
20 a) Explain the mapping of combinational and sequential circuits using LUTs. 5 CO3 K3
b) Explain the architecture of Xilinx Virtex CLB 9 CO3 K2
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

AET453 PYTHON FOR SIGNAL AND CATEGORY L T P CREDITS

PEC 2 1 0 3
IMAGE PROCESSING

Preamble: This course aims to be a bridge the fields of programming and signal processing

Prerequisite:
MAT 101 LINEAR ALGEBRA AND CALCULUS
ECL201 SCIENTIFIC COMPUTING LAB
AET302 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Solve general scientific and engineering problems using python tool chain (K2)

CO 2 Make use of Python to explore topics in linear algebra and probability (K2)
CO 3 Make use of Python to explore topics in DSP (K3)

CO4 Make use of Python to explore topics in Image Processing (K3)

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
1 2 10 11 12
CO 1 3 3 3
CO 2 3 3 2 3
CO 3 3 3 2 3
CO 4 3 3 2 3

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember K1 10 10 10
Understand K2 30 30 60
Apply K3 10 10 30
Analyse K4
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Solve general scientific and engineering problems using python
tool chain (K2)
1. Write a Python program that utilizes a function to square each element of a list.
2. Write Python code to generate a random array of 10 numbers. Pick the number closest to
0.75.
3. Write Python code to create an array for variable 𝑥 consisting of 100 values from 0 to 20.
Compute 𝑦=sin(𝑥) and plot 𝑦 vs. 𝑥 with a blue line. Next, using boolean indexing, replace
all values of 𝑦 that are larger than 0.5 by 0.5, and all values that are smaller than − 0.75
by − 0.75, and plot the modified 𝑦 values vs. 𝑥 using a red line on the same graph.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Make use Python to explore topics in linear algebra and
probability (K2)
1. Explain the use of ordinary least squares to find an approximate solution to
overdetermined systems
2. Explain SVD and the appropriate functions in scipy.linalg to accomplish SVD
factorization
3. Generate 1000 realizations of X and Y where X and Y are independent zero mean Gaussian
random variables with a common variance. Using histogram method, estimate the pdf of 𝑍 =
√𝑋 2 + 𝑌 2

Course Outcome 3 (CO3): Make use Python to explore topics in DSP (K3)

1. Explain the different ways in which filter coefficients can be represented in

Python and illustrate with an example transfer function

2. How can we use a Periodogram for spectral estimation? Give Python code
example

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Make use to Python to explore topics in Image Processing
(K3)

1. Write Python code to generate a 5x4 RGB image which shows the letter H in red
color in a green background
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

SYLLABUS
Module 1:
Introduction, How to Run Python Code, Basic Python Syntax, Python Semantics: Variables and
Objects, Python Semantics: Operators, Built-In Scalar Types, Built-In Data Structures, Control Flow
Statements, Defining and using Functions, Errors and Exceptions, Iterators, List Comprehensions,
Generators and Generator Expressions, Modules and Packages, Strings and Regular Expressions

Module 2:

IPython: Beyond Normal Python, Introduction to NumPy: The Basics of NumPy Arrays ,
Computation on NumPy Arrays: Universal Functions, Aggregations: Min, Max, and Everything In
Between, Computation on Arrays: Broadcasting, Comparisons, Masks, and Boolean Logic, Fancy
Indexing, Sorting Arrays, Structured Data: NumPy's Structured Arrays-Functions in numpy.random-
Numpy random generator-Simple random data, Perumutations, Distributions.
Visualization with Matplotlib: Simple Line Plots, Simple Scatter Plots, Histograms, Binnings, and
Density

Module 3:

Familiarization and usage of functions in scipy.linalg: Finding the inverse, Solving a linear system,
Finding the determinant, Computing norms, Solving linear least-squares problems and pseudo-
inverses, Generalized inverse, Decompositions- Eigenvalues and eigenvectors, Singular value
decomposition, LU decomposition, Cholesky decomposition, QR decomposition, Schur
decomposition, Matrix functions-Exponential and logarithm functions, Trigonometric functions,
Hyperbolic trigonometric functions, Arbitrary function.

Module 4:
Familiarization and usage of functions in scipy.signal and scipy.fft –B-splines, Filtering-
convolution, correlation, difference equation filtering, analysis of linear systems, Filter design-FIR
filter design by windowing, IIR filter design, Filter Coefficients, Transfer function representation,
Zeros and poles representation, Second-order sections representation, Spectral Analysis-
Periodogram Measurements, Spectral Analysis using Welch’s Method, Detrend, 1D DFT and 1D
DCT

Module 5:

Familiarization and usage of functions in scikit-image: NumPy for images, Image data types, Input
types, Output types, Working with OpenCV, Image processing pipeline, Rescaling intensity values,
Image adjustment: transforming image content, Conversion between color models, Conversion
between color and gray values, Image inversion, Painting images with labels, Contrast and exposure,
Histogram Equalization, Geometrical transformations of images, Cropping, resizing and rescaling
images, Projective transforms (homographies), Image Segmentation, Edge-based segmentation,
Region-based segmentation
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Text Books
1. A Whirlwind Tour of Python by Jake VanderPlas, 2016 (available freely at
https://jakevdp.github.io/WhirlwindTourOfPython/
2. Python Data Science Handbook by Jake VanderPlas, 2017 (available freely at
https://jakevdp.github.io/PythonDataScienceHandbook/)
3. Python for Data Analysis by Wes McKinney, O’Reilly
References
1 https://numpy.org/doc/stable/reference/random/generator.html
2 Scipy.linalg tutorial: https://docs.scipy.org/doc/scipy/tutorial/linalg.html
3 Scipy.signal tutorial: https://docs.scipy.org/doc/scipy/tutorial/signal.html
4. Scipy.fft tutorial: https://docs.scipy.org/doc/scipy/tutorial/fft.html
5. Scikit-image user guide: https://scikit-image.org/docs/stable/user_guide.html
6. Hands-on Signal Analysis with Python by Thomas Haslwanter, Wiley
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of
Lectures
1.1 Introduction, How to Run Python Code, Basic Python Syntax, Python Semantics: 2
Variables and Objects, Python Semantics:
1.2 Operators, Built-In Scalar Types, Built-In Data Structures, Control Flow Statements 2
1.3 Defining and using Functions, Errors and Exceptions, Iterators, List Comprehensions 2
1.4 Generators and Generator Expressions, Modules and Packages, Strings and Regular 2
Expressions
2.1 IPython: Beyond Normal Python, Introduction to NumPy: The Basics of 2
NumPy Arrays
2.2 Computation on NumPy Arrays: Universal Functions, Aggregations: Min, 2
Max, and Everything In Between, Computation on Arrays: Broadcasting,
Comparisons
2.3 Masks, and Boolean Logic, Fancy Indexing, Sorting Arrays, Structured Data: 2
NumPy's Structured Arrays
2.4 Functions in numpy. random-Numpy random generator-Simple random data, 1
Permutations, Distributions.

2.5 Visualization with Matplotlib: Simple Line Plots, Simple Scatter Plots, 1
Histograms, Binnings, and Density

3.1 Familiarization and usage of functions in scipy.linalg: Finding the inverse, 2

Solving a linear system
3.2 Finding the determinant, computing norms, solving linear least-squares 2
problems and pseudo-inverses, Generalized inverse
3.3 Decompositions- Eigenvalues and eigenvectors, Singular value 2
decomposition, LU decomposition, Cholesky decomposition, QR
decomposition, Schur decomposition,
3.4 Matrix functions-Exponential and logarithm functions, Trigonometric 1
functions, Hyperbolic trigonometric functions, Arbitrary function.

4.1 Familiarization and usage of functions in scipy.signal and scipy.fft –B-splines, 1

Filtering- convolution, correlation, difference equation filtering, analysis of
linear systems,

4.2 Filter design-FIR filter design by windowing, IIR filter design, Filter 2
Coefficients
4.3 Transfer function representation, Zeros and poles representation, Second-order 1
sections representation
4.4 Spectral Analysis- 1
Periodogram Measurements, Spectral Analysis using Welch’s Method,
Detrend
4.5 1D DFT and 1D DCT 1
5.1 Familiarization and usage of functions in scikit-image: NumPy for images, 1
Image data types, Input types, Output types,

5.2 Working with OpenCV, Image processing pipeline, Rescaling intensity values, 1
Image adjustment: transforming image content, Conversion between color
models, Conversion between color and gray values, Image inversion
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

5.3 Painting images with labels, Contrast and exposure, Histogram Equalization, 2
Geometrical transformations of images, Cropping, resizing and rescaling
images, Projective transforms (homographies)
5.4 Image Segmentation, Edge-based segmentation, Region-based segmentation 2

Assignment:

Two assignments based on theory or coding or combined.

 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Model Question paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

SEVENTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
(Model Question Paper)
Program: Applied Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering/ Electronics &
Instrumentation Engineering
Course Code: AET453
Course Name: Python for Signal and Image Processing
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours
PART A

Answer ALL Questions. Each Carries 3 mark.

1. Everything in Python is an object. Justify this statement.
2. Write a function that returns the minimum of a list. Illustrate the function with a complete
Python script.
3. Give a code example of Numpy broadcasting which allows us to do arithmetic on different
sized arrays.
4. Write Python code to generate and plot a noisy sinewave.
5. Explain LU decomposition of an mxn matrix A.
6. What is the significance of generalized inverse of a matrix?
7. Explain with appropriate functions, how difference equation filtering can be done using Python
8. What are the advantages of DCT over DFT? Explain.
9. What conversion is needed when skimage uses an image created in OpenCV? Give code
example.
10. What are the common datatypes used when working with images?

PART – B
Answer one question from each module; each question carries 14 marks-each sub-question carries
7 marks

Module – I
11.
a. The current flowing through a semiconductor diode is given by the equation 𝒊 =
𝒒𝒗
𝑰𝟎 (𝒆𝒌𝑻 − 𝟏) where
i= current through the diode, A
v=voltage across the diode, V
I0=reverse saturation current, A
q=electronic charge=1.602x10-19, C
k= Boltzmann’s constant, 1.38x10-23 joule/K
T=temperature, K
The reverse saturation current of a diode is 𝟏𝒏𝑨. Write a program to calculate the current
flowing through this diode for all voltages from 0.3 V to 0.6 V, in 0.01 V steps. Repeat
this process for the following temperatures: 290K and 310K, and 330K. Create a plot of
the current as a function of applied voltage, with the curves for the three different
temperatures appearing as different colors.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

b. What is the difference between Python modules and packages?

OR
12.
a. A voltage source V=120V with an internal resistance Rs=50Ω supplies a load resistance RL . Plot
the power supplied to the load resistance as a function of the load resistance RL. Also find the
maximum power supplied to the load. Write the program using for loop and without using for loop.
b. Explain how errors can be handled in Python.

Module II

13.
a. Write a function that calculates the Taylor series approximation to a sine and a cosine, to second
order. Write a script which plots the exact values, and superposes them with approximate values, in
a range from –50 deg to +50 deg. Save the resulting image to a PNG-file.
b. What do you mean by fancy indexing in Numpy? Illustrate with an example.

OR
14.
a. Write code to generate 1000 realizations of Y=X2 where X is standard normal. How will you
estimate the pdf of Y using histogram method?
b. What do you mean by seeding a random number generator? Why is seeding often used in
experimentation.

Module III

15.
a. What are the different norms available in scipy.linalg? Explain.
b. Explain LU decomposition and the corresponding functions in scipy.linalg.

OR
16.
a. What do you mean by eigenvalues and eigenvectors? How can they be computed using functions in
scipy.linalg?
b. Explain QR decomposition and how to use functions in scipy.linalg to perform QR decomposition.

Module IV

17.
a. Write a Python program to design an FIR low pass filter with a length of 50 coefficients. Assume
sampling frequency=16KHz and cut-off frequency = 1KHz. Plot its impulse response and magnitude
response. Use Hamming window
b. What are the advantages of Welch method of periodogram computation? Illustrate with a code
example.

OR
18.
a. Explain how B-splines can be used to construct an approximation to a continuous function. Give
code example also.
b. Why is it better to represent a high order filter as a cascade of second order sections? Give code
example to represent a transfer function as second order sections.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Module V

19.
a. Explain the different color models in scikit-image with code examples
b. What is homography? What are the different homographies in scikit-image? Explain using code
examples.

OR
20.
a. Explain histogram equalization with code example
b. Explain different segmentation techniques in scikit-image using code examples.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
COMPUTER NUMERICAL
AET463
CONTROL PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble:
This course will help the student to understand the concept of numerical control and the peripheral
requirements of the NC system. It familiarizes the different approaches of machining using numerical
control and also to make the student familiar to the different programming methods of NC machines.
Prerequisite: Nil

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to
CO 1 Explain the structure of numerical control and its applications
CO 2 Illustrate the features and control of CNC
CO 3 Develop numerical part program of simple machining
CO 4 Summarize the structure of computer assisted part programming features
CO 5 Identify constructional and automated features of numerical controlled machining

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 2 2 3
CO 2 2 3 3
CO 3 3 3 2 3
CO 4 3 2 3
CO 5 3 3 3

Assessment Pattern
Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination
Tests
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 30 30 60
Apply 10 10 30
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution
Total CIE ESE ESE
Marks Duration
150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should
answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer
any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

Explain the structure of numerical control and its applications (K2)
1. Describe the structure of NC system
2. Enumerate difference between ordinary and NC Machine tools.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2):

Illustrate the features and control of CNC (K2)
1. Differentiate open and closed loop control system
2. Enlist features of CNC and DNC system

Course Outcome 3 (CO3):

Develop numerical part program of simple machining (K3)
1. Define the structure of CNC part programme
2. Enlist the procedure of manual programming for simple parts

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Summarize the structure of computer assisted part programming
features (K2)
1. Enumerate the structure of computer assisted part programming.
2. Enlist the procedure of APT programming for simple parts.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Identify constructional and automated features of numerical controlled
machining (K2)
1. Enumerate the constructional features of CNC machines.
2. Describe working principle of different sensors and feedback devices used in CNC machines
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Syllabus

Module 1
Principles of Numerical Control Structure of NC systems, Applications of CNC machines in
manufacturing, Advantages of CNC machines. Historical developments and future trends. Future
of NC Machines, Difference between ordinary and NC Machine tools.

Module 2
Fundamentals of numerical control, advantages of NC systems, classification of NC systems, point
to point and contouring systems. Incremental and absolute systems open loop and closed loop
systems. Features of CNC Systems, Direct Numerical Control (DNC), Standard Controllers and
General Programming features available in CNC Systems, Adaptive control systems.

Module 3
NC Part Programming: Axis identification and coordinate systems, Structure of CNC part
program, Programming codes, Programming for 2 and 3 axis control systems, Part programming:
Manual part programming, Preparatory and miscellaneous codes, Interpolation and canned cycle,
Tool compensation, Simple programming exercises on turning, milling and drilling.

Module 4
Computer aided programming, concepts, APT programming, part programming examples.
Geometric definitions, cutter motion definitions post processor statements, use of canned cycles,
Generation of NC Programmes through CAD/CAM systems.

Module 5
Constructional Details of CNC Machines: Machine structure, Slide ways, ball screws and guideways,
swarf removal and safety considerations, Automatic tool changers and multiple pallet systems,
Sensors and feedback devices in CNC machines.

Text Books
1. Radhakrishnan, P., “Computer Numerical Control Machines”, New Central Book
Agencies
2. Mikell P. Groover., “Automation, Production Systems and Computer Integrated
Manufacturing”, Prentice Hall.

Reference Books
1. Yoram Koren, “Computer Control of Manufacturing Systems”, Tata McGraw Hill
Book Co.,2005.

2. HMT, Mechatronics, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited, New

Delhi,1998.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of lectures
1 Module-1- Principles of Numerical Control 6 Hours

1.1 Structure of NC systems, Applications of CNC machines in 2 Hr

manufacturing,
1.2 Advantages of CNC machines. Historical developments and future 1 Hr
trends.
1.3 Future of NC Machines 1 Hr
1.4 Difference between ordinary and NC Machine tools. 2 Hr
2 Module 2-Control of NC Systems: 7 Hours
2.1 Classification of CNC control systems 1 Hr
2.2 Open and Closed loop systems 1 Hr
2.3 Features of CNC Systems, 1 Hr
2.4 Direct Numerical Control (DNC), Standard Controllers and 2 Hr
General Programming features available in CNC Systems
2.5 Adaptive control systems. 2 Hr
3 Module-3- NC Part Programming 9 Hours
3.1 Axis identification and coordinate systems 1 Hr
3.2 Structure of CNC part program, Programming codes 2 Hr
3.3 Programming for 2 and 3 axis control systems 1 Hr
3.4 Preparatory and miscellaneous codes 1 Hr
3.5 Interpolation and canned cycle, Tool compensation 1 Hr
3.6 Simple programming exercises on turning, milling and drilling. 3 Hr
4 Module-4- Computer aided part programming; 7 Hours
4.1 Tools for computer aided part programming 2 Hr
4.2 Computer aided NC Programming in APT language 2 Hr
4.3 use of canned cycles 1 Hr
4.4 Generation of NC Programmes through CAD/CAM systems 2 Hr
5 Module-5- Constructional Details of CNC Machines: Tooling of 6 Hours
CNC Machines
5.1 Machine structure, Slide –ways , ball screws and guideways 2 Hr
5.2 Swarf removal and safety considerations 1 Hr
5.3 Automatic tool changers and multiple pallet systems 1 Hr
5.4 Sensors and feedback devices in CNC machines 2 Hr
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

MODEL QUESTION PAPER

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
SEVENTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
Applied Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering/ Electronics & Instrumentation
Engineering
Course Code: AET 463
Course Name: COMPUTER NUMERICAL CONTROL

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART – A
(ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS, EACH QUESTION CARRIES 3 MARKS)
1. How does the structure of NC/CNC machine tools differ from conventional machine
tools?
2. Explain clearly the difference between NC and CNC machine.
3 Differentiate open loop and closed loop system in CNC machine.
4 Enumerate advantages and disadvantages of Direct numerical control
5 What is GO2 and GO3 in circular interpolation.
6 What is tool nose radius compensation and how to use it.
7 What is CAPP and discuss the benefits of CAPP
8 Discuss the code is used for canned cycle definition
9 Explain briefly swarf removal process in CNC machine.
10 What are the functions of guideways?

PART – B
(ANSWER ONE FULL QUESTION FROM EACH MODULE)

Module- 1

11 a) With schematic diagram explain the basic principal of numerical control. (8 Marks)
b) Explain the historical development of numerical controlled machining (6Marks)
12 a) Explain the applications of CNC machines in manufacturing (7 Marks)
b) Enlist and describe the advantages and disadvantages of CNC Machine (7 Marks)

Module-2

13 a) Describe the basic system of CNC machine tool (7Marks)

b) Explain the classification of NC system. (7Marks)
14 a) What is adaptive control system in CNC machining and what are its benefit
(7Marks)
b) Describe the standard controllers of CNC machines . (7Marks)

Module-3

15 a) Explain the structure of NC part program (7Marks)

b) Describe the various programing functions of NC machining (7Marks)

16 a) Explain the fundamental element for developing manual part programme. (7Marks)
b) Describe various G code and M codes of NC programming. (7Marks)

Module-4
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

17 Write the APT program of a given basic geometry element (14Marks)

18 a) Briefly explain the four types of statements in APT language. (8Marks)

b) Explain the generation of NC program through CAD/CAM system (6Marks)

Module-5

19 a) Explain Automatic tool changers and multiple pallet systems in CNC system.(7Marks)
b) Explain the working of an optical absolute encoder. How the number of tracks and sectors
of absolute encoder is related to the resolution of the encoder? (7Marks)
20 a) Explain the working of recirculating ball screws with a neat sketch. (6Marks)
b) Explain briefly the following
i) Hydrostatic guideways ii) Aerostatic guideways. (8Marks)
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

DATA STRUCTURES AND CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

AET 473
ALGORITHMS PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: This course helps the student to have an idea of Data Structures and Algorithms. Students
are introduced to the basic design consideration of algorithms. Discussion on various data structures,
algorithms and their applications are also included as part of the course to get an overall idea on this
topic.
Prerequisite: Nil

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Analyse various data structures and their applicability

CO 2 Use appropriate data structures like arrays, linked lists, stacks and queues to solve
real world problems efficiently.
CO 3 Comprehend and implement various techniques for searching and sorting
CO 4 Represent and manipulate data using nonlinear data structures like trees and
graphs to design algorithms for various applications.
CO 5 Identify the appropriate data structure to design efficient algorithm for the given
application
CO 6 Illustrate various hashing techniques.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 3 2 3
1
CO 3 2 3
2
CO 3 2 3
3
CO 3 3 3 3
4
CO 3 3 3 3
5
CO 3 3 3 3
6

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration
150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should
answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer
any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):
1. Differentiate between primitive and non-primitive data structures with the help of examples.
2. What do you mean by asymptotic notations?

Course Outcome 2 (CO2):

1. Differentiate between stacks and queues.

Course Outcome 3 (CO3):

1. Differentiate between linear search and binary search.
2. What are hash tables?

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. What is breadth-first search?
2. What are the internal and external sorting algorithms?

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Characteristics of dynamic programming.
2. What is backtracking
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Syllabus

Module I
Introduction to Data Structures: Basic Terminology, Elementary Data Structure Organization,
Classification of Data Structures: Primitive and Non-primitive, Linear and Non-linear, Operations
on Data structures, Asymptotic notations, Notion of recursive algorithms, Recurrence relations

Module II
Linear Data Structures: Introduction, variations, operations and applications of array, queue, stack
and linked list

Array: Representation of arrays, Applications of arrays, sparse matrix and its representation.

Stack: Stack-Definitions & Concepts, Operations on Stacks, Applications of Stacks, Polish

Expression, Reverse Polish Expression and Their Compilation, Recursion, Tower of Hanoi

Queue: Representation of Queue, Operations on Queue, Circular Queue, Priority Queue, Array
representation of Priority Queue, Double Ended Queue, Applications of Queue

Linked lists: - singly linked list, doubly linked list, Circular linked list, operations on linked list,
linked list with header nodes

Module III
Non-Linear Data Structures: Concepts and types of trees, tree traversal algorithms, search trees,
Priority queue implementation and applications
Graph-Matrix Representation of Graphs, Elementary Graph operations, (Breadth First Search, Depth
First Search, Spanning Trees, Shortest path, Minimal spanning tree).

Module IV
Indexing structure: Concepts and implementations of B-Tree, B+ tree, Hashing, Dictionary

Graph Algorithms: Depth-first search, strongly connected components, Breadth-first search,

Dijkstra's algorithm

Searching and Sorting Algorithms: Linear search, Binary search, Hash tables, internal and external
sorting algorithms, sorting without comparison.

Module V
Algorithm Design: Greedy algorithm, Divide and conquer, Dynamic programming, Backtracking,
Branch and bound, Randomized algorithms

Algorithm Analysis: Asymptotic notations, Recurrences, NP complete problems

Text Books
1. Samanta D., Classic Data Structures, Prentice Hall India, 2/e, 2009.
2. Richard F. Gilberg, Behrouz A. Forouzan, Data Structures: A Pseudocode Approach with
C, 2/e, Cengage Learning, 2005.
3. Aho A. V., J. E. Hopcroft and J. D. Ullman, Data Structures and Algorithms, Pearson
Publication,1983.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Reference Books

1. Horwitz E., S. Sahni and S. Anderson, Fundamentals of Data Structures in C, University

Press (India), 2008.
2. Tremblay J. P. and P. G. Sorenson, Introduction to Data Structures with Applications, Tata
McGraw Hill, 1995.
3. Peter Brass, Advanced Data Structures, Cambridge University Press, 2008
4. Wirth N., Algorithms + Data Structures = Programs, Prentice Hall, 2004.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of
Lectures
1 MODULE 1
1.1 Introduction to Data Structures: Basic Terminology, Elementary Data
2
Structure Organization
1.2 Classification of Data Structures: Primitive and Non-primitive, Linear and
2
Non-linear
1.3 Operations on Data structures, Asymptotic notations, Notion of recursive
2
algorithms, Recurrence relations
2 MODULE 2

2.1 Introduction, variations, operations and applications of array, queue, stack

and linked list, operations and applications of array, queue, stack and linked 2
list
2.2 Array: Representation of arrays, Applications of arrays, sparse matrix and
its representation., 2

2.3 Stack: Stack-Definitions & Concepts, Operations On Stacks, Applications

of Stacks, Polish Expression, Reverse Polish Expression And Their 2
Compilation, Recursion, Tower of Hanoi
2.4 Queue: Representation Of Queue, Operations On Queue, Circular Queue,
Priority Queue, Array representation of Priority Queue, Double Ended 2
Queue, Applications of Queue
2.5 Linked lists:- singly linked list, doubly linked list, Circular linked list,
2
operations on linked list, linked list with header nodes
3 MODULE 3

3.1 Concepts and types of trees, tree traversal algorithms, search trees 2
3.2 Priority queue implementation and applications
2
3.3 Graph-Matrix Representation Of Graphs, Elementary Graph operations, (
Breadth First Search, Depth First Search, Spanning Trees, Shortest path,
3
Minimal spanning tree ).

4 MODULE 4
4.1 Indexing structure: Concepts and implementations of B-Tree, B+ tree,
Hashing, Dictionary 2

4.2 Graph Algorithms: Depth-first search, strongly connected components, 2

 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Breadth-first search, Dijkstra's algorithm

4.3 Searching and Sorting Algorithms: Linear search, Binary search, Hash
2
tables, internal and external sorting algorithms, sorting without comparison.
5 MODULE 5

5.1 Algorithm Design: Greedy algorithm, Divide and conquer, Dynamic

programming, Backtracking, Branch and bound, Randomized algorithms 4

5.2 Algorithm Analysis : Asymptotic notations, Recurrences, NP complete

4
problems
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

MODEL QUESTION PAPER

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
SEVENTH SEMESTER B.TECH. DEGREE EXAMINATION
Programme: Applied Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering/ Electronics & Instrumentation
Engineering
Course Code: AET 473
Course Name: Data Structures and Algorithms
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours
PART A
Answer all questions, each carries 3 marks. Marks

1 What do you mean by asymptotic notations? Explain briefly about the asymptotic (3)
notations that are commonly used to calculate the running time complexity of an
algorithm?
2 Differentiate between primitive and non-primitive data structures with the help of (3)
examples
3 Write an algorithm/pseudocode to delete a given element k from an array A of n (3)
elements? Assume that the element k is always present in A.
4 How will you represent a polynomial 3x2 +2xy2 +5y3 +7yz using a singly linked (3)
list?
5 Draw the binary tree whose sequential representation is given below. (3)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
14 15

A B C D —E F —G ——H ——I

6 Define (i) Tree (ii) Binary Tree. (3)

7 Explain efficiency of (i) Quick sort (ii) Binary searching. (3)
8 Write an algorithm to search for a substring in a given string. (3)
9 Explain backtracking with an example. (3)
10 What are the steps in dynamic programming? (3)

PART B
Answer any one full question from each module, each carries14 marks.
MODULE I

11 a) Explain in detail the substitution method for solving recurrence relations (7)
b) Explain the operations on Data structures with examples. (7)
12 a) What is a recursive algorithm? Explain different types of recursive algorithms with (6)
examples.
b) Explain linear and nonlinear data structures. (8)

MODULE II
13 a) Assume that a stack is represented using a linked list. Write algorithms for the (7)
following operations: - (i) Push (ii) Pop
b) Explain the structure of Doubly Linked List (DLL). Differentiate the difference (7)
between DLL and Doubly Circular Linked List (DCLL). Explain the procedures to
insert a node in DLL at the beginning and at the last.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

14 a) Write algorithms to perform the following operations on a doubly linked list. (i) (7)
Insert a node with data ‘y’ after a node whose data is ‘x’. (ii) Delete a node whose
data is ‘s’ . (iii) Insert a node with data ‘a’ as the 1st node of the list.
b) Explain different types of queues and their applications. (7)

MODULE III
15 a) Which are the elementary graph operations? Explain in detail. (7)
b) What is a priority queue? Implement using a linked list. (7)
16 a) Explain the various ways in which a graph can be represented bringing out the (7)
advantages and disadvantages of each representation.
b) Explain various tree traversal algorithms with examples. (7)

MODULE IV
17 a) Write an algorithm to perform selection sort in an array. Using the above selection (6)
sort algorithm, sort the input file [25, 7, 46, 11, 85].
b) With the help of an algorithm/pseudocode and suitable example, explain how you (8)
would perform binary search on an array of n elements. Find the time complexity of
binary search algorithm.
18 a) Explain in brief how the shortest path is calculated using Dijkstra’s algorithm. (7)
b) Write an algorithm to perform binary search on a given set of ‘n’ numbers. Using (7)
the algorithm search for the element 23 in the set [12, 23, 34, 44, 48, 53, 87, 99]

MODULE V
19 a) Explain divide-and-conquer approach in detail. (7)
b) Explain greedy algorithm with example. Also explain its advantages and (7)
disadvantages.
20 a) Explain dynamic programming in detail with example. (7)
b) What is meant by NP-complete problems? Explain in detail with examples. What are (7)
the techniques that can be applied to solve computational problems in general?
****
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

AET415 INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS OEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: The syllabus is prepared with a view of giving the student a broad overview of the basic
elements of an electronic measurements and instrumentation systems.

Prerequisite: NIL
Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

Knowledge
CO Description
Level
CO1 Illustrate the working principles of electronic measuring instruments. K2
CO2 Identify various types of errors in measuring systems and choose methods K3
for minimization of the errors.
CO3 Summarize the concepts of DC and AC bridges used in measurement K2
systems.
CO4 Apply the principles and functions of various types of Transducers in K3
measuring systems.
CO5 Explain the concepts of CRO, DSO, various recording devices and K2
waveform analyzing instruments.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 3
CO2 3 2 3
CO3 3 2 3
CO4 3 2 3
CO5 3 3

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester Examination

1 2
Remember 10 10 20
Understand 30 30 70
Apply 10 10 10
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

End Semester Examination Pattern:

There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contains 5 questions with 4 questions (not exceeding 2
questions from each module). Part B contains 2 questions from each module out of which one to be answered.
Each question carries 10 mark and can have 2 to 3 sub-divisions.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): With detailed diagrams explain the principles working and limitations of CRO s
and DSOs?

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): What are the design steps which can be used to improve the accuracy and
resolution of deflection type voltmeters and ammeters?
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Course Outcome 3 (CO3): List and explain various applications of AC and DC bridges.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Design a remote temperature measuring system for furnace operating in 1000K-
1500K temperature range.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): With suitable diagram explain the functioning of a strip chart recorder.

Syllabus

Module 1
Principles of measurements, Standards-calibration of meters - qualities of measurements- accuracy,
precision sensitivity, resolution, Loading effect- characteristics, safety measures. Errors in measurements
and its analysis.

Module 2
Indicating instruments - deflection type meters –principles and operation.- moving coil, moving iron,
dynamo meter , induction, thermal, electrostatic and rectifier type meters.

Module 3
Transducers, principles and applications of basic transducers: LVDT, temperature sensors, thermocouples,
RTD, LDR, displacement transducers, strain gauges, accelerometers, piezo electric transducers.

Module 4
DC bridges: introduction, sources and detectors for DC bridges. General equation for bridge at balance.
Types of bridges –Wheatstone, Kelvin bridge.
AC bridges: introduction, sources and detectors for AC bridges. General equation for bridge at balance.
Maxwell’s inductance and Maxwell’s inductance -capacitance bridge, Anderson bridge, Shering bridge.

Module 5
Cathode ray oscilloscopes, principles, construction and limitations –Delayed time base, Analog storage and
Sampling oscilloscopes.
Digital storage oscilloscopes – principles. Measurements using CRO s and DSO s. Recording instruments:
Strip chart recorder, X-Y Plotter, LCD displays.

Text Books

1. David A Bell, Electronic Instrumentation and Measurements , 3rd Edition Oxford 2017
2. D. Patranabis, Sensors and Transducers, PHI 2nd edition 2003
3. Golding E W and Widdis F C Electrical Measurements and Measuring systems, Wheeler &co
1993

Reference books

1. Kim R Fowler, Electronic Instrument Design, Oxford reprint 2015

2. Kalsi HS, Electronic Instrumentation and Measurements, Mc Graw hill, 4 ed 2019.
3. A K Swahny, A Course in Electronic Measurements and Instrumentation, 2015, Dhanpath Rai & Co
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures

1 Principles of measurements 8
1.1 Introduction to the principles of measurements 2
1.2 Qualities of measurements, Principles of loading and 3
characteristics of measuring instruments
1.3 Errors in measurements and analysis 3
2 Indicating instruments 6
2.1 Deflection type meters 3
2.2 Thermal, electrostatic and rectifier types of meters 3
3 Transducers 7
3.1 Introduction to transducers 2
3.2 LVDT, temperature sensors, thermocouples, 2
3.3 RTD, LDR, displacement transducers 1
3.4 strain gauges, accelerometers, piezoelectric transducers 2
4 Bridges 7
4.1 Introduction to bridges 1

4.2 General equation for bridge at balance. 2

4.3 DC bridges: Types of bridges –Wheatstone, Kelvin bridge 2

4.4 AC bridges: Maxwell’s inductance and Maxwell’s inductance - 2

capacitance bridge, Anderson bridge, Shering bridge

5 Oscilloscopes and Plotters 6

5.1 Cathode ray oscilloscopes, principles, construction and limitations 1

5.2 Delayed time base, analog storage and sampling oscilloscopes. 2

5.3 Digital storage oscilloscopes and Recording instruments 3

 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Model Question paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
SEVENTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, (Model Question Paper)
Course Code: AET415
Course Name: Instrumentation Systems
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours
PART A

Answer ALL Questions. Each Carries 3 mark.

1. What are the differences between terms accuracy and precision? CO1 K2

2. What are the reasons for the development of errors in measuring devices? CO2 K2

3. Explain rectifier type of deflection meters. CO2 K2

4. Sketch a graph to show normal distribution of random errors. Discuss its shape. CO2 K2

5. List the forces involved in a moving instrument and explain each. CO3 K2

6. With a diagram explain potentiometer type transducer. CO4 K2

7. Draw the circuit diagram of a capacitance bridge. derive the balance equation. CO3 K2

8. Briefly explain the factors which limit the maximum frequency which be CO5 K2
displayed buy an oscilloscope.

9. Explain the principle of liquid crystal displays. CO5 K2

10. With a diagram briefly explain the working principle of an X-Y plotter CO4 K2
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

PART-B
Answer any one question from each module
Module I
11 What are the major categories of measurement errors? Define and 14 CO2 K2
explain each. How can these errors be minimized?
OR
12. a) Define the term ‘resolution’ with reference to measurements. What are 10 CO1 K2
the factors which limit the resolution of an instrument?
b) What are the major categories of measuring instruments? Explain with 4 CO1 K2
suitable examples.

Module II
13. With suitable diagrams analyze the functioning of a permanent magnet 14 CO1 K3
moving coil instrument? Derive the torque equation.
OR
14. a) With suitable diagrams explain the working principles of an electrostatic 10 CO1 K2
voltmeter. Derive and explain its torque equation.
b) List merits and demerits of thermocouple instruments. 4 CO1 K2

Module III
15 List transducers used to measure low, medium and high values of 14 CO4 K2
temperature. Describe their principles. What kind of temperature
transducer will be suitable to measure the temperature of a blast furnace?
Justify your selection.
OR
16.a) What is the working principle of a piezoelectric transducer? Explain in 7 CO4 K2
detail.
b) What is the importance of load cells in measurements? Explain the 7 CO4 K2
factors on which the sensitivity of a load cell depends.

Module IV
17 With a diagram explain the functioning of wheat stone bridge. Derive the 14 CO3 K2
equation for the bridge at balance condition.
OR
18 With a diagram explain the functioning of Shering bridge. Derive the 14 CO3 K2
equation for the bridge at balance condition.

Module V
19 With a detailed diagram explain the functioning of a digital storage 14 CO5 K2
oscilloscope.
OR
20 With suitable diagram explain the functioning of a strip chart recorder. 14 CO5 K2
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

AET425 BIOMEDICAL CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

ENGINEERING
OEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble:

This course will introduce aspects of biomedical engineering to describe biological systems described using
engineering principles and modern diagnosing equipment.

Prerequisite: NIL

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO1 Describe the basic idea about the biomedical engineering technology.
CO2 Explain the principle and working of different types of bio medical electronic
equipment/device
CO3 Understand the electrical muscle activities and to measure it.
CO4 Analyze the brain wave activities and abnormalities.
CO5 Illustrate the principles of modern medical diagnosing machines.

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 2 3 3 2
CO2 3 2 3 3 2
CO3 3 3 3 3 2
CO4 3 3 3 3 2
CO5 3 3 3 3 2

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment Tests End semester examination

I II
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 20
Apply 20 20 70
Analyze
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total marks CIE ESC ESC Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance: 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers): 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project: 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain
10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students
should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer
any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Syllabus

Module 1
Introduction to biomedical engineering, Sources of biomedical signals, General characteristics of biomedical
signals, Examples of biomedical signals. Objective of biomedical signal analysis, Difficulties of biomedical
signal analysis.
Bio signals acquisition: Acquisition of biomedical signals like ECG, EMG, EEG, and EGG (concept only)

Module 2
Basic medical instrumentation system, Intelligent medical instrumentation system. Biomedical Recorders:
Electrocardiograph, VCG, PCG, EEG, EMG and other biomedical recorders.
Electrocardiogram: Generation of ECG, pacemakers – natural & ectopic, waveforms and their significance.
Diagnostics value of ECG, ECG machine – Block diagram - Artifacts in ECG recording. Arrhythmias – rate
abnormalities, AV conduction block, premature contractions, flutter, fibrillation.

Module 3
Electrical activity of muscles- EMG. Measurement of EMG - block diagram of EMG machine. Applications
of EMG - myoelectric control system. Electrodes for measurement of bio potentials– ECG, EEG & EMG
electrodes. Basics of other bio potentials – ENG, ERG, EOG, EGG.

Module 4
Electroencephalogram - brain waves, sleep stages, Abnormal EEGs – epilepsy. Measurement of EEG - 10-
20 electrode system, block diagram of EEG machine. Applications of EEG.
Biomedical Telemetry system: Components of biotelemetry system, application of telemetry in medicine.
Single channel telemetry system for ECG.

Module 5
Introduction to modern imaging systems: X-ray machines, Nuclear medical imaging, Magnetic resonance
imaging, Ultrasonic imaging, Computed Tomography and thermal imaging systems.
Recording Systems: Basic recording systems, general condition for signal conditioners, sources of noise in
law level measurement.

Text Books

1. R. S. Khandpur, Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation, Tata Mc Graw Hill

2. Rangaraj M Rangayyan, Biomedical Signal analysis – a case study approah

References:

1. Arthur C. Guyton “Textbook of Medical Physiology”, Prism Books (Pvt) Ltd & W.B. Saunders
Company.1991
2. John G. Webster: “Medical Instrumentation -Application and Design” ; Houghton Mifflin Co.,
Boston.1992
3. Geddes & Baker, “Principles of Applied Biomedical Instrumentation”, John Wiley 3 rd edition 1989
4. Webb, S. “The Physics of Medical Imaging”, Institute of Physics Publishing, Bristol, 1992.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

NO TOPIC NO. OF
LECTURES
Introduction to biomedical engineering
Sources of biomedical signals 1
General characteristics of biomedical signals
Examples of biomedical signals. 2
I Objective of biomedical signal analysis
Difficulties of biomedical signal analysis. 2
Acquisition of biomedical signals like ECG, EMG 1
Acquisition of biomedical signals like EEG, and EGG 1
Basic medical instrumentation system
Intelligent medical instrumentation system 2
Biomedical Recorders: Electrocardiograph, VCG,
PCG, EEG, EMG and other biomedical recorders. 2
Electrocardiogram: Generation of ECG, pacemakers – natural &
II ectopic, waveforms and their significance. 1
Diagnostics value of ECG, ECG machine – Block diagram
Artifacts in ECG recording 1
Arrhythmias – rate abnormalities, AV conduction block,
premature contractions, flutter, fibrillation 2
Electrical activity of muscles- EMG.
Measurement of EMG - block diagram of EMG machine 2
Applications of EMG - myoelectric control system 1
III Electrodes for measurement of bio potentials– ECG,
EEG & EMG electrodes 2
Basics of other bio potentials – ENG, ERG, EOG, EGG 2
Electroencephalogram - brain waves, sleep stages 1
Abnormal EEGs – epilepsy
Measurement of EEG - 10-20 electrode system 2
IV Block diagram of EEG machine. Applications of EEG 1
Biomedical Telemetry system: Components of biotelemetry system 1
Application of telemetry in medicine.
Single channel telemetry system for ECG 1
Introduction to modern imaging systems: X-ray machines,
Nuclear medical imaging 2
Magnetic resonance imaging, Ultrasonic imaging, Computed
V Tomography thermal imaging systems 3
Recording Systems: Basic recording systems 1
General condition for signal conditioners
sources of noise in law level measurement. 1
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

MODEL QUESTION PAPER
SEVENTH SEMESTER B. TECH. DEGREE EXAMINATION
(Applied Electronics & Instrumentation / Electronics & Instrumentation)
AET425 BIOMEDICAL ENGINEERING
Max Marks: 100 Duration : 3 Hours

PART A

(Answer all questions. Each question carries 3 marks)

1. How bio-potential is generated in cells? (3)
2. Which are signals acquired for analysis of EEG? (3)
3. What are the different type of amplifiers used with bio signal recorders in
Medical instrumentation. (3)
4. What is a Defibrillator? (3)
5. Which are the types of electrodes used for ECG signal acquisition? (3)
6. Define EOG and ERG. (3)
7. List any three brain waves with their normal frequencies. (3)
8. What is a single channel radio telemetry system? (3)
9. Write any three advantages of NMR imaging technique. (3)
10. Mention any one application of thermal imaging system. (3)

PART B

(Answer one full question from each module)

MODULE 1

11. a) How does depolarization and repolarization occur in a cell? (7)

b) What are difficulties occurring in biomedical signal analysis? (7)

OR

12. a) What are the general characteristics of biomedical signals? (7)

b) With a neat diagram explain acquisition of EEG signals. (7)

MODULE 2
13. a) With neat diagrams explain natural and ectopic pacemakers. (7)
b) What is fibrillation? How it can be treated? (7)

OR

14. a) Why intelligent medical instrumentation is preferred than conventional? (7)

b) Draw the block diagram of ECG machine and describe each block. (7)

MODULE 3
15. a) What is EMG? Describe the measurement of EMG. (7)
b) What are the applications of EMG signals? Explain any one application. (7)

OR

16. a) What is bio potential? Classify different bio potential electrodes. (10)
b) Explain myoelectric control system. (4)
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

MODULE 4
17. a)With the block diagram explain single channel ECG telemetry transmitter. (7)
b) How EEG is recorded? Which are signals to be analyzed for
abnormalities identification? (7)

OR

18.a) Enumerate the advantages of telemetry in medicine. (6)

b) With diagram explain 10-20 electrode method of EEG measurement. (8)

MODULE 5
19. a) List any four properties of X-ray. With a neat block diagram explain the working
of an X-ray machine. (10)
b) Compare CT scan and X-ray imaging technique. (4)

OR

20. a) What is the principle behind NMR imaging? What are the advantages of NMR
imaging? (9)
b) What are the basic elements of a bio signal recording system? (5)
*****
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

AET435 MEMS CATEGORY L T P CREDITS

OEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: This course aims to impart knowledge in the design and fabrication of
microsystems

Prerequisite: Nil

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Explain theLaws of scaling, multidisciplinary nature of MEMS and various

Engineering disciplines in MEMS.
CO 2 Describe the various actuation mechanisms employed in MEMS devices and the
geometry of typical sensors and actuators
CO 3 Discuss the various process steps in microfabrication

CO4 Explain the various micromachining techniques and packaging techniques

employed in MEMS
CO5 List and explain the multi-disciplinary applications of MEMS

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
1 2 10 11 12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 2 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 2 2
CO5 3 3 3 3 3

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember K1 10 10 10
Understand K2 30 30 60
Apply K3 10 10 30
Analyse K4
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10marks
Continuous Assessment Test(2numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part
A contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each
question. Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each
module of which student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2
sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Explain the Laws of scaling, multidisciplinary nature of

MEMS and various Engineering disciplines in MEMS.
1. Explain the scaling laws that applies to MEMS

2. Discuss the multidisciplinary nature of MEMS

3. Discuss Microfluidics, MOEMS, Bio-MEMS and RF MEMS

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Describe the various actuation mechanisms employed in
MEMS devices and the geometry of typical sensors and actuators.
1. Explain the various actuation mechanisms employed MEMS sensors and actuators
2. Discuss parallel plate sensing employed in MEMS.

Course Outcome 3 (CO3): Discuss the various process steps in microfabrication.

1. Explain Czochralski crystal growth process of single crystal silicon

2. Compare low pressure CVD (LPCVD) and Plasma Enhanced CVD (PECVD)

3. Describe the various steps of photolithography

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Explain the various micromachining techniques and

packaging techniques employed in MEMS.

1. Compare bulk and surface micromachining technique.

2. Discuss MEMS packaging techniques, viz, die preparation, surface bonding,

wire bonding

3. Explain LIGA process with an example

 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): List and explain the multi-disciplinary applications

of MEMS.

1. Describe MEMS medical pressure sensors.

2. Discuss the geometry and operation Digital Mirror Devices

3. Explain MEMS microphone

SYLLABUS
Module 1:
Introduction: Overview of microelectronics manufacture and Microsystem technology. Definition
– MEMS materials. Laws of scaling. The multi-disciplinary nature of MEMS. Survey of materials
central to micro engineering. Application of MEMS in various industries.

Module 2:
Microsensors and Actuators: Working Principle of Microsystems – various micro sensing and
actuation techniques – parallel plate electrostatic sensing - micro sensors – various types –
interdigitated finger capacitors or comb drive sensors - micro accelerometers.

Module 3:
Micro Fabrication: Substrates – Single crystal silicon wafer formation – Czochralski crystal growth
process – Photolithography - Ion Implantation – Diffusion – Oxidation – Chemical Vapour
Deposition – LPCVD – PECVD – Physical Vapour Deposition – Etching process – various types –
Photo resists

Module 4:
Microsystem Manufacturing: MEMS Process – Bulk Micromachining – Surface Micromachining
-Sacrificial etching process –LIGA Process – SLIGA – Die level – device level – System level –
packaging techniques – die preparation - surface bonding – wire bonding – sealing

Module 5:
MEMS Applications: Bio-MEMS - Medical pressure sensors, Optical MEMS - Digital Mirror
Devices (DMDs), Microfluidics – InkJet Print head technology, MEMS inertial sensors –
Gyroscopes, RF MEMS – Switches, MEMS Microphones.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Text Books
1. Tai-Ran- Hsu,MEMS and Microsystems – Design and Manufacture, Tata McGraw-
Hill Publishing Company Limited, 2010
2. Chang Liu, Foundation of MEMS, Pearson Education, 2012
Reference Books
1. Mohamed Gad –el -Hak, “MEMS Handbook”, CRC Press, 2002
2. Rai- Choudhury P, “MEMS and MOEMS – Technology and Applications”, PHI Learning
Private Limited, 2009
3. M. H. Bao, “Micromechanical Transducers: Pressure sensors, accelerometers and
gyroscopes”, Elsevier Pvt. Ltd., NewYork, 1st Edition, 2000
4. Marc Madou, “Fundamentals of Microfabrication”, CRC Press, 1st Ed., 1997
5. Edited by D.Uttamchandani, “Handbook of MEMS for wireless and mobile applications”,
Woodhead Publishing Limited, 2013
6. Stephen D. Senturia, “Microsystem Design”, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 1st Ed. 2001

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of
Lectures
1 MEMS –Introduction
1.1 Overview of microelectronics manufacture and Microsystem 1
technology
1.2 Quasi-fundamental scaling laws applicable to MEMS 2
1.3 Multi-disciplinary nature of MEMS and Microsystem 1
1.4 Application of MEMS in various industries 1

2 Microsensors and Actuators

2.1 Overview of various micro sensing and actuation techniques 1
2.2 Parallel plate electrostatic sensing - analysis 2
2.3 Inter-digitated finger capacitors or comb drive sensors 2

2.4 Micro accelerometers - design 1

3 Microfabrication
3.1 Single crystal silicon wafer formation – Czochralski crystal growth 1
process
3.2 Photolithography 1
3.3 Ion Implantation – Diffusion – Oxidation 1
3.3 Chemical Vapour Deposition – LPCVD – PECVD – Physical Vapour 3
Deposition – Sputtering process
3.4 Etching process – various types – Photo resists 2

4 Microsystem Manufacturing
4.1 MEMS Process – Bulk Micromachining – Surface Micromachining 2
4.2 Sacrificial etching process – release of membranes 1
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

4.3 LIGA Process – process steps, example, SLIGA 2

4.4 MEMS packaging techniques – die preparation - surface bonding – wire 2
bonding - sealing

5 MEMS Applications
5.1 Bio-MEMS - Medical pressure sensors 2
5.2 Optical MEMS - Digital Mirror Devices (DMDs), 2
5.3 Microfluidics – InkJet Print head technology, 1
5.4 MEMS inertial sensors – Gyroscopes 2

5.5 MEMS microphones and RF MEMS switches 2

Assignment:

1. List the multidisciplinary applications of MEMS

2. Perform a study of Bio-MEMS, microfluidics, MOEMS, RFMEMS
3. Discuss various MEMS sensors and actuators
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Model Question paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

SEVENTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, (Model Question Paper)
Course Code: AET435
Course Name: MEMS
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3Hours
PART A

Answer ALL Questions. Each Carries 3 mark.

1. List the applications of MEMS devices in industry K2

2 Comment on the multi-disciplinary nature of MEMS. K2
3 Discuss the principal components of Microsystem. K2
4 Explain the various actuation mechanisms employed in MEMS devices K2
5 Write a brief note on positive and negative photoresists K2
6 Compare Low Pressure CVD and Plasma Enhanced CVD K2
7 Discuss the principle of LIGA process of fabricating MEMS devices K2
8 Explain the MEMS packaging techniques surface bonding and wire K2
bonding.
9 Explain the principle of RF MEMS switches. K2
10 Distinguish between Bio-MEMS and MOEMS. K2

PART – B
Answer one question from each module; each question carries 14 marks.
Module – I

11. a) Describe the quasi-fundamental scaling laws that applies to MEMS 7 CO1 K3
11. b) Perform a comparative study of microelectronics and microsystem 7 CO1 K2
OR
12.a) Comment on the material properties central to microengineering 7 CO1 K3
12.b) Explain the features of MEMS and list the critical factors that affect 7 CO1 K3
commercialization of MEMS devices

Module – II

13. a) Discuss the principle of parallel-plate electrostatic microsensors. Draw a 8 CO2 K3

coupled electro – mechanical model and derive an expression for the
electrostatic force at equilibrium
13. b) With sketches, explain the geometry and principle of micro grippers and 6 CO2 K2
micro valves
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

OR
14.a) Explain the sensing principle of longitudinal and transverse comb drive 8 CO2 K3
sensing. Derive an expression for the magnitude of force in transverse
comb drive
14.b) With appropriate diagrams, explain the principle of micromotors and 6 CO2 K2
micropumps

Module – III

15. a) Describe the Czochralski growth process of obtaining single crystal 7 CO3 K2
silicon
15. b) Explain the process of wet chemical etching. Draw the etching profiles of 7 CO3 K2
isotropic and anisotropic etching
OR
16.a) With appropriate figures, explain the steps of photolithography 8 CO3 K2
16.b) Describe the sputtering process of deposition employed in 6 CO3 K2
microfabrication

Module – IV

17. a) Compare bulk and surface micromachining process of fabricating MEMS 6 CO4 K2
devices
17. b) With figures, list the various stages of micromachining a MEMS 8 CO4 K3
cantilever. Discuss the sacrificial etching process
OR
18.a) With an example, describe the LIGA process of MEMS manufacturing 8 CO4 K3
18.b) Explain four important functions of microsystem package. 6 CO4 K2

Module – V

19. a) Discuss Bio-MEMS. Explain the principle of MEMS medical pressure 8 CO5 K2
sensor
19. b) Describe the geometry and operation of MEMS microphone 6 CO5 K2
OR
20. a) Comment on Optical MEMS. Explain the principle of Digital Mirror 7 CO1 K2
Devices (DMDs)
20. b) Discuss the geometry and principle of MEMS gyroscopes. 7 CO1 K2
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

ROBOTICS AND INDUSTRIAL CATEGORY L T P CREDITS

AET445
AUTOMATION OEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: The purpose of this course is providing the knowledge of automation components, tools,
systems and to give an overview on the classification and components of industrial robots.

Prerequisite: NIL

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Design and implement automated systems using pneumatics.

CO 2 Provide hydraulic solutions for designing automated systems.
CO 3 Devise Assembly automated systems using feeders, orienteers and escapement devices
CO 4 Perform selection of gripping mechanism for robotic application.
CO 5 Perform kinematic and dynamic analyses with simulation.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 1 3 2 3
CO 2 3 2 3
CO 3 3 3
CO 4 3 2 3
CO 5 3 2 3

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester Examination

1 2
Remember K1 10 10 10
Understand K2 30 30 80
Apply K3 10 10 10
Analyze K4
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14
marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Design and implement automated systems using pneumatics.

1. Mention the applications of hydraulic in engineering field.

2. Sketch and explain the basic hydraulic system.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Provide hydraulic solutions for designing automated systems.

1. What are the factors that influence the power input to the compressor?

Course Outcome 3 (CO3): Devise Assembly automated systems using feeders, orienteers and
escapement devices.

1. Discuss about the need for robots

2. Explain about major parts of a robot with their functions.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Perform selection of gripping mechanism for robotic

application.

1. What is repeatability of industrial robot?

2. Classify sensors for robot applications.
3. Discuss in detail about functions & need of industrial robots.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Perform kinematic and dynamic analyses with simulation.

1. What is g-factor? How grippers are classified based on g factor.

2. Give two applications where vacuum grippers are widely used in robots.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

SYLLABUS

Module 1:
Hydraulic System Elements: Pumps, types, working, characteristics, applications: Types of conductors, and
connectors, their selection: Seals and packing, types, materials, applications.
Hydraulic Actuators: Linear and Rotary, types, working, cushioning effect, mounting,
Control Elements: Pressure control Valves, direct acting type, pilot operated, sequence, counterbalancing,
unloading, pressure reducing, construction and working: Direction control valves, types, construction and
working.
Module 2:
Pneumatics: Air compressors, types, working, selection criteria; FRL unit, construction and working;
Pneumatic cylinders and air motors, construction and working, Comparison of air, hydraulic and electric
motor.
Pneumatic System Control Elements: Flow control valves, working of variable flow control, quick exhaust,
time delay and shuttle valve
Module 3:
Robotics-Introduction-Types of robots, Overview of robot subsystems, resolution, repeatability and accuracy,
Degrees of freedom of robot’s classification with respect to geometrical configuration (Anatomy), Controlled
system & chain type: Serial manipulator & Parallel Manipulator.
Module 4:
Components of Industrial robotics-precession of movement resolution, accuracy & repeatability-Dynamic
characteristics- speed of motion, load carrying capacity & speed of response-Sensors-Internal sensors:
Position sensors, & Velocity sensors, External sensors: Proximity sensors, Tactile Sensors, & Force or Torque
sensors.
Module 5:
Grippers - Mechanical Gripper-Grasping force-Engel Berger-g-factors-mechanisms for actuation, Magnetic
gripper, vacuum cup gripper-considerations in gripper selection & design, Industrial robots’ specifications.
Selection based on the Application

Text Books
1. Espositio A., "Fluid Power with Applications", Pearson, 2002.
2. Majumdar S. R., "Oil Hydraulic Systems", Tata McGraw Hill 2000
Reference Books
1. Majumdar S. R., "Pneumatic systems-principles and Maintenance", Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2000.
2. Janaki Raman P.A., "Robotics and image processing", Tata McGraw Hill, 1995.
3. Yoram Koren, "Robotics", McGraw Hill, 1992.
4. Groover M. P., “Industrial Robotics”, Mc Graw Hill
5. John J. Craig, “Introduction to Robotics”, Pearson
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No. of
Sl. No Topic
Lectures
1 Hydraulic System Elements
1.1 Pumps, types, working, characteristics, applications 1
1.2 Types of conductors, and connectors, their selection 1
1.3 Seals and packing, types, materials, applications 1
Hydraulic Actuators
1.4 Linear and Rotary - types and working 1
1.5 Cushioning effect, mounting 1
Control Elements
Pressure control Valves, direct acting type, pilot operated, sequence,
1.6 1
construction and working.
1.7 Counterbalancing, unloading, pressure reducing, construction and working. 1
1.8 Direction control valves, types, construction and working. 1
2 Pneumatics
2.1 Air compressors, types, working, selection criteria 1
2.2 FRL unit, construction and working 1
2.3 Pneumatic cylinders and air motors, construction and working 1
2.4 Comparison of air, hydraulic and electric motor. 1
Pneumatic System Control Elements
2.5 Flow control valves, working of variable flow control 1
2.6 Quick exhaust, time delay and shuttle valve 2
3 Robotics
3.1 Robotics-Introduction-Types of robots 1
3.2 Overview of robot subsystems, resolution, repeatability and accuracy 2
Degrees of freedom of robot’s classification with respect to geometrical
2
configuration (Anatomy)
3.3 Controlled system & chain type 1
3.4 Serial manipulator & Parallel Manipulator. 1
4
Components of Industrial robotics-precession of movement resolution,
4.1 2
accuracy & repeatability
4.2 Dynamic characteristics- speed of motion, load carrying capacity & speed of 2
response
4.3 Sensors-Internal sensors: Position sensors, & Velocity sensors 2
External sensors: Proximity sensors, Tactile Sensors, & Force or Torque 2
4.4
sensors.
5 Grippers
5.1 Mechanical Gripper-Grasping force-Engel Berger 1
5.2 G-factors-mechanisms for actuation 1
5.3 Magnetic gripper, vacuum cup gripper 1
5.4 Considerations in gripper selection & design 1
5.5 Industrial robots’ specifications 1
5.6 Selection based on the Application 1
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Model Question paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

SEVENTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, (Model Question Paper)
Course Code: AET445
Course Name: Robotics & Industrial Automation
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours
PART A

Answer All Questions. Each Carries 3 mark.

1. What are the types of hydraulic actuators? CO1 K2

K2
2 Compare hydraulic and pneumatic systems CO1
K2
3 What is compression ratio? CO2
K2
4 What are the different types of air compressor? CO2
K2
5 What are the components of a robot? CO3
K2
6 What are the laws of robotics? CO3
K2
7 What do you mean by torque sensor? CO4
K2
8 What is meant by accuracy of industrial robot? CO4
K2
9 What is the principle of vacuum cup grippers? CO5
K2
10 What is meant by grippers? What are the types of grippers CO5

PART – B
Answer one question from each module; each question carries 14 marks.

Module – I

11. a) Describe the elements of hydraulic actuation system components in detail 9 CO1 K2
11. b) explain external gear pump with neat sketch 5 CO1 K2
OR
12.a) How are the control valve classified? Write the classification of the
8 CO1 K2
pressure control valve.
12.b) Define pump and state the purpose of the pump in hydraulic system and
6 CO1 K2
classify pumps
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Module – II

13 a) What is the difference between rotary air compressor and reciprocating

9 CO2 K2
air compressor?
13 b) What are shuttle valve? 5 CO2 K2
OR
14 a) What are the components of pneumatic system? 8 CO2 K2

14 b) What is a quick exhaust valve? Mention it's application. 6 CO2 K2

Module – III

15 a) Describe the classification of robots by control system. 9 CO3 K2

15 b) What is the degree of freedom in the robotics? How can it be determined? 5 CO3 K2
OR
16 a) Define a manipulator& also compare serial and parallel manipulator. 8 CO3 K2
16 b) How to calculate the degree of freedom in serial manipulator. 6 CO3 K2

Module – IV

17 a) Briefly explain the working principle of any two types of position sensors
8 CO4 K2
with neat sketch.
17 b) Write short notes on the following
i). accuracy
6 CO4 K2
ii). precision
iii). repeatability
OR
18 a) Describe the working principle of proximity sensor with neat sketch. 8 CO4 K2
18 b) Briefly explain the dynamic characteristics of robot. 6 CO4 K2

Module – V

19 a) Explain mechanical grippers & their linkage mechanism with neat

9 CO5 K2
sketches.
19 b) List out the important factors to be considered in the selection & design
5 CO5 K2
of grippers.
OR
20 a) Discuss about vacuum cup grippers along with their advantages &
9 CO5 K2
disadvantages.
20 b) Give the specification of industrial robot 5 CO5 K2
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
AEL411 PROCESS CONTROL LAB PCC 0 0 3 2

Preamble
This course aims students to achieve the following skills
 Ability to control basic physical processes using both simple and complex control schemes
 Experimentally verify a variety of process controls using computerized control
 Realization of process control schemes using various simulation software

Prerequisite

AET304 PROCESS DYNAMICS & CONTROL

Course Outcomes After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Analyze and study the responses of various combinations of P, I, D controls for

controlling basic processes like level, temperature, etc.
CO 2 Tune controllers for processes using different methods

CO 3 Analyze the performance of complex controls- cascade, feed forward and ratio

CO4 Implement process controls using computerized control

CO5 Acquire familiarity with usage of simulation tools for mathematical computation,
processing and virtual instrumentation for process control applications

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12

CO 1 3 3 2 2 3 2 3 2 3
CO 2 3 3 2 2 3 2 3 2 3
CO 3 3 3 2 2 3 2 3 2 3
CO 4 3 3 2 2 3 2 3 2 3
CO 5 3 3 2 2 3 2 3 2 3

Assessment

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE Duration

Mark
s
150 75 75 2.5 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 15 marks
Continuous Assessment : 30 marks
Internal Test (Immediately before the second series test) : 30 marks
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

End Semester Examination Pattern: The following guidelines should be followed regarding award of
marks
(a) Preliminary work : 15 Marks
(b) Implementing the work/ Conducting the experiment : 10 Marks
(c) Performance, result and inference (usage of equipment and troubleshooting) : 25 Marks
(d) Viva voce : 20 marks
(e) Record : 5 Marks

General instructions: End-semester practical examination is to be conducted immediately after the

second series test covering entire syllabus given below. Evaluation is to be conducted under the equal
responsibility of both the internal and external examiners. The number of candidates evaluated per day
should not exceed 20. Students shall be allowed for the examination only on submitting the duly certified
record. The external examiner shall endorse the record.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: (Minimum 10 experiments are to be done)

1. Design of ON- OFF controller with and without neutral zone- flow control, level control
2. Study of output response of P, PI, PD and PID controllers for flow control
3. Study of output response of P, PI, PD and PID controllers for level control
4. Study of output response of P, PI, PD and PID controllers for pressure control
5. Study of output response of P, PI, PD and PID controllers for temperature control
6. Study of characteristics of control valves
7. Controller tuning using Ziegler- Nichols method for various processes
8. Controller tuning using Cohen- Coon method for various processes
9. Simulation of controller tuning
10. Study of cascade, feed forward and ratio controls
11. Study of PLCs- Implementation of simple logic functions using ladder logic program
12. Control of processes like water level control & bottle filling system using PLC
13. PC based control of robotic actions
14. Study of virtual instrumentation and data logging
15. Interface of DCS with PLC/ SCADA using protocol/ fieldbus
16. Simulation of control schemes using Artificial Neural Networks & Fuzzy Logic
17. Simulation of heat exchanger temperature control
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
AEQ413 SEMINAR
PWS 0 0 3 2

Preamble: The course ‘Seminar’ is intended to enable a BTech graduate to read, understand,
present and prepare report about an academic document. The learner shall search in the
literature including peer reviewed journals, conference, books, project reports etc., and identify
an appropriate paper/thesis/report in her/his area of interest, in consultation with her/his
seminar guide. This course can help the learner to experience how a presentation can be made
about a selected academic document and also empower her/him to prepare a technical report.

Course Objectives:

 To do literature survey in a selected area of study.

 To understand an academic document from the literate and to give a presentation about it.
 To prepare a technical report.

Course Outcomes [COs]: After successful completion of the course, the students will be able
to:

Identify academic documents from the literature which are related to her/his areas of
CO1
interest (Cognitive knowledge level: Apply).
Read and apprehend an academic document from the literature which is related to
CO2
her/ his areas of interest (Cognitive knowledge level: Analyze).

Prepare a presentation about an academic document (Cognitive knowledge

CO3
level: Create).

Give a presentation about an academic document (Cognitive knowledge level:

CO4
Apply).

CO5 Prepare a technical report (Cognitive knowledge level: Create).

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 2 2 1 1 2 1 3

CO2 3 3 2 3 2 1 3

CO3 3 2 3 1 2 3

CO4 3 2 1 3 3

CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 3
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Abstract POs defined by National Board of Accreditation

PO# Broad PO PO# Broad PO

PO1 Engineering Knowledge PO7 Environment and Sustainability

PO2 Problem Analysis PO8 Ethics

Design/Development of
PO3 PO9 Individual and team work
solutions
Conduct investigations of complex PO10 Communication
PO4 problems

PO5 Modern tool usage PO11 Project Management and Finance

PO6 The Engineer and Society PO12 Lifelong learning

General Guidelines

 The Department shall form an Internal Evaluation Committee (IEC) for the seminar with
academic coordinator for that program as the Chairperson/Chairman and seminar coordinator &
seminar guide as members. During the seminar presentation of a student, all members of IEC
shall be present.

 Formation of IEC and guide allotment shall be completed within a week after the University
examination (or last working day) of the previous semester.

 Guide shall provide required input to their students regarding the selection of topic/ paper.

 Choosing a seminar topic: The topic for a UG seminar should be current and broad based rather
than a very specific research work. It's advisable to choose a topic for the Seminar to be closely
linked to the final year project area. Every member of the project team could choose or be
assigned Seminar topics that covers various aspects linked to the Project area.

 A topic/paper relevant to the discipline shall be selected by the student during the semester break.

 Topic/Paper shall be finalized in the first week of the semester and shall be submitted to the IEC.

 The IEC shall approve the selected topic/paper by the second week of the semester.

 Accurate references from genuine peer reviewed published material to be given in the report and
to be verified.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Evaluation pattern

Total marks: 100, only CIE, minimum required to pass 50

Seminar Guide: 20 marks (Background Knowledge – 10 (The guide shall give deserving marks for
a candidate based on the candidate's background knowledge about the topic selected), Relevance of
the paper/topic selected – 10).

Seminar Coordinator: 20 marks (Seminar Diary – 10 (Each student shall maintain a seminar diary
and the guide shall monitor the progress of the seminar work on a weekly basis and shall approve the
entries in the seminar diary during the weekly meeting with the student), Attendance – 10).

Presentation: 40 marks to be awarded by the IEC (Clarity of presentation – 10, Interactions – 10 (to
be based on the candidate's ability to answer questions during the interactive session of her/his
presentation), Overall participation – 10 (to be given based on her/his involvement during interactive
sessions of presentations by other students), Quality of the slides – 10).

Report: 20 marks to be awarded by the IEC (check for technical content, overall quality, templates
followed, adequacy of references etc.).
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
AED415 PROJECT PHASE I
PWS 0 0 6 2

Preamble: The course ‘Project Work’ is mainly intended to evoke the innovation and invention
skills in a student. The course will provide an opportunity to synthesize and apply the knowledge
and analytical skills learned, to be developed as a prototype or simulation. The project extends to 2
semesters and will be evaluated in the 7th and 8th semester separately, based on the achieved
objectives. One third of the project credits shall be completed in 7th semester and two third in 8th
semester. It is recommended that the projects may be finalized in the thrust areas of the respective
engineering stream or as interdisciplinary projects. Importance should be given to address societal
problems and developing indigenous technologies.

Course Objectives
 To apply engineering knowledge in practical problem solving.
 To foster innovation in design of products, processes or systems.
 To develop creative thinking in finding viable solutions to engineering problems.

Course Outcomes [COs]: After successful completion of the course, the students will be able to:
Model and solve real world problems by applying knowledge across domains
CO1
(Cognitive knowledge level: Apply).
Develop products, processes or technologies for sustainable and socially relevant
CO2
applications (Cognitive knowledge level: Apply).
Function effectively as an individual and as a leader in diverse teams and to
CO3
comprehend and execute designated tasks (Cognitive knowledge level: Apply).
Plan and execute tasks utilizing available resources within timelines, following
CO4
ethical and professional norms (Cognitive knowledge level: Apply).
Identify technology/research gaps and propose innovative/creative solutions
CO5
(Cognitive knowledge level: Analyze).
Organize and communicate technical and scientific findings effectively in written
CO6
and oral forms (Cognitive knowledge level: Apply).

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
1
2 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2
CO1

CO2 2 2 2 1 3 3 1 1 1 1

CO3 3 2 2 1

CO4 2 3 2 2 3 2

CO5 2 3 3 1 2 1

CO6 2 2 2 3 1 1
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Abstract POs defined by National Board of Accreditation

PO# Broad PO PO# Broad PO

PO1 Engineering Knowledge PO7 Environment and Sustainability

PO2 Problem Analysis PO8 Ethics

PO3 Design/Development of solutions PO9 Individual and team work

Conduct investigations of PO10 Communication

PO4
complex problems

PO5 Modern tool usage PO11 Project Management and Finance

PO6 The Engineer and Society PO12 Lifelong learning

PROJECT PHASE I
Phase 1 Target

 Literature study/survey of published literature on the assigned topic

 Formulation of objectives
 Formulation of hypothesis/ design/ methodology
 Formulation of work plan and task allocation.
 Block level design documentation
 Seeking project funds from various agencies
 Preliminary Analysis/Modeling/Simulation/Experiment/Design/Feasibility study
 Preparation of Phase 1 report

Evaluation Guidelines & Rubrics

Total: 100 marks (Minimum required to pass: 50 marks).

 Project progress evaluation by guide: 30 Marks.

 Interim evaluation by the Evaluation Committee: 20 Marks.
 Final Evaluation by the Evaluation Committee: 30 Marks.
 Project Phase - I Report (By Evaluation Committee): 20 Marks.

(The evaluation committee comprises HoD or a senior faculty member, Project coordinator
and project supervisor).
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Evaluation by the Guide

The guide/supervisor shall monitor the progress being carried out by the project groups on a regular
basis. In case it is found that progress is unsatisfactory it shall be reported to the Department
Evaluation Committee for necessary action. The presence of each student in the group and their
involvement in all stages of execution of the project shall be ensured by the guide. Project evaluation
by the guide: 30 Marks. This mark shall be awarded to the students in his/her group by considering
the following aspects:
Topic Selection: innovativeness, social relevance etc. (2)
Problem definition: Identification of the social, environmental and ethical issues of the project
problem. (2)
Purpose and need of the project: Detailed and extensive explanation of the purpose and need of
the project. (3)
Project Objectives: All objectives of the proposed work are well defined; Steps to be followed to
solve the defined problem are clearly specified. (2)
Project Scheduling & Distribution of Work among Team members: Detailed and extensive
Scheduling with timelines provided for each phase of project. Work breakdown structure well
defined. (3)
Literature survey: Outstanding investigation in all aspects. (4)
Student’s Diary/ Daily Log: The main purpose of writing daily diary is to cultivate the habit of
documenting and to encourage the students to search for details. It develops the students’ thought
process and reasoning abilities. The students should record in the daily/weekly activity diary the
day-to-day account of the observations, impressions, information gathered and suggestions given,
if any. It should contain the sketches & drawings related to the observations made by the students.
The daily/weekly activity diary shall be signed after every day/week by the guide. (7)
Individual Contribution: The contribution of each student at various stages. (7)
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

EVALUATION RUBRICS for PROJECT Phase I: Interim Evaluation

No. Parameters Marks Poor Fair Very Good Outstanding

The team has identified a topic. The
Topic The team has failed to come with a Good evidence of the group thinking The group has brainstormed in an excellent
originally selected topic lacks
identification, relevant topic in time. Needed full and brainstorming on what they are manner on what they were going to build.
substance and needs to be revised.
selection, assistance to find a topic from the going to build. The results of the The topic selected is highly relevant, real
There were suggestions given to
formulation of guide. They do not respond to brainstorming are documented and the world problem and is potentially innovative.
improve the relevance and quality of
objectives and/or suggestions from the evaluation selection of topic is relevant. The The group shows extreme interest in the
the project topic. Only a few relevant
1-a literature survey. 10 committee and/or the guide. No review of related references was good, topic and has conducted extensive literature
references were consulted/ studied and
(Group literature review was conducted. but there is scope of improvement. survey in connection with the topic. The
there is no clear evidence to show the
assessment) The team tried to gather easy Objectives formed with good clarity, team has come up with clear objectives
team's understanding on the same.
information without verifying the however some objectives are not which are feasible.
Some objectives identified, but not
[CO1] authenticity. No objectives formed realistic enough.
clear enough.
yet.

(0 – 3 Marks) (4 – 6 Marks) (7 - 9 Marks) (10 Marks)

Excellent evidence of enterprising and
extensive project planning. Gantt charts
were used to depict detailed project
Project scheduling. A project management/version
Some evidence of a primary plan. Good evidence of planning done. control tool is used to track the project,
Planning, No evidence of planning or
There were some ideas on the Materials were listed and thought out, which shows familiarity with modern tools.
Scheduling and scheduling of the project. The
materials /resources required, but not but the plan wasn't quite complete. All materials / resources were identified and
Resource/ Tasks students did not plan what they
really thought out. The students have Schedules were prepared, but not listed and anticipation of procuring time is
Identification and were going to build or plan on what
some idea on the finances required, detailed, and needs improvement. done. Detailed budgeting is done. All tasks
allocation. materials / resources to use in the
but they have not formalized a budget Project journal is presented but it is not were identified and incorporated in the
(Group project. The students do not have
1-b 10 plan. Schedules were not prepared. complete in all respect / detailed. schedule. A well-kept project journal shows
assessment) any idea on the budget required.
The project journal has no details. There is better task allocation and evidence for all the above, in addition to the
The team has not yet decided on
[CO4] Some evidence on task allocation individual members understand about interaction with the project guide. Each
who does what. No project journal
among the team members. their tasks. There is room for member knows well about their individual
kept.
improvement. tasks.

(0 – 3 Marks) (4 – 6 Marks) (7 - 9 Marks) (10 Marks)

Phase 1 Interim Evaluation Total Marks: 20
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

EVALUATION RUBRICS for PROJECT Phase I: Final Evaluation

Sl.
No. Parameters Marks Poor Fair Very Good Outstanding

Formulation of
None of the team members show The students have some knowledge on The students are comfortable with Shows clear evidence of having a well-
Design and/or
any evidence of knowledge about the design procedure to be adopted, and design methods adopted, and they have defined design methodology and adherence to
Methodology
and Progress. the design and the methodology the methodologies. However, the team made some progress as per the plan. it. Excellent knowledge in design procedure
(Group adopted till now/ to be adopted in has not made much progress in the The methodologies are understood to a and its adaptation. Adherence to project plan
1-c assessment) [CO1] 5 the later stages. The team has not design, and yet to catch up with the large extent. is commendable.
progressed from the previous stage project plan.
of evaluation.

(0 – 1 Marks) (2 – 3 Marks) (4 Marks) (5 Marks)

The student show some interest and The student shows very good interest in
Individual and The student does not show any project, and takes up tasks and attempts The student takes a leadership position and
participates in some of the activities.
interest in the project activities, and to complete them. Shows excellent supports the other team members and leads
Teamwork However, the activities are mostly easy
1-d is a passive member. responsibility and team skills. the project. Shows clear evidence of
Leadership and superficial in nature.
10 Supports the other members well. leadership.
(Individual
assessment)
[CO3]

(0 – 3 Marks) (4 – 6 Marks) (7 - 9 Marks) (10 Marks)

Preliminary The team has not done any The team has started doing some There is some evidence to show that the Strong evidence for excellent progress in the
Analysis/ preliminary work with respect to preliminary work with respect to the team has done good amount of project. The team has completed the
Modeling / the analysis/modeling/ project. The students however are not preliminary investigation and design/ required preliminary work already and are
1-e
Simulation/ simulation/experiment/desig prepared enough for the work and they analysis/ modeling etc. poised to finish the phase I in an excellent
10
Experiment / n/feasibility study/ algorithm need to improve a lot. They can improve further. manner. They have shown results to prove
Design/ development. their progress.
Feasibility
study
[CO1] (0 – 3 Marks) (4 – 6 Marks) (7 - 9 Marks) (10 Marks)
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

The project stages are extensively

documented in the report. Professional
documentation tools like LaTeX were used
The team did not document the
Some documentation is done, but not to document the progress of the project along
Documentation work at all. The project
extensive. Interaction with the guide is Most of the project details were with the project journal. The documentation
and journal/diary is not presented. The
1-f minimal. documented well enough. There is structureis well- planned and can easily grow
presentation. 5 presentation was shallow in content
Presentation includes some points of scope for improvement. The into the project report.
(Individual & and dull in appearance.
interest, but overall quality needs to be presentation is satisfactory. Individual
group The individual student has no idea
improved. Individual performance to be performance is good. The presentation is done professionally and
assessment). on the presentation of his/her part.
improved. with great clarity. The individual’s
performance is
[CO6]
excellent.

(0 – 1 Marks) (2 – 3 Marks) (4 Marks) (5 Marks)

Total 30 Phase - I Final Evaluation Marks: 30

 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

EVALUATION RUBRICS for PROJECT Phase I: Report Evaluation

Sl.
No. Parameters Marks Poor Fair Very Good Outstanding

Project report shows evidence of

The prepared report is shallow and Project report follows the standard
systematic documentation. Report
not as per standard format. It does format to some extent. However, its The report is exceptionally good. Neatly organized.
is following the standard format
not follow proper organization. organization is not very good. All references cited properly. Diagrams/Figures,
1-g and there are only a few issues.
Report [CO6] 20 Contains mostly Unacknowledged Language needs to be improved. All Tables and equations are properly numbered, and
Organization of the report is
content. Lack of effort in references are not cited properly in the listed and clearly shown. Language is excellent and
good. Most of references are
preparation is evident. report. follows standard styles.
cited properly.

(0 - 7 Marks) (8 - 12 Marks) (13 - 19 Marks) (20 Marks)

Phase - I Project Report Marks: 20
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

S7 MINOR
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
AED481 MINI PROJECT
PWS 0 0 3 4

Preamble: Mini Project Phase I: A Project topic must be selected either from research literature
or the students themselves may propose suitable topics in consultation with their guides. The
object of Project Work I is to enable the student to take up investigative study in the broad field
of Applied Electronics and Instrumentation, either fully theoretical/practical or involving both
theoretical and practical work to be assigned by the Department on a group of three/four students,
under the guidance of a supervisor. This is expected to provide a good initiation for the student(s)
in R&D work. The assignment to normally include:
 Survey and study of published literature on the assigned topic;
 Preparing an Action Plan for conducting the investigation, including team work;
 Working out a preliminary Approach to the Problem relating to the assigned topic;
 Block level design documentation
 Conducting preliminary Analysis/ Modelling/ Simulation/ Experiment/ Design/
Feasibility;
 Preparing a Written Report on the Study conducted for presentation to the Department;
CO1 Identify and synthesize problems and propose solutions to them.

CO2 Prepare work plan and liaison with the team in completing as per schedule.

Validate the above solutions by theoretical calculations and through

CO3
experimental

CO4 Write technical reports and develop proper communication skills.

CO5 Present the data and defend ideas.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 3 3 3 3 2
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1
*1-slight/low mapping, 2- moderate/medium mapping, 3-substantial/high mapping
Assessment Pattern
The End Semester Evaluation (ESE) will be conducted as an internal evaluation based on the
product, the report and a viva- voce examination, conducted by a 3-member committee
appointed by Head of the Department comprising HoD or a senior faculty member, academic
coordinator for that program and project guide/coordinator. The Committee will be
evaluating the level of completion and demonstration of functionality/specifications,
presentation, oral examination, working knowledge and involvement.

The Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) is conducted by evaluating the progress of the
mini project through minimum of TWO reviews. At the time of the 1st review, students are
supposed to propose a new system/design/idea, after completing a thorough literature study
of the existing systms under their chosen area. In the 2nd review students are expected to
highlight the implementation details of the proposed solution. The review committee should
assess the extent to which the implementation reflects the proposed design. A well coded,
assembled and completely functional product is the expected output at this stage. The final
CIE mark is the average of 1st and 2nd review marks.
A zeroth review may be conducted before the beginning of the project to give a chance for
the students to present their area of interest or problem domain or conduct open brain
storming sessions for innovative ideas. Zeroth review will not be a part of the CIE evaluation
process.

Marks Distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE

150 75 75

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Marks awarded by Guide : 15 marks
Project Report : 10 marks
Evaluation by the Committee : 40 Marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: The following guidelines should be followed

regarding award of marks.
(a) Demonstration : 50 Marks
(b) Project report : 10 Marks
(d) Viva voce : 15marks

Course Plan
In this course, each group consisting of three/four members is expected to design and develop
a moderately complex software/hardware system with practical applications. This should be a
working model. The basic concept of product design may be taken into consideration.
Students should identify a topic of interest in consultation with Faculty-in-charge of
miniproject/Advisor. Review the literature and gather information pertaining to the chosen
topic. State the objectives and develop a methodology to achieve the objectives. Carryout the
design/fabrication or develop codes/programs to achieve the objectives. Demonstrate the
novelty of the project through the results and outputs. The progress of the mini project is
evaluated based on a minimum of two reviews.

The review committee may be constituted by the Head of the Department. A project report is
required at the end of the semester. The product has to be demonstrated for its full design
specifications. Innovative design concepts, reliability considerations, aesthetics/ergonomic
aspects taken care of in the project shall be given due weight.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

S7 HONOURS
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

AET495 ADVANCED CONTROL THEORY CATEGORY L T P CREDITS

VAC 4 0 0 4

Preamble: This course aims to study the basic concepts required for solving complex control
problems

Prerequisite: AET 301 Control Systems.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Apply different state space representation methods for solving complex control
problems.
CO 2 Analyze the stability of nonlinear systems.
CO 3 Analyse the describing functions of various nonlinear systems.

CO 4 Design different systems and analyse its stability using Lyapunov stability analysis.

CO 5 Analyse the controllability and observability of different systems.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 3
CO 2 3 3
CO 3 3 3 3 2
CO 4 3 3 3 2
CO 5 3 3 3 2

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember K1 10 10 10
Understand K2 15 15 30
Apply K3 25 25 60
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part
A contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each
question. Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each
module of which student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2
sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Apply different state space representation methods for
solving complex control problems.

1. Define state, state variable, state space, state vector.

2. Formulate state equation from mathematical model.

3. Find the solution of state equations.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Analyze the stability of nonlinear systems.

1. Analysis of nonlinear system for finding solution to complex control systems.

2. Analyze the different responses in nonlinear control systems.

Course Outcome 3 (CO3): Analyze describing functions of various nonlinear

systems.
1. Derive the describing functions of various systems.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Design different systems and analyse its stability
using Lyapunov stability analysis.

1. Define Lyapunov stability theorems.

2. Study the stability of the systems using first and second method of Lyapunov.

3. Study the Lyapunov stability analysis for Linear Continuous time systems.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Analyse the controllability and observability of

different systems.

1. Define controllability and observability.

2. Check whether the system is controllable or observable
3. Design optimal control systems.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

SYLLABUS
Module 1:
State space representation of system: Concept, Solution of time invariant state equation- state
transition matrix. Linear time varying system. Discrete system state space representation and
solution.
Module 2:
Non-linear systems: Types of non-linearity, singular point, non-linear system stability analysis-
phase plane technique, construction of phase trajectories, isocline method
Module 3:
Describing function analysis: Basic concepts, derivation of describing functions for common non-
linearities Describing function analysis of non-linear systems – Conditions for stability – Stability of
oscillations.
Module 4:
Lyapunov stability analysis: definition of stability, instability and asymptotic stability. Lyapunov
stability theorems. Stability analysis of simple linear systems.
Module 5:

MIMO systems- Controllability- Observability: Definition- Effect of pole-zero cancellation,

Practical examples-controllable and uncontrollable systems-observable and unobservable systems.
Optimal control system-definition-design using state variable feedback and error squared
performance indices.

Text Books/ Reference Book

1. C. D. Johnson, Process Control Instrumentation Technology, 7th ed., Prentice Hall of
India, New Delhi, 2003.
2. K. Ogata “Discrete Time Control Systems”, 1996, PHI.
3. K. Ogata “Modern Control Engineering”, 1996, PHI.
4. R. C. Dorf and R. H. Bishop, Modern Control Systems, 8th ed., Pearson Education,
Delhi, 2004.
5. M. Gopal, “Modern Control System Theory”, New Age International Publishers, 2nd
edition,1996.
6. K.R.Varmah, “Modern Control Theory”, CBS Publishers & Distributors Pvt. Ltd, Ist
edition, 2017.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of
Lectures
1 State space representation of system:
1.1 Concept of state space-state space representation of system 2
1.2 solution of time invariant state equation 2
1.3 state transition matrix. 2
1.4 Linear time varying system 1
1.5 Discrete system state space representation and solution 2

2 Non-linear systems
2.1 Non-linear systems 1
2.2 types of non-linearity 1
2.3 singular point 1
2.4 non-linear system stability analysis 1
2.5 phase plane technique 2
2.6 construction of phase trajectories, isocline method 3

3 Describing function analysis

3.1 Describing function analysis: Basic concepts 2
3.2 derivation of describing functions for common non-linearities 4
3.3 Describing function analysis of non-linear systems 1
3.4 Conditions for stability 1
3.5 Stability of oscillations 1

4 Lyapunov stability analysis

4.1 definition of stability, instability and asymptotic stability. 3
4.2 Lyapunov stability theorems. 3
4.3 Stability analysis of simple linear systems. 3

5 MIMO systems- Controllability- Observability

5.1 MIMO systems- Controllability- Observability-Definition 1
5.2 Effect of pole-zero cancellation, 1
5.3 Practical examples-controllable and uncontrollable systems 2
5.4 Practical examples- observable and unobservable systems 2
5.5 Optimal control system-definition 1
5.6 design using state variable feedback and error squared performance indices. 2

Assignment:
At least two assignments should be given.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Model Question paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

SEVENTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE (HONOURS) EXAMINATION (Model Question
Paper)
Course Code: AET495
Program: Applied Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering/ Electronics &
Instrumentation
Course Name: ADVANCED CONTROL THEORY
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours
PART A

Answer ALL Questions. Each Carries 3 marks.

1. Explain the terms state space, state, state variable and state vector K2
2 List out any three Limitations of Transfer function approach. K1
3 What is singular point? K2
4 Explain atleast three nonlinearities with necessary characteristics. K2
5 Explain the advantages and disadvantages of describing function K2
method.
6 Derive describing function of Ideal relay. K3
7 Explain Sign definiteness in the sense of Lyapunov. K2
8 Define Lyapunov stability theorem. K1
9 Define Controllability and Observability. K1
10 Define Optimal Control systems. K1

PART – B
Answer one question from each module. Each question carries 14 marks.

Module – I

11.a) Obtain the state model of the system whose transfer function is 6 CO1 K3
given as

11.b) Compute the state transition matrix for a system represented by 8 CO1 K3
the state equation by Laplace transform method.

OR
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

12.a) Obtain the state representation of the system represented by the 6 CO1 K3
differential equation

12.b) Obtain the solution to non-homogeneous state equation using 8 CO1 K3

Laplace transform approach.

Module – II

13 Explain Singular Point, What is its significance. For the given 7 CO2 K3
a) system, determine the singular points.

13 Explain different types of non-linearity’s 7 CO2 K2

b)
OR
14 Explain different types of singularities in phase plane analysis. 7 CO2 K2
a)
14 A second order system is represented by the differential equation 7 CO2 K3
b) ë + 2ζωnė +ωn 2 e = 0 where ζ= 0.15, ωn= 1 rad/sec, Find out the
singularity associated with the system

Module – III

15 Derive the describing function of a saturation non-linearity. 14 CO3 K3

OR
16 For the system shown in figure, an ideal relay is connected with a 14 CO3 K3
plant having G(s)=1/s(s+1)(s+3). Determine whether the limit
cycles exists and if exists, determine the amplitude and frequency
of it.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Module – IV
17 Determine the stability of the system described by 𝑋̇=AX where 14 CO4 K3

by lyapunov theorem and determine a suitable lyapunov function

OR
18 Using V(x) =x1 2+x2 2 study the stability of the origin of the system 14 CO4 K3

Module – V

19) A linear system is represented by a state model 𝑋̇  AX  BU; y  14 CO5 K3

CX, where

Check whether the system is completely observable by Kaman’s

Test.
OR
20 a) Explain the effect of Pole zero cancellation on Controllability and 6 CO5 K3
Observability with an example.
20 b) Check whether the system represented by the following state 8 CO5 K3
equation is completely controllable.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

AET497 VLSI STRUCTURES FOR CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

SIGNAL PROCESSING VAC 3 1 0 4

Preamble:
This course aims to provide an insight to the realization of DSP architecture using different techniques
in VLSI.
Prerequisite: A knowledge in fundamentals of Digital Signal Processing

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO1
K3 Identify iteration bound of a data flow graph.

CO2 Explain pipelining and parallel processing in DSP systems to achieve high speed and low
K2 power.
CO3
Apply retiming principles to reduce clock period and number of registers.
K3
CO4
Apply unfolding techniques to obtain parallel processing architectures.
K3
CO5 Explain how folding techniques can be used to reduce the number of functional units in
K2 DSP architecture.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 1 3 3 3
CO 2 3 2 3
CO 3 3 3 3 3
CO 4 3 3 3 3
CO 5 3 2 3

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

/Tests
1 2
Remember K1 10 10 10
Understand K2 20 20 50
Apply K3 20 20 40
Analyze
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part
A contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each
question. Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each
module of which student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2
sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Identify iteration bound of a data flow graph. (K3)
1. Find loop bound and iteration bound of the DFG given below

2. Explain Minimum cycle mean algorithm for determination of iteration bound.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Explain pipelining and parallel processing in DSP systems to
achieve high speed and low power. (K2)
1. Obtain a parallel processing architecture for a 3 tap FIR filter with block size 3
2. What is fine grain pipelining?
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Course Outcome 3 (CO3): Apply retiming principles to reduce clock period and number of
registers. (K3)
1. Draw the structure of a 4 stage FIR lattice filter and obtain its 2-slow version.
2. Write down two properties of retiming.
Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Apply unfolding techniques to obtain parallel processing
architectures. (K3)

1. Write algorithm for unfolding.

2. Unfold the given structure by a factor of 3.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Explain how folding techniques can be used to reduce the number
of functional units in DSP architecture. (K2)

1. Explain folding of multirate systems.

2. Explain life time analysis for register minimization.

 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

SYLLABUS

Module 1:

Review of DSP algorithms, Iteration Bound, Loop Bound, Iteration Bound Algorithms, Iteration Bound
for multi rate data flow graphs

Module 2

Pipelining and Parallel Processing: Introduction, pipelining and parallel processing of FIR filters
pipelining and parallel processing for low power

Module 3

Retiming-introduction, properties, system inequalities, retiming techniques- cutset retiming and

pipelining, retiming for clock period minimization

Module 4

Unfolding: Introduction, unfolding algorithm, properties, critical path unfolding and retiming,
applications- sample period reduction, parallel processing- 3-unfold and 3-parallel examples

Module 5

Folding: Introduction, Transformation, register minimization techniques- life time analysis, data
allocation using forward-backward register allocation folding of multi rate systems

Text Book

1. Keshab K. Parhi, VLSI Digital signal processing Systems: Design and Implementation,
John Wiley & Sons, 1999.

Reference Books

1. Digital Signal Processing for Multimedia Systems, Keshab K. Parhi and Takao Nishitani, Marcel Dekker.
2. Pipelined Lattice and Wave Digital Recursive Filters, J. G. Chung and Keshab K. Parhi, Kluwer.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of
Lectures
1 Iteration Bound (9 hrs.)
1.1 Review of DSP algorithms 2
1.2 Representations of DSP algorithms 1
1.3 Loop Bound 1
1.4 Iteration Bound 2
1.5 Algorithms for computing Iteration Bound 2
1.6 Iteration Bound for multirate data flow graphs 1
2 Pipelining and Parallel Processing (9 hrs.)
2.1 Introduction 1

2.2 pipelining of FIR filters 2

2.3 parallel processing of FIR filters 2

2.4 combining pipelining and parallel processing 2

2.5 pipelining and parallel processing for low power 2

3 Retiming (9 hrs.)
3.1 introduction 1
3.2 properties 1
3.3 system inequalities 2
3.4 retiming techniques 2
3.5 cut set retiming and pipelining 2
3.6 retiming for clock period minimization 1
4 Unfolding (9 hrs.)
4.1 Introduction 1
4.2 unfolding algorithm 1
4.3 properties of unfolding 1
4.4 critical path, unfolding and retiming 2
4.5 application- sample period reduction 2
4.6 application-parallel processing- 3-unfold and 3-parallel examples 2

5 Folding (9 hrs.)
5.1 Folding Transformation 2
5.2 Register Minimization techniques – life time analysis 2
5.3 Data allocation using forward backward register allocation 2
5.4 Register minimization in folded architectures - examples 2
5.5 folding of multirate systems 1
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Model Question paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

SEVENTH SEMESTER B.T ECH (Honours) DEGREE EXAMINATION,
(Model Question Paper)
Program: Applied Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering/ Electronics &
Instrumentation Engineering

Course Code: AET497

Course Name: VLSI Structures for Signal Processing
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART A
Answer ALL Questions. Each Carries 3 mark.
Draw block diagram and data flow graph representations of a 3 tap FIR
1 K2
filter
2 Explain the terms loop bound and iteration bound. K2
Draw a pipelined implementation of a 3-tap FIR filter
3 K2
y(n) =a x(n) +b x(n-1)+ c x (n-2)
4 What is fine grain pipelining? K2
5 Write any two properties of retiming. K1
6 What are the applications of retiming? K1
7 Write unfolding algorithm. K1
Explain how critical path of original data flow graph (DFG) is related
8 K2
to J-unfolded DFG.
9 Explain the concept of folding. K2
10 Explain folding of multirate systems. K2

PART – B

Answer one question from each module; each question carries 14 marks.

Module – I
Find iteration bound of the DFG given below using Longest Path
Matrix Algorithm.

11 14 CO1 K3
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

OR
Calculate the computation time of the critical path for the signal
flow graph given below.

12 14 CO1 K3

Module – II
13 Design a parallel processing architecture for a 3 tap FIR filter with block size 3 14 CO2 K2
OR

14 With suitable expressions explain pipelining and parallel processing for low 14 CO2 K2
power
Module – III
Obtain the retimed DFG using cutest retiming for the DFG given
below.

15 14 CO3 K2

OR
16 With a suitable example show that pipelining is a special case of cutset retiming. 14 CO3 K2
Module – IV
17 Obtain 3 unfolded DFG for the DFG given below. 14 CO4 K3
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

OR
18 Show that sample period reduction can be achieved by using unfolding. 14 CO4 K3
Module – V
19 Explain life time analysis for register minimization. 14 CO5 K2
OR

20 Using IIR filter as an example, explain register minimization in folded 14 CO5 K2

architectures.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

AET499 Estimation and Detection CATEGORY L T P CREDITS

VAC 3 1 0 4

Preamble: This course introduces the concepts and trends of two major domains of
statistical signal processing, estimation and detection, in statistical signal processing
applications.

Prerequisites: MAT 101 Linear Algebra and Calculus

MAT 204 Probability, Random Process, and Numerical Methods
ECT 204 Signals and Systems

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Formulate and model various estimation and detection problems mathematically.

CO 2 Apply different types of signal detection techniques in statistical signal processing

applications.
CO 3 Choose and apply suitable parameter estimation technique for a practical estimation
problem.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO1 PO2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO10 PO 11 PO 12

CO 1 3 3 3 3
CO 2 3 3 3 3 3
CO 3 3 3 3 3 3

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember K1
Understand K2 20 20 40
Apply K3 30 30 60
Analyse K4
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part
A contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each
question. Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each
module of which student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2
sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Formulate and model various estimation and detection problems
mathematically.
1. Differentiate estimation and detection techniques.
2. Differentiate classical approach and bayesian approch in detection theory (or estimation).
3. Enumerate different applications which are using estimation and detection techniques.
4. Give the mathematical formulation of estimation and detection methods.
5. Draw receiver operating characteristics with all details
6. Give the significance of Bayes risk
7. How multiple hypothesis testing is done.
8. Give the significance of linear models in estimation and detection theory.
9. Significance of Cramer-Rao Lower Bound in estimation.
10. Differentiate MAP and ML methods in estimation (or detection).
Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Apply different types of signal detection techniques in statistical
signal processing applications.
1. Describe Neyman-Pearson theorem (or Bayes risk or minimization of probability of error)
and apply it to any binary hypothesis (eg. Signal in white Gaussian noise)
2. Derive/Obtain the matched filters for the detection of deterministic signals
3. Derive/Obtain the estimator-correlator for the detection of random signals

Course Outcome 3 (CO3): Choose and apply suitable parameter estimation

technique for a practical estimation problem.
1. Derive/Obtain the Minimum variance unbiased estimator (or best linear unbiased estimator)
for any simple examples (eg. DC Signal in white Gaussian noise)

2. Derive/Obtain the Maximum likelihood estimator (or least squares estimator or minimum
mean square error estimator) for any simple examples (eg. DC Signal in white Gaussian
noise)

3. Using Bayesian approach, obtain an estimator for any simple examples.

 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

SYLLABUS
Module 1:

Introduction to Detection and Estimation:

Review of joint and conditional probability concepts, Gaussian random variables and
processes, Review of Linear Algebra.

Introduction to detection and estimation theory: Problem formulation and applications of

signal detection and parameter estimation.

Module 2:
Statistical Detection Theory 1:
Binary hypothesis testing; Neyman-Pearson detector; Bayes Detector; Receiver operating
characteristics; Multiple hypothesis testing.

Module 3:
Statistical Detection Theory 2:
Detection of Deterministic Signals: Matched filter, Estimator-Correlator.

Composite hypothesis testing with unknown signal and noise parameters: Uniformly most
powerful test and Generalized likelihood ratio test.

Module 4:
Statistical Estimation Theory 1:

Minimum Variance Unbiased Estimators, Cramer-Rao Lower Bound (CRLB), Fisher

information Matrix, Sufficient Statistics, Efficient estimators, Bias, Maximum Likelihood
Estimator, Invariance property.

Module 5:
Statistical Estimation Theory 2:
Linear Models for estimation, Best Linear Unbiased Estimator, Least Square Estimator
Bayesian Estimators – Minimum Mean Square Estimator (MMSE), Minimum Absolute
Error, MAP Estimator.
Text Books
1. Fundamentals of Statistical Signal Processing, Volume I: Estimation Theory, S.M.
Kay, Prentice Hall 1993, ISBN-13: 978-0133457117.
2. Fundamentals of Statistical Signal Processing, Volume II: Detection Theory, S.M.
Kay, Prentice 1993, ISBN-13: 978-0135041352.
Reference Books
1. An Introduction to Signal Detection and Estimation, H.V. Poor, Springer, 2nd
edition, 1998, ISBN-13: 978-0387941738.
2. Statistical Signal Processing, L.L. Scharf, Pearson India, 2010, ISBN-13: 978-
8131733615.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of
Lectures
1
Introduction to Detection and Estimation:
1.1 Review of joint and conditional probability concepts, Gaussian random 2
variables and processes, Review of Linear Algebra.
1.2 Introduction to detection and estimation theory, 2
1.3 Problem Formulation of estimation 1
1.4 Problem Formulation of detection 1
1.5 Applications of detection and estimation 1
2 Statistical Detection Theory 1:
2.1 Binary hypothesis testing 2
2.2 Neyman-Pearson detector
2
2.2 Bayes Detector 2
2.3 Receiver operating characteristics 1
2.4 Multiple hypothesis testing 2
3 Statistical Detection Theory 2
3.1 Detection of Deterministic Signals: Matched filter, 2
3.2 Estimator-Correlator. 1
3.3 Composite hypothesis testing with unknown signal and noise parameters 2
3.3 Uniformly most powerful test 2
3.4 Generalized likelihood ratio test. 2
4 Statistical Estimation Theory 1
4.1 Minimum Variance Unbiased Estimators 1
4.2 Cramer-Rao Lower Bound (CRLB) 2
4.3 Fisher information Matrix, 2
4.4 Sufficient Statistics 1
4.5 Efficient estimators, Bias 2
4.6 Maximum Likelihood Estimator, Invariance property 2
5 Statistical Estimation Theory 1
5.1 Linear Models for estimation 1
5.2 Best Linear Unbiased Estimator 1
5.3 Least Square Estimator 2
5.4 Bayesian Estimators 1
5.5 Minimum Mean Square Estimator (MMSE), 2

5.6 Minimum Absolute Error 1

5.7 MAP Estimator 2
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Simulation Assignments (using MATLAB or Python)

1. Generate and familiarize PDF and CDF of Normal distribution.
2. Generate DC level in White Gaussian Noise.
3. Simulate a Neyman-Pearson Detector.
4. Simulate a Maximum Likelihood Estimator.
5. Simulate a Best Linear Unbiased Estimator.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Model Question paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

EIGHTH SEMESTER B. TECH (HONOURS) DEGREE EXAMINATION, (Model Question
Paper)
Course Code: AET499
Program: Applied Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Course Name: Estimation and Detection
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours
PART A

Answer ALL Questions. Each Carries 3 mark.

1 Enumerate different applications which are using estimation and CO2 K2

detection techniques.
2 Differentiate estimation and detection techniques. CO1 K3
3 Differentiate classical approach and bayesian approach in detection CO1 K3
theory.
4 Give the mathematical formulation of detection methods. CO1 K3
5 Draw receiver operating characteristics with all details CO2 K2
6 Give the significance of Bayes risk CO2 K3
7 Give the significance of linear models in estimation theory. CO3 K2
8 Significance of Cramer-Rao Lower Bound in estimation. CO3 K3
9 What is Minimum Variance Unbiased Estimation? CO3 K2
10 Differentiate MAP and ML methods in estimation. CO3 K3

PART – B
Answer one question from each module; each question carries 14 marks.
Module – I

11. Obtain the mathematical formulation of estimation method with an 14 CO1 K2

example.
OR
12. Using radar system as an example, differentiate estimation and detection 14 CO1 K2
techniques
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Module – II

13 Design Neyman-Pearson detector for the unknown level A in 14 CO2 K2

White Gaussian Noise with variance σ 2 .
OR
14 Describe the Bayesian approaches in the design of detectors. 14 CO2 K2

Module – III

15 Obtain Matched Filter detector for N -sample deterministic signal 14 CO2 K3

in noise, w[n] ∼ N (0, σ 2 ) where w[n]’s are uncorrelated
OR
16 Describe estimator-correlator in the detection of random signals. 14 CO2 K3

Module – IV

17 The data 14 CO3 K3

𝑥[𝑛] = 𝐴𝑟 𝑛 + 𝑤[𝑛] 𝑓𝑜𝑟 𝑛 = 0,1,2 𝑎𝑟𝑒 𝑜𝑏𝑠𝑒𝑟𝑣𝑒𝑑, 𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒 𝑤[𝑛] is
WGN with variance σ2 and r > 0 is known.
Find the Cramer Rao lower bound for the unknown parameter, A?
OR
18 If 𝑥[𝑛] = 𝐴 + 𝐵𝑛 + 𝑤[𝑛] 𝑓𝑜𝑟 𝑛 = 0,1, … , 𝑁 − 1 𝑎𝑟𝑒 𝑜𝑏𝑠𝑒𝑟𝑣𝑒𝑑, 14 CO3 K3
𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒 𝑤[𝑛] is WGN with variance σ2 . Find the Fisher
information and CRLB for estimating the unknown parameter B.
Assume that the parameter A is known.

Module – V

19 For the signal model: 14 CO3 K3

𝐴, 0≤ n ≤𝑀−1
𝑠[𝑛] = {
−𝐴, 𝑀 ≤ n ≤ 𝑁−1
a) Find the Least Square Estimator of A and minimum least square
error. Assume 𝑥[𝑛] = 𝑠[𝑛] + 𝑤[𝑛], 𝑓𝑜𝑟 𝑛 = 0, 1, 2, … , 𝑁 −
1 are observed.
b) If w[n] is WGN with variance σ2, find the pdf of LSE.

OR
20 A data set x[n], n = 0, 1, ...., N-1 is modelled as: 14 CO3 K3
x[n] = a cos(2πf0n) + b sin(2πf0n) + w[n],
where w[n] is WGN with variance σ2. Find MMSE estimate of θ
= [a b]T , assuming appropriate prior PDF for a and b. Also
assume that θ is independent of w[n].
Applied Electronics and Instrumentation
 SEMESTER VIII
APPLIED ELECTRONICS AND INSTRUMENTATION
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

AET402 VLSI CIRCUIT DESIGN CATEGORY L T P CREDITS

PCC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: This course aims to develop the skill to design various VLSI circuits.

Pre-requisites: ECT201 SOLID STATE DEVICES & ECT203 LOGIC CIRCUIT DESIGN

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Design and analyze CMOS Inverters

CO 2 Explain CMOS fabrication process and prepare physical layout for various MOS
Circuits
CO 3 Design and analyze various Combinational Logic Circuits

CO4 Design and analyze Sequential Logic Circuits and Datapath Subsystems

CO5 Design and analyze various types of Memories

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO 12
10 11
CO 1 3 3 2 3 3
CO 2 3 3 3 3
CO 3 3 3 2 3 3
CO 4 3 3 2 3 3
CO 5 3 3 2 3 3

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember K1 10 10 10
Understand K2 20 20 50
Apply K3 20 20 40
Analyse K4
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain
10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should
answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer
any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Design and analyze CMOS Inverters

1. Design a CMOS inverter with proper Transistor sizing.
2. Draw and explain the voltage transfer characteristics (VTC) of a CMOS Inverter and
obtain its threshold voltage.
3. Describe the CMOS Inverter using SPICE code.
4. Analyze the static and dynamic behavior of CMOS Inverter.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Explain CMOS fabrication process and prepare physical
layout for various MOS Circuits
1. Explain the concept and importance of stick diagrams in generating the physical layout of
an integrated circuit.
2. Explain the lambda(λ) based layout rules in translating stick diagrams into actual geometry
in silicon (the physical layout) and its dependency on the process technology.
3. Hand sketch basic MOS transistor layout employing the concept of stick diagrams.
4. Hand sketch the physical layout of a CMOS Inverter, NAND, NOR and XOR gates.
5. Generate the Layout of CMOS Inverter, NAND, NOR and XOR gates using
MICROWIND.
Course Outcome 3 (CO3): Design and analyze various Combinational Logic Circuits
1. Design two-input NAND and NOR gates in static Complementary MOS style and analyze
the respective VTCs and propagation delay.
2. Design Pseudo NMOS inverter and study the dependence of VTC on the W/L ratio.
3. Design a Pass Transistor and gate and obtain its VTC.
4. Explain the use of Transmission gates in the efficient implementation of complex gates.
5. Explain the basic principles of dynamic logic- Precharge and Evaluation.
6. Explain how the dynamic logic implementation of gates reduce Power dissipation and
improve speed of operation.
7. Explain the adverse effects of charge leakage, charge sharing, capacitive coupling and
clock feedthrough in the proper functioning of dynamic circuits.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Design and analyze Sequential Logic Circuits and Datapath
Subsystems
1. Define and explain the three important timing parameters associated with a register.
2. Explain the implementation of latches and registers in the static style.
3. Explain the implementation of latches and registers in the dynamic style.
4. Explain the implementation of various Datapath subsystems.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Design and analyze various types of Memories

1. Design of the Memory Core-Read only Memories-Nonvolatile Read Write Memories-
Read Write memories-SRAM and DRAM.
2. Explain the design of ROM arrays using NAND and NOR gates.
3. Explain the implementation of various types of Non-Volatile Read Write memories.
4. Explain the operations (read and write) of a six transistor CMOS SRAM cell.
5. Explain the operations (read and write) of a three transistor DRAM cell.

SYLLABUS
AET402 VLSI CIRCUIT DESIGN

Module 1:
Overview of CMOS device fundamentals (Pre-requisite). The CMOS inverter: - Voltage
Transfer Characteristics, SPICE Description, Static Behavior - Switching Threshold - Noise
Margins, Dynamic behavior - Device Capacitances - Propagation Delay - Power
Consumption.

Module 2:
CMOS fabrication Processes: -N-Tub, P-Tub and Twin Tub. MOS Circuit Layout - Stick
diagrams, Layout design rules, Transistor layout - PMOS and NMOS, Gate Layout - Inverter,
NAND, NOR and XOR, Layout generation using MICROWIND tool (For
Assignments/Projects only).

Module 3:
Combinational logic Circuits: - Static MOS - Complementary MOS - Ratioed logic - Pass
Transistor logic - Differential Pass Transistor Logic - Transmission gate logic, Dynamic MOS
- Basic Principles - Speed and power Dissipation - Signal Integrity issues.

Module 4:
Sequential Logic Circuits: -Timing Metrics for sequential circuits, Static Latches and
Registers, Dynamic Latches and Registers. Datapath Subsystems: - Adder - Ripple carry
Adder - Full adder - Carry chain Adder - Carry-Bypass Adder - Carry Select Adder - Carry
Look Ahead Adder, Multiplier - Array Multiplier - Carry Save Multiplier, Shifter - Barrel
Shifter - Logarithmic Shifter.

Module 5:
Design of the Memory Core - Read only Memories - Nonvolatile Read Write Memories -
Read Write memories - SRAM and DRAM.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Text Books:

1. J.M. Rabaey, A. Chandrakasan and B. Nikolic, Digital Integrated Circuits- A Design

Perspective, 2nd ed., PHI.
2. Douglas A. Pucknell & Kamran Eshraghian, Basic VLSI Design, PHI.
3. CMOS digital integrated circuits: Analysis and design, Sung-Mo Kang, Yusuf Lablebici,
TATA McGraw-Hill

References:

1. CMOS Logic Circuit Design byJohn P. Uyemura, Springer India Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi.
2. Analysis &Design of Digital Integrated Circuits by David A. Hodges, Horace G. Jackson, R.
Saleh, McGraw Hill.
3. CMOS VLSI Design, a Circuits and Systems Perspective, Neil H. E. Weste, David Money
Harris, Addison-Wesley
4. VLSI Circuit Layout: theory and design, Edited by T.C Hu, Ernest S. Kuh, IEEE Press
5. Relevant IEEE Journals on VLSI Circuits and Systems.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures

1 The CMOS inverter
1.1 The CMOS Inverter- Circuit and VTC 1
1.2 Brief Introduction to SPICE and description of a CMOS inverter in 1
SPICE
1.3 The Evaluation of PMOS and NMOS W/L ratios and Inverter 2
switching thresholds, Noise Margin.
1.4 MOS device capacitances and propagation delay 2
1.5 Dynamic power consumption 1

2 MOS Circuit Layout

2.1 CMOS fabrication Processes: -N-Tub, P-Tub and Twin-Tub 2
2.2 Introduction to stick diagrams and layout design rules 1
2.3 Transistor layout-PMOS and NMOS 1
2.4 Gate Layout-Inverter, NAND, NOR and XOR. 1
2.5 Layout generation using MICROWIND tool 1

3 Combinational logic Circuits

3.1 Static Complementary MOS 2
3.2 Ratioed logic, Pass Transistor logic 2
3.3 Transmission gate logic 1
3.4 Dynamic MOS- Basic Principles 1
3.5 Dynamic MOS -Speed and power Dissipation 1
3.6 Dynamic MOS -Signal Integrity issues. 2

4 Sequential Logic Circuits

4.1 Timing Metrics for sequential circuits 1
4.2 Static Latches and Registers 2
4.3 Dynamic Latches and Registers 2
4.4 Datapath Subsystems- Adder- Ripple carry Adder-Full adder-Carry 2
chain Adder-Carry-Bypass Adder-Carry Select Adder-Carry Look
Ahead Adder.
4.5 Multiplier-Array Multiplier-Carry Save Multiplier. 1
4.6 Shifter-Barrel Shifter-Logarithmic Shifter. 1

5 Design of the Memory Core

5.1 Read only Memories 1
5.2 Nonvolatile Read Write Memories 1
5.3 SRAM 1
5.4 DRAM. 1

Assignment:

At least one assignment should be a layout practice using MICROWIND and circuit simulation
using SPICE.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Model Question paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

EIGHTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
Program: Applied Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering/ Electronics and
Instrumentation
Course Code: AET402

Course Name: AET402 VLSI CIRCUITS DESIGN

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART-A
Answer all Questions. Each carries 3 marks.

1. Draw and explain the Voltage Transfer Characteristics of CMOS inverter. CO1 K2
2. What is Noise margin? Obtain its expression. CO1 K3
3. Explain the λ-based design rules for CMOS circuit layout. CO2 K1
4. Draw the stick diagram for a CMOS Inverter. CO2 K3
5. Explain the basic concept of complementary static CMOS design. CO3 K1
6. Differentiate between Ratioed and Non-ratioed styles of logic gate CO3 K3
implementation.
7. Define the following timing parameters associated with a register CO4 K1
i)Setup Time ii) Hold Time iii) Propagation Delay
8. With the help of truth table explain the implementation of Sum and Carry CO4 K2
outputs of a binary full adder.
9. What is an EPROM? Explain. CO5 K1
10. Draw the circuit diagram and explain the operation of a one transistor DRAM CO5 K2
cell.

PART-B
Answer ONE question from each module. Each carries 14 marks.

Module 1
11. Derive the Transistor sizing ratio for a CMOS Inverter so that its switching 14 CO1 K3
threshold is located at the mid value between supply rails
OR
12. Show that the values of tpHL and tpLH for a CMOS Inverter can be made 14 CO1 K3
identical by making the ON resistances of NMOS and PMOS transistors
approximately equal.
Module 2
13. Explain the Twin-tub process of CMOS fabrication. 14 CO2 K2
OR
14. Sketch the stick diagram of a CMOS XOR gate. 14 CO2 K2
Module 3
15 Implement a two- input NAND gate in complementary static CMOS style. 9 CO3 K2
a).
15 Show that the VTC of a two-input NAND gate is data dependent. 5 CO3 K3
b)
OR
16 Explain the pass transistor implementation of an AND gate. 9 CO3 K2
a).
16 Show that the Transmission gate logic style is best suited to enable rial-to- 5 CO3 K3
b). rail switching.
Module 4
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

17 Explain the carry look ahead principle for the implementation of fast 9 CO4 K2
a). adders.
17 With the help of a transistor level circuit diagram explain the 5 CO4 K2
b). implementation of a 4-bit carry look ahead adder.
OR
18. With the help of a transistor level circuit diagram explain the working of 14 CO4 K2
a logarithmic shifter.
Module 5
19. Explain the Read/Write operation of a 6T CMOS SRAM cell. 14 CO5 K2
OR
20. Explain the operation of a 3T DRAM cell 14 CO5 K2
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

AET 414 ANN AND DEEP LEARNING CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble:

Artificial neural networks (ANNs), are computing systems inspired by the biological neural networks
that constitute human brains. Deep learning is a powerful set of techniques for training neural
networks. This course introduces the key concepts in neural networks, its architecture and learning
paradigms, optimization techniques, basic concepts in deep learning, deep learning architectures such
as Convolutional Neural Networks and Recurrent Neural Networks etc. The students will be able to
provide best solutions to real world problems in domains such as pattern analysis and speech and
audio processing.

Prerequisite:

A Sound knowledge in Computational fundamentals of machine learning

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO1 Explain the basic concepts of machine learning models, algorithms, and performance
metrics. (K2)
CO2 Illustrate the basic concepts and architecture of artificial neural networks and its design
issues. (K3)
CO3 Formulate methodologies for the standard regularization and optimization techniques,
training and testing for deep neural networks. (K3)
CO4 Build CNN and RNN models for different use cases. (K3)
CO5 Explain the concepts of modern RNNs, LSTM, GRU and understand the usage for
practical applications. (K2)

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
1 2 10 11 12
CO 1 3 3 2 2
CO 2 3 3 2 2
CO 3 2 2 2 3 3 2
CO 4 2 3 3 2
CO 5 2 3 3 2

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

/Tests
1 2
Remember K1 10 10 10
Understand K2 20 20 50
Apply K3 20 20 40
Analyze
Evaluate
Create
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern:

There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10 questions with 2 questions
from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer all
questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should
answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Understand the basic concepts of machine learning models,
algorithms, and performance metrics.
1. Understand the basic terminologies in Machine learning- categorize different learning
approaches.

2. Compare and contrast between different machine learning algorithms.

3. Understand basic principles of regression and classification.

4. Understand the principles definitions of different performance metrics for

evaluating machine learning models.

Sample questions:

1. Calculate the two regression equations of X on Y and Y on X from the

data given below, taking deviations from a actual means of X and Y.
Estimate the likely demand when the price is Rs.20.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

2. Consider a two-class classification problem of predicting whether a photograph contains a

man or a woman. Suppose we have a test dataset of 10 records with expected outcomes and
a set of predictions from our classification algorithm. Compute the confusion matrix,
accuracy, precision, recall, sensitivity and specificity on the following data.

Sl.No. Actual Predicted

1 man woman

2 man man

3 woman woman

4 man man

5 man woman

6 woman woman

7 woman man

8 man man

9 man woman

10 woman woman

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Illustrate the basic concepts and architecture of artificial
neural networks and its design issues.
1. Understand the basic principles and terminologies in Artificial Neural
Networks.

2. Explain the working principles of perceptron- understand the perceptron learning

algorithm.
3. Understand the significance of different activation functions, usage and selection of its
parameters.

4. Design of basic ANN for practical applications in classification and regression tasks.

Sample Questions:
1. Suppose you have a 3-dimensional input x = (x1, x2, x3) = (2, 2, 1) fully
connected with weights (0.5, 0.3, 0.2) to one neuron which is in the hidden layer
with sigmoid activation function. Calculate the output of the hidden layer
neuron.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

2. Consider the case of the XOR function in which the two points {(0, 0),(1, 1)}
belong to one class, and the other two points {(1, 0),(0, 1)} belong to the other
class. Design a multilayer perceptron for this binary classification problem.

Course Outcome 3 (CO3): Formulate methodologies for the standard regularization and
optimization techniques, training and testing for deep neural networks.
1. Study the basic principles optimization and regularization techniques

2. Familiarize the concept and conventions used in training, validation and testing of
deep learning models.
3. Understand the concepts of Early stopping, Dataset augmentation etc.

Sample questions:
1. Derive a mathematical expression to show L2 regularization as weight decay.

2. Explain how L2 regularization improves the performance of deep feed forward

neural networks.

3. Explain how L1 regularization method leads to weight sparsity.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Build CNN and RNN models for different use cases.

1. Familiarization of deep leaning structures CNN and RNN and functionality of

different layers.
2. Design and implementation of basic CNN for pattern analysis tasks.

3. Performance analysis of CNN models.

Sample questions:

1. Let us consider a Convolutional Neural Network having three different convolutional layers in
its architecture as –

Layer-1: Filter Size – 3 X 3, Number of Filters – 10, Stride – 1, Padding – 0

Layer-2: Filter Size – 5 X 5, Number of Filters – 20, Stride – 2, Padding – 0

Layer-3: Filter Size – 5 X5 , Number of Filters – 40, Stride – 2, Padding – 0

If we give the input a 3-D image to the network of dimension 39 X 39, then determine the
dimension of the vector after passing through a fully connected layer in the architecture.

2. Illustrate the workings of the RNN with an example of a single sequence defined on a
vocabulary of four words.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Explain the concepts of modern RNNs, LSTM, GRU and
understand the usage for practical applications.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

1. Study the basic principles and properties of RNNs, LSTM and GRU.
2. Familiarize the concepts of deep recurrent networks, recursive neural networks
3. Build simple RNN for practical applications in speech processing domain.

Sample questions:
1. Draw and explain the architecture of LSTM.
2. List the differences between LSTM and GRU
3. Explain design steps of an RNN.

SYLLABUS

Module - 1 (Basics of Machine Learning)

Machine Learning basics - Learning algorithms - Supervised, Unsupervised, Reinforcement,
Overfitting, Underfitting, Hyper parameters and Validation sets, Estimators -Bias and Variance.
Challenges in machine learning. Simple Linear Regression, Logistic Regression, Classification.
Performance metrics - Confusion matrix, Accuracy, Precision, Recall, Sensitivity, Specificity,
Receiver Operating Characteristic curve (ROC), Area Under Curve (AUC).

Module -2 (Artificial Neural Networks)

Introduction to artificial neural networks -Single layer perceptrons, Multi-Layer Perceptrons (MLPs),
Representation Power of MLPs, Activation functions - Sigmoid, Tanh, ReLU, Softmax. Risk
minimization, Loss function, Training MLPs with backpropagation, Practical issues in neural
network training - The Problem of Overfitting, Vanishing and exploding gradient problems,
Difficulties in convergence, Local and spurious Optima, Computational Challenges. Applications of
neural networks for classification and regression tasks.

Module 3 (Fundamentals of Deep learning)

Introduction to deep learning, Deep feed forward network, Training deep models, Optimization
techniques - Gradient Descent (GD), GD with momentum, Nesterov accelerated GD, Stochastic
GD, AdaGrad, RMSProp, Adam. Regularization Techniques - L1 and L2 regularization, Early
stopping, Dataset augmentation, Parameter sharing and tying, Injecting noise at input, Ensemble
methods, Dropout, Parameter initialization.

Module -4 (Convolutional Neural Network)

Convolutional Neural Networks – Convolution operation, Motivation, Pooling, Convolution and
Pooling as an infinitely strong prior, Variants of convolution functions, Structured outputs, Data
types, Efficient convolution algorithms. Practical use cases for CNNs, Case study - Building CNN
model AlexNet for simple pattern analysis tasks benchmark datasets.

Module- 5 (Recurrent Neural Network)

Recurrent neural networks – Computational graphs, RNN design, encoder – decoder sequence to
sequence architectures, deep recurrent networks, recursive neural networks, modern RNNs LSTM
and GRU, Practical use cases for RNNs. Case study – Build simple RNN for tasks in speech and
audio processing and image processing domains.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Text Book

1. Symon O. Haykin, Neural Networks & Learning Machines, Pearson Education India; Third
edition (1 April 2016)
2. Goodfellow, I., Bengio,Y., and Courville, A., Deep Learning, MIT Press, 2016.
3.Neural Networks and Deep Learning, Aggarwal, Charu C., Springer International Publishing
AG, part of Springer Nature 2018
4.Fundamentals of Deep Learning: Designing Next-Generation Machine Intelligence Algorithms
(1st. ed.). Nikhil Buduma and Nicholas Locascio. 2017. O'Reilly Media, Inc.

Reference Books

1. Satish Kumar, Neural Networks: A Classroom Approach, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2004.
2. Yegnanarayana, B., Artificial Neural Networks PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd, 2009.
3. Michael Nielsen, Neural Networks and Deep Learning, 2018
4. Symon O. Haykin,Neural Network – A Comprehensive Foundation, Pearson Education (US) (7
August 1997).
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Teaching Plan

Module 1: [Text book 1: Chapter 5, Textbook 2: Chapter 2] (7 hours)

1.1 Introduction, Learning algorithms - Supervised, Unsupervised, 2 hours
Reinforcement, Overfitting, Underfitting, Hyperparameters
1.2 Validation sets, Estimators -Bias and Variance. Challenges in machine 1 hour
learning.
1.3 Simple Linear Regression, Illustration of Linear Regression 1 hour
1.4 Logistic Regression, Illustration of Logistic Regression 1 hour
1.5 Performance metrics - Confusion matrix, Accuracy, Precision, Recall, 1 hour
Sensitivity, Specificity, ROC, AUC.
1.6 Illustrative Examples for performance metrics 1 hour
Module 2: Text book 2, Chapter 1 (6 hours)
2.1 Introduction to artificial neural networks -Single layer perceptrons 1 hour
2.2 Multi-Layer Perceptrons (MLPs), Representation Power of MLPs 1 hour
2.3 Activation functions - Sigmoid, Tanh, ReLU, Softmax. Risk 1 hour
minimization, Loss function
2.4 Training MLPs with backpropagation algorithm, Illustration of back 1 hour
propagation algorithm
2.5 Practical issues in artificial neural network training - The Problem of 1 hour
Overfitting, Vanishing and exploding gradient problems

2.6 Difficulties in convergence, Local and spurious Optima, Computational 1 hour

Challenges. Applications of artificial neural networks
Module 3: Text book 1: Chapter 7, 8, Text book 2, Chapter 3, 4 (8 hours)
3.1 Introduction to deep learning, Deep feed forward network 1 hour

3.2 Training deep learning models - Introduction, setup and initialization 1 hour
issues

3.4 Concepts of optimization, Gradient Descent (GD), GD with 1 hour

momentum.
3.5 Nesterov accelerated GD, Stochastic GD. 1 hour
3.6 AdaGrad, RMSProp, Adam. 1 hour
3.7 Concepts of Regularization, L1 and L2 regularization, Early stopping, 2 hours
Dataset augmentation
3.9 Parameter sharing and tying, Injecting noise at input, Ensemble 1 hour
methods, Dropout, Parameter initialization.
Module 4: Text book 1, Chapter 9, Text book 2: Chapter 8 (7 hours)
4.1 Convolutional Neural Networks, architecture 1 hour

4.2 Convolution and Pooling operation with example, Convolution and 1 hour
Pooling as an infinitely strong prior

4.3 Variants of convolution functions, structured outputs, data types 1 hour

4.4 Efficient convolution algorithms. 1 hour

 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

4.5 Practical use cases for CNNs 1 hour

4.6 Case study - Building CNN model AlexNet for simple pattern analysis 2 hours
tasks benchmark datasets.

Module 5: Text book 1: Chapter 10, 11, Text book 2: Chapter 7 (7 hours)
5.1 Recurrent neural networks – Computational graphs, RNN design 1 hour
5.2 Encoder – decoder sequence to sequence architectures 1 hour
5.3 Deep recurrent networks- Architecture, Recursive neural networks 1 hour
5.4 Modern RNNs - LSTM, GRU 1 hour
5.5 Practical use cases for RNNs. 1 hour
5.6 Case study – Speech and Audio Processing. 1 hour
5.7 Case study - Image Processing. 1 hour

Assignment:

Assignment1: Implementation of ANN using Python / Neural Network Tool box- MATLAB
Assignment2: Implementation of simple CNN for pattern analysis tasks (Image Processing)
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Model Question paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

EIGHTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, (Model Question Paper)
Program: Applied Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering/ Electronics &
Instrumentation Engineering

Course Code: AET414

Course Name: ANN and Deep Learning
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours
PART A
Answer ALL Questions. Each Carries 3 mark.
1 CO1 K3
List and compare the types of machine learning algorithms.
2 Suppose 10000 patients get tested for flu; out of them, 9000 are actually CO1 K2
healthy and 1000 are actually sick. For the sick people, a test was positive for
620 and negative for 380. For healthy people, the same test was positive for
180 and negative for 8820. Construct a confusion matrix for the data and
compute the accuracy, precision and recall for the data.
3 Illustrate the limitation of a single layer perceptron with an example. CO2 K2
4 Specify the advantages of ReLU over sigmoid activation function. CO2 K2
5 Derive weight updating rule in gradient descent when the error function is a) CO3 K3
mean squared error b) cross entropy.
6 List any three methods to prevent overfitting in neural networks. CO3 K3
7 What happens if the stride of the convolutional layer increases? What can be CO4 K2
the maximum stride? Justify your answer.
8 Consider an activation volume of size 13×13×64 and a filter of size 3×3×64. CO4 K3
Discuss whether it is possible to perform convolutions with strides 2, 3 and 5.
Justify your answer in each case.
9 How does a recursive neural network work? CO5 K2
10 List down three differences between LSTM and RNN. CO5 K2

PART – B
Answer one question from each module; each question carries 14 marks.

Module – I

11. Prove that the decision boundary of binary logistic regression is 9 CO1 K3
a) linear
11. Given the following data, construct the ROC curve of the data. 5 CO2 K3
b) Compute the AUC.
TP TN FP FN
Threshold

1 0 25 0 29

2 7 25 0 22
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

3 18 24 1 11

4 26 20 5 3

5 29 11 14 0

6 29 0 25 0

7 29 0 25 0

OR
12.a) With an example classification problem, explain the following 6 CO1 K3
terms: a) Hyper parameters b) Training set c) Validation sets d)
Bias e) Variance
12.b) Determine the regression equation by finding the regression slope 4 CO2 K3
coefficient and the intercept value using the following data.

x 55 60 65 70 80

y 52 54 56 58 62

12.c) With illustrative examples, explain confusion matrix, accuracy, 4 CO1 K3

precision, recall, sensitivity, specificity of a classifier.

Module – II

13 a) Obtain the weight updation equations in a multi-layer perceptron 9 CO2 K2

(MLP) based on back propagation with one hidden layer. Suggest the
complete architectural details for a MLP that may be used for
classifying the spiral data as shown in Figure 1 above with two classes.
Draw a neat diagram. The diagram must contain details of different
layers, number of nodes, activation functions used in each layer/nodes
and hyper parameters used.

Figure 1

13 b) Briefly explain the significance of different activation functions used 5 CO2 K2

for neurons.
OR
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

14 a) An ANN as shown in Figure 2 is set up to classify 2D patterns belong 9 CO2 K2

to two classes as shown in the right side of Figure 1. Explain how do
you select (1). Learning rate parameter (η) (2). initial weights (3).
activation functions for different layers and (4) optimization algorithm.

Figure 2
14 b) Explain how the weights between output layer and hidden layer, hidden 5 CO2 K2
layer and input layer of an ANN are updated using stochastic gradient
descent algorithm.

Module – III

15 a) Differentiate gradient descent with and without momentum. Give 5 CO3 K3

equations for weight updation in GD with and without momentum.
Illustrate plateaus, saddle points and slowly varying gradients.
15 b) Discuss the differences between conventional learning and deep 9 CO3 K3
learning. Explain the functionalities of different layers in a deep
learning structure.
OR
16 a) Suppose a supervised learning problem is given to model a deep feed 9 CO3 K2
forward neural network. Suggest solutions for the following a) small
sized dataset for training b) dataset with both labelled and unlabeled
data c) large data set but data from different distribution
16 b) Describe the effect in bias and variance when a neural network is 3 CO3 K2
modified with more number of hidden units followed with dropout
regularization.
16 c) Explain the concept of dropout, parameter initialization associated with 2 CO3 K3
deep learning.
Module – IV

17 a) Draw and explain the architecture of Convolutional Neural Networks. 9 CO3 K2

Explain the functionalities of all layers.
17 b) Suppose that a CNN was trained to classify images into different 5 CO4 K3
categories. It performed well on a validation set that was taken from
the same source as the training set but not on a testing set. What could
be the problem with the training of such a CNN? How will you
ascertain the problem? How can those problems be solved?

OR
18 a) Explain the following convolution functions a)tensors b) kernel flipping 9 CO3 K2
c) down sampling d) strides e) zero padding.
18 b) Explain the need for data augmentation in CNN. Also explain the 5 CO3 K2
selection of convolutional kernel.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Module – V

19 a) Describe how an LSTM takes care of the vanishing gradient problem. 8 CO4 K3
Use some hypothetical numbers for input and output signals to explain
the concept.
19 b) Explain the architecture of Recurrent Neural Networks 6 CO4 K3
OR
20 a) Explain LSTM based solution for anyone of the problems in the 6 CO4 K3
Natural Language Processing domain.
20 b) Discuss the architecture of GRU 4 CO4 K3
20 c) Briefly explain the design steps involved in the design of an RNN for 4 CO2 K2
image restoration task.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

AET424 SOFT COMPUTING CATEGORY L T P CREDITS

PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: This course aims to introduce the concepts of Soft Computing that include
Statistical learning models, Artificial Neural Networks, Support Vector Machines, Fuzzy
logic-based systems, Genetic Algorithm-based systems and their hybrids.

Prerequisite: Nil

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Define and explain soft computing techniques and their applications, build
statistical learning models.
CO 2 Analyze various neural network architectures and Support Vector Machine.
CO 3 Define the fuzzy systems. Understand the genetic algorithm concepts and their
applications.
CO4 Identify and select a suitable Soft Computing technique to solve the real world
problems; construct a solutions and implement a Soft Computing systems.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
1 2 10 11 12
CO 1 3 3 3
CO 2 3 3 3 3
CO 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO 4 3 3 3 3

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

/Tests
1 2
Remember K1 10 10 10
Understand K2 20 20 40
Apply K3 10 10 30
Analyze K3 10 10 20
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part
A contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each
question. Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each
module of which student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2
sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Define and explain soft computing techniques and their
applications, build statistical learning models.

1. Understand the basic terminologies in soft computing- categorize different learning

approaches.
2. Compare and contrast between human learning and machine learning.
3. Understand the principles of statistical learning methods

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Analyze various neural network architectures and Support
Vector Machine.
1. Understand the basic principles and terminologies in Artificial Neural
Networks.

2. Explain the working principles of perceptron- understand the perceptron learning

algorithm.
3. Understand the theory behind maximum margin-based classifiers. The concept of
decision regions and hyperplanes. The principle of SVM.

4. Explain the use of SVM based classifiers for multi-class classifications

Course Outcome 3 (CO3): Define the fuzzy systems. Understand the Genetic
Algorithm concepts and their applications.
1. Study the basic principles and properties of Fuzzy logic and fuzzy sets

2. Familiarize the operations on fuzzy relations, Fuzzy membership functions and

fuzzification.

3. Understand the concepts of defuzzification methods, Truth values and Tables in Fuzzy
Logic, Fuzzy propositions, Formation of fuzzy rules and Decomposition of rules.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Identify and select a suitable Soft Computing

technique to solve the real-world problems; construct a solution and implement
a Soft Computing system.

1. Familiarization and generation of synthetic and toy datasets such as linearly separable,
non-linearly separable and overlapping datasets.

2. Design and implement Bayesian classifiers for different cases of

covariance matrices

3. Implement ANNs and SVMs using suitable software tools.

SYLLABUS

Module 1:
Introduction to Soft Computing: Artificial neural networks - biological neurons, Basic models of
artificial neural networks – McCulloch and Pitts Neuron, Perceptron networks Learning rule –
Training and testing algorithm, Activation Functions – Multi-layer perceptrons, Back propagation
Network – Architecture, Learning algorithm

Module 2:
Statistical Learning Models: Bayesian decision theory- Bayes classifier, Decision regions,
significance of covariance matrix. Introduction to GMM. Support vector machines- introduction-
concept of maximum margin- multi-class classifiers using SVM

Module 3:
Fuzzy Systems: Fuzzy logic - fuzzy sets - properties - operations on fuzzy sets, fuzzy relations -
operations on fuzzy relations, Fuzzy membership functions, fuzzification, Methods of membership
value assignments – intuition – inference – rank ordering, Lambda –cuts for fuzzy sets,
Defuzzification methods- Truth values and Tables in Fuzzy Logic, Fuzzy propositions, Formation
of fuzzy rules - Decomposition of rules –Aggregation of rules, Fuzzy Inference Systems –
Mamdani and Sugeno types, Neuro-fuzzy hybrid systems –characteristics – classification

Module 4:
Genetic Algorithm: Introduction to genetic algorithm, operators in genetic algorithm - coding -
selection - cross over – mutation, stopping condition for genetic algorithm flow, Genetic neuro
hybrid systems, Genetic-Fuzzy rule-based system

Module 5:
Design and Implementation of Simple Soft Computing Systems: Study of synthetic datasets-
linearly separable- non linearly separable -overlapping types. Implementation of perceptrons-
Bayes classifiers- ANNs and SVMs using software tools.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Text Books
1. S. N. Sivanandam and S. N.Deepa, Principles of soft computing – John Wiley & Sons,
2007.
2. Timothy J. Ross, Fuzzy Logic with engineering applications, John Wiley & Sons, 2016.

Reference Books
1. N. K. Sinha and M. M. Gupta, Soft Computing & Intelligent Systems: Theory &
Applications-Academic Press /Elsevier. 2009.
2. Simon Haykin, Neural Network- A Comprehensive Foundation- Prentice Hall International, Inc.
3. R. Eberhart and Y. Shi, Computational Intelligence: Concepts to Implementation, Morgan
Kaufman/Elsevier, 2007.
4. Ross T.J, Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications- McGraw Hill.
5. Driankov D., Hellendoorn H. and Reinfrank M., An Introduction to Fuzzy Control-Narosa Pub.
6. Bart Kosko, Neural Network and Fuzzy Systems- Prentice Hall, Inc., Englewood Cliffs
7. Goldberg D.E., Genetic Algorithms in Search, Optimization, and Machine Learning-Addison
Wesley.
8. B. Yegnanarayana, Artificial Neural Networks, Prentice Hall, Inc., 2004.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of
Lectures
1 Introduction to Soft Computing
1.1 Introduction to soft computing techniques 1
1.2 Artificial neural networks - biological neurons, Basic models of 2
artificial neural networks – McCulloch and Pitts Neuron
1.3 Perceptron networks Learning rule – Training and testing algorithm, 2
Activation Functions
Multi-Layer Perceptrons
1.4 Multi-layer perceptrons, Back propagation Network – Architecture, 2
Learning algorithm
2 Statistical Learning Models:

2.1 Bayesian decision theory- Bayes classifier, Decision regions, significance 2

of covariance matrix.

GMMs and Support vector machines

2.2 Introduction to GMM. Support vector machines- introduction-concept of 3

maximum margin- Multi-class classifiers using SVM

2.3 introduction-concept of maximum margin- Multi-class classifiers using 3

SVM

3 Fuzzy Systems

3.1 Fuzzy logic - fuzzy sets - properties - operations on fuzzy sets, fuzzy 1
relations -

3.2 operations on fuzzy relations, Fuzzy membership functions, fuzzification, 2

Methods of membership value assignments – intuition – inference – rank
ordering, Lambda –cuts for fuzzy sets

Defuzzification methods

3.3 Defuzzification methods- Truth values and Tables in Fuzzy Logic, Fuzzy 2
propositions, Formation of fuzzy rules -

3.4 Decomposition of rules –Aggregation of rules, Fuzzy Inference Systems 2

– Mamdani and Sugeno types,

3.5 Neuro-fuzzy hybrid systems –characteristics - classification 1

4 Genetic Algorithm
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

4.1 Introduction to genetic algorithm, operators in genetic algorithm - coding 2

- selection - cross over – mutation.

4.2 Stopping condition for genetic algorithm flow, Genetic neuro hybrid 2
systems,

4.3 Genetic-Fuzzy rule based system 1

5 Design and Implementation of Simple Soft Computing Systems:

5.1 Study of synthetic datasets- linearly separable- non linearly separable - 1

overlapping types.

5.2 Implementation of perceptrons- Bayes classifiers- 2

5.3 Implementation of ANNs using software tools. 2

5.4 Implementation of SVMss using software tools. 2

Assignment:

Assignment1: Implementation of Bayesian classifiers- Perceptrons.

Assignment2: Implementation of ANNs and SVMs
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Model Question paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
SIXTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, (Model Question Paper)
Course Code: AET424
Program: Minor in Applied Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering/ Electronics &
Instrumentation Engineering
Course Name: SOFT COMPUTING
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART A

Answer all Questions. Each question carry 3 marks.

1 With the help of a neat schematic, explain the operation of a CO1 K2

perceptron. Also explain the significance of bias and activation
function.
2 Explain the significance of learning rate parameter associated CO1 K2
with the perceptron learning.
3 Explain Bayes decision theory. Discuss how a two-class CO2 K2
classification problem can be solved using Bayes classifier.
4 What do you mean be maximum margin? Derive an expression CO2 K2
for the margin of SVM.
5 Give a list of properties and operations on a fuzzy set. CO3 K3
6 Briefly explain the characteristics of fuzzy inference systems. CO3 K2
7 Discuss the importance of Genetic Algorithm in soft computing. CO4 K2
8 Explain various operators used in Genetic Algorithm CO4 K2
9 Discuss how do you generate synthetic datasets for different CO5 K2
experiments associated with building classifiers.
10 Briefly explain the procedure for generating training, testing and CO5 K2
validation datasets for experiments.

PART – B
Answer one question from each module; each question carries 14 marks.
Module – I

11. a) Explain the learning rule for perceptron. Also explain how 5 CO1 K2
weights are updated in the perceptron learning process.
11. b) With neat waveforms and expressions explain the hard threshold 9 CO2 K2
logic and sigmoid activation functions. Discuss the significance
of spread parameter associated with the sigmoid activation
function.
OR
12.a) With the help of a neat diagram explain the architecture of a single 5 CO1 K2
hidden layer artificial Neural Network. Also discuss how different
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

parameters such as number of neurons in different layers, initial

weights, activation functions etc., are selected.
12.b) Explain the back propagation algorithm associated with the ANN 5 CO2 K2
learning. Also explain hoe weights are updated and conditions
for convergence.
12.c) Discuss the significance of momentum constant associated with 4 CO1 K2
the ANN.

Module – II

13 a) Give the expression for multivariate Gaussian distribution and 9 CO2 K2

explain each term. Explain the significance of covariance matrix.

13 b) Design Bayes classifier for a two class classification problem. 5 CO2 K2

Assume that the data is distributed as per multivariate Gaussian.
Explain the decision logic.
OR

14 a) With the help of a neat schematic explain the basic principle of 9 CO2 K2
GMM.

14 b) With the help of a neat schematic explain the functionality of 5 CO2 K2

SVM. Also explain how do you determine the optimum decision
surface if the underlying data is linearly separable ?

Module – III

15 a) Explain the concept of fuzzy membership functions. Also 5 CO3 K2

explain basic features of membership functions.

15 b) Discuss different methods for assigning membership values. 9 CO3 K3

Illustrate intuition and inference with relevant examples.

OR

16 a) Briefly explain the basic principles of defuzzification. Explain 7 CO3 K2

any two defuzzification methods.

16 b) Compare and contrast between conventional control and fuzzy 4 CO3 K2

control systems.

16 c) Explain the characteristics of a fuzzy inference system. Also 3 CO3 K3

with the help of sketches, explain Mamdani inference system
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Module – IV

17 a) Briefly explain the concept of selection associated with the 9 CO3 K2

genetic algorithm. Distinguish between random selection and
rank selection strategies.

17 b) What do you mean by cross over ? Explain single point and two point 5 CO4 K2
cross over with necessary illustrations. Also explain cross over
probability.

OR

18 a) Explain various stopping conditions for genetic algorithm flow. 9 CO3 K2

Compare and contrast between best individual and worst
individual conditions for stopping.

18 b) With the help of a neat schematic explain genetic neuro hybrid 5 CO3 K2
systems

Module – V

19 a) With neat illustrations, explain the characteristics of linearly, 6 CO4 K3

nonlinearly separable and overlapping type datasets.

19 b) Explain the experimental set up and procedures for conducting pattern 8 CO4 K2
analysis experiments using SVM
OR

20 a) Briefly comment on available software tools for implementing 4 CO4 K2

ANNs and SVMs.

20 b) Explain the experimental set up and procedures for conducting pattern 5 CO4 K3
analysis experiments using ANN using a suitable software tool
20 c) Explain how do you perform multi-class classification using 5 CO2 K2
SVM. What are the different approaches for multi-class
classification using SVM ?
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

CATEGORY L T P Credit
AET434 BIOINFORMATICS
PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble:
The course is designed for the engineering graduates to understand basic concepts of molecular
biology bioinformatics and to introduce data processing and modelling of biological data. This will
help the students to tap opportunities in the areas of computational biology, which is an emerging
engineering discipline. The course will cover basics of molecular biology, biological data analysis
and tools in bioinformatics.

Prerequisite: Basic background in higher secondary biology

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to
CO 1 Describe the basic concept of Bioinformatics with emphasis on structure, function and
generation of macromolecules and biological databases (K2)

CO 2 Explain the basic concept of genome analysis and gene mapping (K2).

CO 3 Make use of the similarity searching tools and align sequences to highlight the similarity
(K3)

CO 4 Demonstrate the building of phylogenetic trees for multiple alignments (K3)

CO 5 Interpret basic aspects of Hidden Markov Model based machine learning with
applications in bioinformatics (K2)

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 3 3
3
CO2 3 3
3
CO3 3 3 3 3
3
CO4 3 3 3 3
3
CO5 3 3 3 3
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester Examination

Marks (%)
Test 1 (%) Test 2 (%)
Remember 10 10 10
Understand 30 30 70
Apply 10 10 20
Analyze
Evaluate
Create

Mark Distribution

Total Marks CIE Marks ESE Marks ESE Duration

150 50 100 3

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Tests (Average of SeriesTests1& 2) 25 marks
Continuous Assessment Assignment 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern:

There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contains 10 questions with 2 questions from
each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer all questions. Part B
contains 2 full questions from each module of which student should answer any one. Each question
can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carries total of 14 marks.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Describe the basic concept of Bioinformatics with emphasis on
structure, function and generation of macromolecules and biological databases.
1. Compare and contrast the DNA and RNA on the basis of structure and functions.
2. Demonstrate with the help of a flow diagram the generation of protein using the transcription
and translation process.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Explain the basic concept of genome analysis and gene mapping.
1. Compare and contrast the gene structure of prokaryotic and eukaryotic genomes.
2. Summarize about physical maps.

Course Outcome 3 (CO3): Make use of the similarity searching tools and align sequences to
highlight the similarity.
1. Apply Needleman-Wunsch Algorithm to perform sequence alignment for the following
sequences: CGTGAATTCAT (sequence #1), GACTTAC (sequence #2)
2. Illustrate any one of the dynamic programming method for sequence alignment.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Demonstrate the building of phylogenetic trees for multiple
alignments.
1. Differentiate between rooted and unrooted phylogenetic trees. How many rooted and
unrooted trees are possible for n species?
2. Identify the advantages and disadvantages of parsimony methods.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Interpret basic aspects of Hidden Markov Model based machine
learning with applications in bioinformatics.
1. Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of using HMMs.
2. Show how to construct a profile HMM .
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

SYLLABUS

Module-1 (Introduction to Bioinformatics and Biological Databases)

Introduction, Definition and Application of Bioinformatics, Central Dogma of Molecular Biology,
the Genetic Material- DNA, Nucleotides, RNA, mRNA, rRNA, tRNA, RNA Interference-MiRNA,
SiRNA, Biological Databases-Types of Databases, Biological Database Considerations, Data Mining
of Biological Databases.

Module-2 (Genome Analysis and Gene Mapping)

Definitions, Genome Analysis- Prokaryotic Genomes, Prokaryotic Genome Structure, Eukaryotic
Genomes, Structural Genes, Gene Family, Genome Mapping- Sequence Assembly Problem, Genetic
Mapping and Linkage Analysis, Physical Maps, Genome Sequencing, Application of Genetic Maps,
Sequence Assembly Tools, Human Genome Project

Module-3 (Sequence Alignment)

Pairwise Sequence Alignment, Sequence-homology, Similarity and Identity, Global and Local
Alignment, Dot Matrix Method, Dynamic Programming Method- Gap Penalties, Scoring Matrices,
Needleman–Wunsch Algorithm, Smith–Waterman Algorithm, Multiple Sequence Alignment.

Module-4 (Phylogenetics, Gene Expression and Microarray)

Introduction, Terminology, Tree Topologies, Gene Trees, Tree Visualization Tools. Phylogenetic
Analysis- The Neighbour-Joining Method, UPGMA Method, Maximum Parsimony and Maximum
Likelihood Methods (Brief on methods not in detail), Gene Expression- cDNAs and ESTs, SAGE,
Microarray – Types, Gene Array Experiment.

Module-5 (Profiles and Hidden Markov Model)

Introduction, Definitions, Regular Expressions, Hidden Markov Model (HMM)- Markov Process,
Markov Model for DNA Sequence, Components of HMM, Building HMM, HMM Scoring
Algorithms, HMM Architecture, Applications of HMM, Modelling Protein Domains Using HMMs.

Text Books
1. S C Rastogi, N Mendiratta and P Rastogi, Bioinformatics: Methods and Applications, PHI
Learning Private Limited, New Delhi, 2015.
2. Xiong, Jin. Essential bioinformatics. Cambridge University Press, 2006.
3. D E Krane and M L Raymer, Fundamental Concepts of Bioinformatics, Pearson Education,
2006.

References
1. Zvelebil, Marketa J., and Jeremy O. Baum. Understanding bioinformatics. Garland Science,
2007.
2. Andreas D.Baxevanis, B F Francis Ouellette, Bioinformatics - A Practical Guide to the
Analysis of Genes and Proteins, Third Edition, John Wiley & Sons INC. , U.K. 2006
3. Neil C Jones and Pavel A Pevzner, An Introduction to Bioinformatics Algorithms, MIT press,
2004.
4. Klipp, E., Herwig, R., Kowald, A., Wierling, C., & Lehrach, H. Systems biology in practice:
concepts, implementation and application. John Wiley & Sons. 2005.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Course Contents and Lecture schedule

No Contents No of Lecture
Hrs.
Module-1 (Introduction to Bioinformatics and Biological Databases) (6 hrs.)
1.1 Introduction, Definition and Application of Bioinformatics 1
1.2 Central Dogma of Molecular Biology, the Genetic Material- 1
DNA, Nucleotides, RNA
1.3 mRNA, rRNA, tRNA, RNA Interference-MiRNA, SiRNA 1
1.4 Biological Databases-Types of Databases 1
1.5 Biological Database Considerations 1
1.6 Data Mining of Biological Databases 1
Module-2 (Genome analysis and Gene Mapping) (7 hrs)
2.1 Definitions, Genome Analysis- Prokaryotic Genomes 1
2.2 Prokaryotic Genome Structure 1
2.3 Eukaryotic Genomes, Structural Genes, Gene Family 1
2.4 Genome Mapping- Sequence Assembly Problem, Genetic 1
Mapping and Linkage Analysis
2.5 Physical Maps, Genome Sequencing 1
2.6 Application of Genetic Maps 1
2.7 Sequence Assembly Tools, Human Genome Project 1
Module-3 (Sequence Alignment) (7 hrs)
3.1 Pairwise Sequence Alignment 1
3.2 Sequence-Homology, Similarity and Identity 1
3.3 Global and Local Alignment, Dot Matrix Method 1
3.4 Dynamic Programming Method, Gap Penalties, Scoring 1
Matrices
3.5 Needleman–Wunsch Algorithm 1
3.6 Smith–Waterman Algorithm 1
3.7 Multiple Sequence Alignment 1
Module-4 (Phylogenetics, Gene Expression and Microarray) (8 hrs)
4.1 Introduction, Terminology 1
4.2 Tree Topologies, Gene Trees 1
4.3 Tree Visualization Tools 1
4.4 Phylogenetic Analysis- The Neighbour -Joining Method 1
4.5 UPGMA Method 1
4.6 Maximum Parsimony and Maximum Likelihood Methods (Brief 1
on methods not in detail)
4.7 Gene Expression- cDNAs and ESTs, SAGE, Microarray – Types 1
4.8 Gene Array Experiment 1
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Module-5 (Profiles and Hidden Markov Model) (7 hrs)

5.1 Introduction, Definitions, Eegular Expressions 1
5.2 Hidden Markov Model (HMM)- Markov Process 1
5.3 Markov Model for DNA Sequence 1
5.4 Components of HMM, Building HMM 1
5.5 HMM Scoring Algorithms, HMM Architecture 1
5.6 Applications of HMM 1
5.7 Modelling Protein Domains Using HMMs 1
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Model Question Paper

QP CODE:
Reg No: ______________
Name: ______________ PAGES: 2

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

EIGHTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR
Program: Applied Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering/ Electronics and
Instrumentation
Course Code: AET 434
Course Name: Bioinformatics
Max. Marks :100 Duration: 3 Hrs

PART A
Answer all Questions. Each question carries 3 Marks

1. Write a short note on nucleic acid sequence database.

2. What are the functions of mRNA, tRNA and rRNA?
3. Justify the reasons for the high Prokaryotic gene density compared to Eukaryotes.
4. Draw and explain Eukaryotic gene structure.
5. Write difference between local and global alignment.
6. Write short note on Gap penalties and its usage in comparing biological sequence
7. Summarize about the DNA microarray technology?
8. Differentiate between rooted and unrooted phylogenetic tees.
9. Explain the significance of Hidden Markov Model in bioinformatics.
10. How can you construct a profile in HMM?
(10 X 3 = 30 Marks)

PART B
(Answer any one Question from each Module. Each question carries 14 Marks)

11. A) Diagram the ‘Central dogma’ of molecular biology complete with labels that indicate the
portions that correspond to transcription and translation and indicate what enzymes are
responsible for those important steps. 7 marks

B) With a neat diagram describe the structural and functional differences between DNA and
RNA. 7 marks
OR

12. Explain with the help of a neat diagram, the different steps in knowledge discovery. Also
explain the different data mining tools for mining biological databases. 14 marks

13. Explain Prokaryotic gene structure with neat diagrams. 14 marks

OR

14. A) Write notes on any 4 DNA markers used for linkage analysis and studies. 8 marks
B) What is genome mapping? Differentiate between genetic maps and physical maps.
6 marks
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

15. Using Smith Waterman method construct the partial alignment scoring table and obtain the
optimal local alignment of the following two sequences:
ACGTATCGCGTATA
GATGCTCTCGGAJAA 14 marks
OR

16. A) Using Needleman and Wunsch dynamic programming method, construct the partial
alignment score table for the following two sequences, using the following scoring
parameters: match score: +5, mismatch score: -1, gap penalty: -2. GCATGCU and
GATTACA Write down the optimal global alignment between these sequences along with
optimal score.
10 marks
B) Differentiate semi global alignment with Needleman and Wunsch algorithm. 4 marks

17. A) What is a phylogenetic tree? Explain the steps of UPGMA method for phylogenetic tree
construction with an example. 8 marks

B) What are the problems confronted in phylogenetic analysis? Discuss the ways to test
phylogenies. 6 marks
OR

18. A) What are the major phylogenetic tools? Among various methods employed for
phylogenetic tree analysis, maximum parsimony is considered better than maximum likelihood
method. Comment on the statement. 8 marks

B) How would you design a gene array experiment to study the expression of a particular
species of mRNA? How would you take care of the troubleshooting? 6 marks

19. What are the problems that are encountered in scoring the HMM? Discuss the main
algorithms used in solving the alignment problems in HMMs. 14 marks

OR

20. A) Discuss the advantages and limitations of using HMMs. Also define a profile and discuss
about the important information that a profile has. 8 marks

B) Structural protein domains with same or similar function always show significant
similarity. Is it true or false? Discuss. 6 marks
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

CREDI
SPEECH AND AUDIO CATEGORY L T P
AET 444 T
PROCESSING
PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: Nil
Prerequisite: AET302 Digital Signal processing

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO1 Explain basic concepts of speech production, speech analysis, speech coding and
parametric representation of speech and apply it in practical applications (K2)
CO2 Develop systems for various applications of speech processing (K3)
CO3 Interpret Signal processing models of sound perception and application of
perception models in audio signal processing (K2)
CO4 Implement audio compression algorithms and standards (K3)
CO5 Analyze various audio quality techniques (K3)

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 3 3
CO 2 3 3 3 3
CO 3 3 3 3 3
CO 4 3 3 3
CO 5 3 3 3 3

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember K1 10 10 20
Understand K2 30 30 60
Apply K3 10 10 20
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration
150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should
answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer
any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks. Mark patterns are as
per the syllabus with 70 % for theory and 30% for logical/numerical problems, derivation and proof.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Explain basic concepts of speech production, speech analysis, speech
coding and parametric representation of speech and apply it in practical applications

1. Describe algorithm for computing LPC coefficients using autocorrelation method

2. Define short time energy and short time zero crossing rate

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Develop systems for various applications of speech processing
1. Define mathematically the need of STFT & Spectrogram in speech signals
2. Describe the steps involved in obtaining MFCC coefficients of a speech signal

Course Outcome 3 (CO3): Interpret Signal processing models of sound perception and
application of perception models in audio signal processing

1. Describe psycho-acoustic analysis of an audio signal

2. Explain MPEG psycho-acoustic model of audio perception
3. Differentiate between simultaneous masking and temporal masking

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Implement audio compression algorithms and standards

1. Describe various audio compression methods
2. Explain mathematically the concept of MDCT and its properties

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Analyze various audio quality techniques

1. Explain subjective analysis methods to measure the audio quality
2. Describe spatial audio standards
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

SYLLABUS

Module Course contents Hours

Speech Production: Acoustic theory of speech production. Speech

Analysis: Short-Time Speech Analysis, Time domain analysis (Short
I time energy, short time zero crossing Rate, ACF). Parametric 6
representation of speech: AR Model, ARMA model. LPC Analysis
(LPC model, Auto correlation method).
Frequency domain analysis (Filter Banks, STFT, Spectrogram),
Cepstral Analysis, MFCC. Fundamentals of Speech recognition.
II 8
Speech coding, speech enhancement, Speaker Verification, Language
Identification
Signal Processing Models of Audio Perception: Basic anatomy of
hearing System. Auditory Filter Banks, Psycho-acoustic analysis:
III Critical Band Structure, Absolute Threshold of Hearing, Simultaneous 7
Masking, Temporal Masking, MPEG psycho-acoustic model.

Audio compression methods: Sampling rate and bandwidth

requirement for digital audio, Redundancy removal and perceptual
IV irrelevancy removal, Transform coding of digital audio: MPEG2-AAC 7
coding standard, MDCT and its properties, Pre-echo and pre-echo
suppression, Loss less coding methods.
Spatial Audio Perception and rendering: The physical and psycho-
acoustical basis of sound localization and space perception. Spatial
V audio standards. Audio quality analysis: Objective analysis methods- 7
PEAQ, Subjective analysis methods - MOS score, MUSHRA score

Text Books:

1. Douglas O'Shaughnessy, Speech Communications: Human & Machine, IEEE Press,

Hardcover 2/e, 1999; ISBN: 0780334493.
2. Nelson Morgan and Ben Gold, Speech and Audio Signal Processing: Processing and
Perception Speech and Music, July 1999, John Wiley & Sons, ISBN: 0471351547

References:

1. Donald G. Childers, Speech Processing and Synthesis Toolboxes, John Wiley & Sons,
September 1999; ISBN: 0471349593
2. Rabiner and Juang, Fundamentals of Speech Recognition, Prentice Hall, 1994.
3. Rabiner and Schafer, Digital Processing of Speech Signals, Prentice Hall, 1978.
4. Thomas F. Quatieri, Discrete-Time Speech Signal Processing: Principles and Practice,
Prentice Hall; ISBN: 013242942X; 1/e
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Course content and Lecture schedule

No TOPIC No of Lectures
MODULE 1
1.1 Acoustic theory of speech production 1
1.2 Time domain analysis (Short time energy, short time zero 2
crossing Rate, ACF)
1.3 Parametric representation of speech: AR Model, ARMA 2
model.
1.4 LPC Analysis 1
MODULE II
2.1 Frequency domain analysis (Filter Banks, STFT, 2
Spectrogram)
2.2 Cepstral Analysis 1
2.3 MFCC. Fundamentals of Speech recognition 1
2.4 Speech coding 1
2.5 Speech Enhancement 1
2.6 Speaker Verification, 1
2.7 Language Identification 1
MODULE III
3.1 Signal Processing Models of Audio Perception 1
3.2 Basic anatomy of hearing System. 1
3.3 Auditory Filter Banks, Psycho-acoustic analysis. 2
3.4 Critical Band Structure, Absolute Threshold of Hearing. 1
3.5 Simultaneous Masking, Temporal Masking, 1
3.6 MPEG psycho-acoustic model 1
MODULE IV
4.1 Sampling rate and bandwidth requirement for digital audio, 1
4.2 Redundancy removal and perceptual irrelevancy removal, 1
4.3 Transform coding of digital audio: 1
4.4 MPEG2-AAC coding standard 1
4.5 MDCT and its properties, 1
4.6 Pre-echo and pre-echo suppression, 1
4.7 Lossless coding methods. 1
MODULE V
5.1 Spatial Audio Perception and rendering 2
5.2 The physical and psycho-acoustical basis of sound 2
localization and space perception.
5.3 Spatial audio standards. 1
5.4 Audio quality analysis: Objective analysis methods- PEAQ 1
5.5 Subjective analysis methods - MOS score, MUSHRA score 1
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Model Question paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
VIII SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, (Model Question Paper)
Course Code: AET 444
Course Name: SPEECH AND AUDIO PROCESSING
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART A
Answer all questions, each carries 3 marks
1. Briefly explain the concept of ZCR
2 Explain a method to compute the LPC coefficients
3 Discuss the basic elements of a speech recognition system
4 What is the need of Spectrogram in speech signals
5 Differentiate between speaker identification and speaker verification
6 List various steps involved in language identification
7 Explain how MFCC coefficients are derived from speech signal
8 Discuss the concept of temporal masking
9 Discuss the significance of MOS score
10 Discuss the need for pre-echo suppression

PART B
Answer any one full question from each module carries 14 marks.
MODULE 1
11 a) Write the algorithm for computing LPC coefficients using 7
autocorrelation method.

b) Define briefly the idea behind short time energy and short time 7
zero crossing rate.
OR
12 Discuss the parametric representation of speech in detail 14
MODULE II
13 a) Define mathematically the need of STFT & Spectrogram in 7
speech signals.
b) Describe with the help of a block diagram the steps involved in 7
obtaining MFCC coefficients of a speech signal.
OR
14 a) Define fundamentals of speech recognition 7
b) Explain any one speech coding technique in details 7
MODULE III
15 a) Explain psycho-acoustic analysis of an audio signal 7
b) With the help of neat diagram explain the anatomy of hearing
system
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

OR
16 a) Differentiate between simultaneous masking and temporal 6
masking
b) Explain the MPEG psycho-acoustic model of audio perception 8
MODULE IV
17 a) Explain mathematically the concept of MDCT and its 7
properties.
b) Briefly define the audio compression methods. 7
OR
18 a) Describe pre-echo suppression in audio signals 7
b) Briefly explain lossless coding of audio signals 7
MODULE V
19 a) Explain any two subjective analysis methods to measure the 7
audio quality.
b) Explain any two spatial audio standards. 7
OR
20 a) Explain any one objective analysis method to analyze the audio 9
quality.
b) Mention the significance of MOS score and MUSHRA score 5
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

AET 454 WIRELESS SENSOR CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

NETWORKS PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble:
Wireless sensor networks (WSNs) refer to networks of spatially dispersed and dedicated sensors that
monitor and record the physical conditions of the environment and forward the collected data to a
central location. WSNs can measure environmental conditions such as temperature, sound, pollution
levels, humidity and wind. The development of these networks was motivated by military
applications such as battlefield surveillance. WSNs are used in industrial and consumer applications,
such as industrial process monitoring and control and machine health monitoring. Students will be
able to learn sensor network fundamentals, understand the different routing protocols, develop in-
depth knowledge on sensor network architecture and design issues, and understand the transport layer
and security issues in wireless sensor networks.

Prerequisite: A sound knowledge of the fundamentals and basics of data communication, computer
networks, sensors.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO1 Explain the fundamentals, concepts and terminologies of sensors and wireless sensor
networks. (K2)
CO2 Illustrate the functionalities characteristics of the building blocks of WSN and understand
software hardware requirements of WSN. (K3)
CO3 Discuss the routing protocols and different QoS issues of WSNs. (K2)
CO4 Analyze different security issues in WSN and evaluate defensive techniques. (K2, K4)
CO5 Evaluate critically, the domain specific applications of WSNs. (K2)

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
1 2 10 11 12
CO 1 2 3 2 3
CO 2 2 3 2 3
CO 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
CO 4 2 3 2 3
CO 5 3 3 2 3

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

/Tests
1 2
Remember K1 10 10 10
Understand K2 20 20 40
Apply K3 20 20 50
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part
A contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each
question. Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each
module of which student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2
sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Explain the fundamentals, concepts and terminologies
of sensors and wireless sensor networks.

Sample questions:

1.Categorize different measurement errors associated with sensors.

2. Classify the sensors according to their domain of application.

3. Discuss the network architecture and protocol stack for WSNs

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Illustrate the functionalities characteristics of the building blocks
of WSN and understand software hardware requirements of WSN.

Sample Questions:

1. Critically investigate the mobility and power consumption issues of nodes in WSNs.

2. Discuss the suitability of homogeneous and heterogeneous nodes for WSNs

3. What are the hardware and software requirements for WSNs?

4. Compare and contrast between the following operating systems for WSN- TinyOS,
and LiteOS.

5. What do you mean by localization in WSNs?

6. Comment on sensor data calibration. Discuss issues in sensor data calibration.

7. Explain steps in sensor node reprogramming.

Course Outcome 3 (CO3): Discuss the routing protocols and different QoS issues of
WSNs.

Sample questions:

1. Explain different routing and data dissemination protocols for WSNs.

2. What do you mean by QoS. Discuss different QoS issues associated with WSNs.

3. Discuss LEACH protocol. Explain how LEACH organizes the cluster such that the energy is
equally divided in all the sensor nodes in the network.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Analyze different security issues in WSN and evaluate
defensive techniques.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Sample questions:

1. Discuss the security vulnerabilities of WSNs.

2. Discuss how DoS attacks are realized in WSNs? How WSNs can be protected from DoS attacks?
Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Evaluate critically, the domain specific applications of WSNs.

Sample questions:
1. Discuss the broad application domains for WSNs.
2. Discuss the suitability of WSNs in environmental/earth sensing such as air quality monitoring
and Forest fire detection.
3. Explain Structural health monitoring using WSNs.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

SYLLABUS

Module - 1 (Introduction Sensors and Wireless Sensor Networks)

Introduction to sensors- Sensor basics, Classification of measurement errors- Sensor deviations,
Resolution. Types of sensors-Chemical sensor, Biosensor, Neuromorphic sensors, MOS sensors.
Introduction to wireless sensor networks (WSN)- Network architecture and protocol stack, MAC
access control – fundamental MAC protocols, MAC design for WSNs, MAC protocols for WSN
(Contention based, Contention free, and Hybrid protocols), IEEE 802.15.4, Zigbee.

Module -2 (Characteristics of WSNs)

Characteristics of WSNs- Power consumption constraints for nodes, mobility of nodes,
Heterogeneity and Homogeneity of nodes. Scalability, resilience. WSN platforms- Hardware,
Wireless, Software. Operating systems for WSN- TinyOS, LiteOS, Contiki, RIOT. Online
collaborative sensor data management platforms. Localization, Sensor Data Calibration and Fault
Tolerance, Macroprogramming and reprogramming. Distributed sensor Networks.

Module 3 (Routing Protocols for WSNs)

Routing and data dissemination – Fundamentals and challenges, taxonomy of routing and data
dissemination protocols, Overview of routing and data dissemination protocols – Sensor Protocol for
Information via Negotiation (SPIN), geographic adaptive fidelity, LEACH, Sensor protocols for
information via negotiation, joint mobility and routing protocol. Transport Protocols and Quality of
Service – Transport protocol design for WSNs, Transport protocols for WSNs.

Module -4 (Security in WSNs)

Security requirements in WSNs, Security vulnerabilities in WSNs – DoS attacks, physical layer
attacks, link layer, network layer, transport layer attacks, Attacks on secrecy and authentication,
Security mechanisms for WSNs – cryptography in WSNs, Key management protocols, Defense
against DoS attacks, Defense against routing attacks - TESLA, SPINS , Intrusion detection in WSNs.

Module- 5 (Application domains of WSNs)

Area/Habitat monitoring, Health care monitoring, Environmental/Earth sensing- Air quality
monitoring, Forest fire detection, Landslide detection, Water quality monitoring, Natural disaster
prevention. WSNs for Industrial monitoring- Machine health monitoring, Data logging, Water/waste
water monitoring, Structural health monitoring. Advanced Topics in WSNs- Mobile WSNs, Wireless
Adhoc networks, Virtual Sensor Networks.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Text Book

1. Jun Zheng, Abbas Jamalipour, “Wireless Sensor Networks: A Networking Perspective”, John
Wiley, 2009
2. C.Siva Ram Murthy and B.S.Manoj, “Ad Hoc Wireless Networks – Architectures and 2
Protocols”, Pearson Education, 2006.
3. Sohraby, K., Minoli, D., Znati, T. (2007). Wireless sensor networks: technology, protocols, and
applications. John Wiley and Sons. pp. 203–209. ISBN 978-0-471-74300-2.

Reference Books

1. Holger Karl, Andreas Willig, “Protocols and Architectures for Wireless Sensor Networks”,
Wiley, 2005
2. Guowang Miao; Jens Zander; Ki Won Sung; Ben Slimane (2016). Fundamentals of Mobile Data
Networks. Cambridge University Press. ISBN 978-1107143210.
3. Ullo, Silvia Liberata; Sinha, G. R. (2020-05-31). "Advances in Smart Environment Monitoring
Systems Using IoT and Sensors". Sensors (Basel, Switzerland). 20 (11): 3113.
Bibcode:2020Senso..20.3113U. doi:10.3390/s20113113. ISSN 1424-8220. PMC 7309034.
PMID 32486411.
4. Dargie, W. and Poellabauer, C. (2010). Fundamentals of wireless sensor networks: theory and
practice. John Wiley and Sons. pp. 168–183, 191–192. ISBN.
5. Tiwari, Ankit; et al. (2007). "Energy-efficient wireless sensor network design and
implementation for condition-based maintenance". ACM Transactions on Sensor Networks. 3:
1–es. CiteSeerX 10.1.1.188.8180. doi:10.1145/1210669.1210670. S2CID 7278286.
6. Silva, D.; Ghanem, M.; Guo, Y. (2012). "WikiSensing: An Online Collaborative Approach for
Sensor Data Management". Sensors. 12 (10): 13295–332. Bibcode:2012Senso..1213295S.
doi:10.3390/s121013295. PMC 3545568. PMID 23201997.
7. Mitchell, Robert; Chen, Ing-Ray (2014-04-01). "A survey of intrusion detection in wireless
network applications". Computer Communications. 42: 1–23.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Teaching Plan (35 Hours)

Module 1: Introduction Sensors and Wireless Sensor Networks (6 hours)
1.1 Introduction to sensors- Sensor basics. 1 hour
1.2 Classification of measurement errors- Sensor deviations, Resolution. 1 hour
1.3 Types of sensors-Chemical sensor, Biosensor, Neuromorphic sensors, 1 hour
MOS sensors.
1.4 Introduction to wireless sensor networks (WSN)- Network architecture 1 hour
and protocol stack.
1.5 MAC access control – fundamental MAC protocols, MAC design for 1 hour
WSNs.
1.6 MAC protocols for WSN (Contention based, Contention free, and 1 hour
Hybrid protocols), IEEE 802.15.4, Zigbee.
Module 2: Characteristics of WSNs (7 hours)
2.1 Characteristics of WSNs- Power consumption constraints for nodes, 2 hours
mobility of nodes, Heterogeneity of nodes and Homogeneity of nodes.
2.2 Scalability, resilience. WSN platforms- Hardware, Wireless, Software. 1 hour

2.3 Operating systems for WSN- TinyOS, LiteOS, Contiki, RIOT. 1 hour
2.4 Online collaborative sensor data management platforms. 1 hour

2.5 Localization, Sensor Data Calibration and Fault Tolerance. 1 hour

2.6 Macroprogramming and reprogramming. Distributed sensor Networks. 1 hour

Module 3: Routing Protocols for WSNs (8 hours)

3.1 Routing and data dissemination – Fundamentals and challenges. 1 hour
3.2 Taxonomy of routing and data dissemination protocols. 1 hour

3.4 Overview of routing and data dissemination protocols, Sensor Protocol 1 hour
for Information via Negotiation (SPIN) – geographic adaptive fidelity,
LEACH.
3.5 Sensor protocols for information via negotiation. 1 hour
3.6 Joint mobility and routing protocol. 1 hour
3.7 Transport Protocols and Quality of Service – Transport protocol design 2 hour
for WSNs.
3.9 Transport protocols for WSNs. 1 hour

Module 4: Security in WSNs (7 hours)

4.1 Security requirements in WSNs, Security vulnerabilities in WSNs. 1 hour

4.2 DoS attacks, physical layer attacks, link layer, network layer. 1 hour

4.3 Transport layer attacks, Attacks on secrecy and authentication, 1 hour

4.4 Security mechanisms for WSNs – cryptography in WSNs, Key 1 hour

management protocols.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

4.5 Defense against DoS attacks, Defense against routing attacks. 1 hour

4.6 TESLA, SPINS , Intrusion detection in WSNs. 2 hours

Module 5 : Application domains of WSNs (7 hours)

5.1 Area/Habitat monitoring, Health care monitoring. 1 hour
5.2 Environmental/Earth sensing- Air quality monitoring, Forest fire 1 hour
detection, Landslide detection.
5.3 Water quality monitoring, Natural disaster prevention. 1 hour
5.4 WSNs for Industrial monitoring- Machine health monitoring, Data 1 hour
logging.
5.5 Water/waste water monitoring, Structural health monitoring. 1 hour
5.6 Advanced Topics in WSNs- Mobile WSNs. 1 hour
5.7 Wireless Adhoc networks, Virtual Sensor Networks. 1 hour

Assignments:
Assignment 1: Opnet/NetSim/NS based simulation of a wireless sensor network.
Assignment 2: Case Study: WSN for Natural disaster prevention.
Assignment 3: Case Study: WSNs for Industrial monitoring
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Model Question paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
EIGHTTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, (Model Question Paper)
Program: Applied Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering/ Electronics &
Instrumentation Engineering
Course Code: AET454
Course Name: WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART A
Answer ALL Questions. Each Carries 3 mark.

1 Explain the principle of operation of chemical sensors. Discuss some CO1 K3

applications
2 Compare and contrast between IEEE 802.15.4 and Zigbee protocols for CO1 K2
wireless communication.
3 CO2 K2
Discuss the issues in power consumption constraints for sensor nodes.

4 CO2 K2
Briefly explain the requirements for operating systems suitable for WSN.

5 List the challenges in routing and data dissemination in WSNs. CO3 K3

6 Explain why Sensor Protocol for Information via Negotiation (SPIN) is called CO3 K3
a data centric dissemination protocol?
7 Explain how DoS attacks are realized in WSNs?
8 Comment on the role of cryptography in WSNs. CO4 K3
9 Discuss the use of WSNs in water quality monitoring and Natural disaster CO5 K2
prevention.

10 Briefly explain mobile WSNs. CO5 K2

PART – B
Answer one question from each module; each question carries 14 marks.
Module – I

11. a) Categorize sensors used in WSNs. Explain different measurement errors 8 CO1 K3
associated with sensors.
11. b) Compare and contrast between the functionalities of Biosensors and 6 CO2 K3
Neuromorphic sensors.
OR
12.a) Discuss MAC access control protocols used for WSNs. Also comment on 8 CO1 K3
issues considered in the MAC design for WSNs.

12. b) Explain features of contention based, contention free, and hybrid MAC 6 CO2 K3
protocols for WSNs.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Module – II

13 a) Discuss scalability issues of WSNs. Also comment on the suitability of 8 CO2 K2

homogeneous and heterogeneous nodes for WSNs.

13 b) 6 CO2 K2
Compare and contrast between the following operating systems for WSN-
TinyOS, and LiteOS.
OR

14 a) 9 CO2 K2
What do you mean by localization in WSNs ? Also comment on sensor
data calibration. Discuss issues in sensor data calibration.
14 b) What do ou mean by reprogramming of sensor nodes? Explain steps in 5 CO2 K2
sensor node reprogramming.

Module – III

15 a) Discuss LEACH protocol. Explain how LEACH organizes the cluster such 9 CO3 K3
that the energy is equally divided in all the sensor nodes in the network.
15 b) 5 CO3 K3
What do you mean by QoS. Discuss different QoS issues associated with
WSNs.

OR

16 a) Explain how the Sensor Protocol for Information via Negotiation (SPIN) 6 CO3 K2
efficiently disseminates data among other nodes in the network?
16 b) 4 CO3 K2
Explain different routing and data dissemination protocols for WSNs.

16 c) Discuss the issues in transport protocol design for WSNs. 4 CO3 K3

Module – IV

17 a) Explain steps in Intrusion detection in WSNs. Also discuss the 9 CO3 K2

vulnerability of WSN in different layers of its layered architecture.
17 b) Comment on attacks on secrecy and authentication in WSNs. Also explain 5 CO4 K3
defensive techniques.

OR

18 a) Discuss different security mechanisms for WSNs. Also explain use of 9 CO3 K2
cryptography in WSNs and explain different key management protocols.

18 b) Comment on routing attacks in WSNs. Also discuss defense against 5 CO3 K2

routing attacks.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Module – V

19 a) Discuss the suitability of WSNs in environmental/earth sensing such as air 8 CO4 K3

quality monitoring and Forest fire detection.

19 b) Illustrate the use of WSNs in industrial monitoring such as machine health 6 CO4 K3
monitoring.

OR

20 a) Illustrate network intrusion with example. Explain steps involved in 6 CO4 K3

investigating network intrusions.
20 b) With an illustrative example explain how WSNs are used in health care 4 CO4 K3
monitoring.
20 c) Briefly explain the principles of wireless adhoc networks 4 CO2 K2
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

AET464 Nano Electronics CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: This course aims at understanding the concepts of scaling of electronic devices to nano
dimensions and novel electronic devices.

Prerequisite: ECT201 Solid State Devices

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO1 Explain the challenges of scaling transistors to nano dimensions.

K2
CO2 Explain the methods to overcome the scaling challenges are nano scale.
K2
CO3 Apply Schrodingers equation and its solution in various devices.
K3
CO4 Describe the features of hetero junctions and devices based on heterojunctions.
K2
CO5 Analyse characteristics of different quantum devices.
K3

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO1 3 3
CO2 3 3
CO3 3 3
CO4 3 3
CO5 3 3

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember K1 10 10 10
Understand K2 25 25 60
Apply K3 15 15 30
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE

Marks Duration
150 50 100 3 hours
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should
answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer
any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Explain the challenges of scaling transistors to nano dimensions.
(K2)
1. Explain the principle of MOSFET operation and its characteristics.
2. Describe the challenges of scaling of transistor dimensions below 100nm.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Explain the methods to overcome the scaling challenges are nano
scale. (K2)
1. Explain the advantages of Silicon on insulator devices over planar MOSFETs.
2. Explain how multi gate/strained devices are used to improve the short channel effects in nano
devices.

Course Outcome 3 (CO3): Apply Schrodingers equation and its solution in various devices.
(K3)
1. With the help of solutions of Schrodinger wave equation explain tunneling of electrons through a
potential well.
2. What is spintronics and spin valve? Explain the operation of a spin transistor.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Describe the features of hetero junctions and devices based on
heterojunctions. (K2)
1. What are the advantages of heterojunction over homojunction.?
2. Explain the principle of MODFET with the help of band diagrams.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Analyse characteristics of different quantum devices. (K3)

1. By solving Schrodingers wave equation show how sub bands are formed in a quantum wire.
2. What is coulomb blockade?
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

SYLLABUS
Module 1: Introduction to Nano electronics (8 Hrs.)
Review of MOSFETs—Band diagram, operation, Current equation, threshold voltage, short
channel effects, DIBL.
Scaling of MOSFETs. Constant voltage, constant electric field and generalized scaling.
Challenges going to sub-100 nm MOSFETs: Oxide layer thickness, tunneling, power density, non-
uniform dopant concentration, threshold voltage scaling, lithography, hot electron effects,
subthreshold current, velocity saturation, interconnect issues.

Module 2: Novel Nano Electronic Devices (7 Hrs.)

High-K gate dielectrics, Effective oxide thickness, Effects of high-K gate dielectrics on MOSFET
performance.
Novel MOS-based devices: Silicon-on nothing, Silicon-on-insulator devices, FD SOI, PD SOI,
Multiple gate MOSFETs, Double gate MOSFETs, FinFETs, nanowires, strained Si devices.

Module 3: Applications of Quantum mechanics (8 Hrs.)

Tunneling and applications of quantum mechanics-Schrodinger Equation-solution of Schrodinger
equation: Free space, Potential well, tunneling through a potential barrier. Potential energy profiles
for material interfaces, Applications of tunneling.
Graphene and Carbon nanotubes--Carbon nanotube based devices: CNTFET, characteristics, Spin-
based devices – spin valve, spin FET, characteristics

Module 4 : Hetero junction devices (6 Hrs.)

Hetero Junction: Hetero junctions, advantages, Types: Type I, II and III Hetero junction,
Hetero junction of elemental and compound semiconductors-Si-Ge hetero structure, Hetero
structures of III-V and II-VI compounds
Hetero junction based devices-Hetero junction transistor, Resonant tunneling devices,
MODFET/HEMT

Module 5: Quantum Devices (7 Hrs.)

Quantum structures: Quantum wells, quantum wires and quantum dots, Solution of Schrodinger
equation, sub bands, density of states.
Single electron devices –Coulomb blockade in a nano capacitor, tunnel junctions, Double tunnel
junction--Coulomb staircase, Single electron transistor.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Text Books

1. George W.Hanson, Fundamentals of nano electronics, Pearson Education.

2. Yuan Taur, Tak H Ning, Fundamentals of Modern VLSI Devices, Cambridge University Press,
Second edition 2009
3. J M Martinez Duart, R J Martin Palma, F Agullo Rueda, Nanotechnology for microelectronics
and naoelectronics, Elsevier, First Edition, 2006

Reference Books

1. Mircea Dragoman and Daniela Dragoman, Nanoelectronics – Principles & devices,

Artech House Publishers, 2005.
2. Karl Goser, Nanoelectronics and Nanosystems: From Transistors to Molecular and
Quantum
Devices, Springer 2005.
3. Mark Lundstrom and Jing Guo, Nanoscale Transistors: Device Physics, Modeling and
Simulation, Springer, 2005.
4. J P Colinge FinFETs and Other Multi Gate Transistors, Springer 2009.
5. B L Sharma, R K Purohit, Semiconductor Heterojunctions, Pergamon Press, 1974.
6. H R Huff, D C Gilmer, High Dielectric Constant materials VLSI MOSFET
Applications, Springer, 2004
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of
Lectures
1 Introduction to Nano electronics
1.1 Review of MOSFETs Band diagram, operation, Current equation, 2
1.2 threshold voltage, short channel effects, DIBL. 1
1.3 Scaling of MOSFETs 2
1.4 Challenges going to sub-100 nm MOSFETs 1
Oxide layer thickness, tunneling, power density,
1.5 non-uniform dopant concentration, threshold voltage scaling, lithography, 1
hot electron effects,
1.6 subthreshold 1
current, velocity saturation, interconnect issues.
2 Novel Nano Electronic Devices
2.1 High-K gate dielectrics 2
2.2 Novel MOS-based devices 2
2.3 Multiple gate MOSFETs Multiple gate MOSFETs, 1
2.4 Double gate MOSFETs, FinFETs, 1
2.5 nanowires, strained Si devices. 1
3 Applications of Quantum mechanics
3.1 Tunneling and applications of quantum mechanics Schrodinger Equation- 2
solution of Schrodinger equation: Free space,
3.2 Potential well, tunneling through a potential barrier. Potential energy 2
profiles for material interfaces,
3.3 Applications of tunneling. 1
3.4 Graphene 2
3.5 Carbon nanotubes 1
4 Hetero junction devices
4.1 Hetero junction 2
4.2 Hetero junction of elemental and compound semiconductors 2
4.3 Hetero junction-based devices 2
5 Quantum Devices
5.1 Quantum structures: Quantum wells 1
5.2 quantum wires and quantum dots 1
5.3 Solution of Schrodinger equation, sub bands, density of states 2
5.4 Single electron devices 3
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Assignments: Two assignments can be given in the following areas. (a) Drawing of energy band
diagrams of various hetero structures (Band gap, Electron affinity, Work function of materials can
be given as input parameters) (b) Solution of Schrodinger equation in finite and infinite potential
well, potential barrier, triangular well, parabolic well, Quantum well, Quantum wire, Quantum dot.
(c) Derivation of density of states in Quantum well, Quantum wire, Quantum dot
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Model Question paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
EIGHTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, (MODEL QUESTION
PAPER)
Course Code: AET 464
Course Name: NANO ELECTRONICS
Programme: Applied Electronics & Instrumentation/ Electronics & Instrumentation
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours
PART A
Answer ALL Questions. Each Question Carries 3 marks.
1. Write the threshold voltage equation of a nmos MOSFET and explain the terms.
2. What is scaling of MOSFETs?
3. For an EOT of 1nm, what is the thickness of the High-K dielectric required if the dielectric
constant of High-K is 25 and that of oxide is 4.
4. What is the effect of strain on nmos and pmos devices?
5. Write Schrodinger equation and explain the individual terms.
6. Explain the potential profile formed between metal and vacuum.
7. What are the advantages of heterojunction over homojunction.?
8. Explain the band structure of SiGe heterojunction.
9. Why a quantum dot is called an artificial molecule.
10. What is coulomb blockade?

PART – B
Answer one question from each module; each question carries 14 marks.

Module – I
11. (a) Explain the following challenges of scaling of transistors (i) velocity saturation (ii)
power density (iii) Hot electron effects. 7
(b) What is constant voltage scaling and constant field scaling? Explain their differences
7
OR
12. (a) Write notes on oxide thickness scaling and threshold voltage scaling 7

(b) Derive the current equation of a nmos MOSFET. 7

Module – II
13. (a) Explain the need of High-K dielectrics and their impacts on MOSFET performance.
7
(b) What are multigate devices? Explain different types. 7
OR

14. (a) Compare between PDSOI and FDSOI MOSFET devices 7

(b) What is FinFET? Explain how introduction of multiple gates improve the performance
of MOSFET devices. 7
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Module – III
15. (a) With the help of solutions of Schrodinger wave equation explain tunneling of electrons
through a potential well. 7

(b) Write a note on carbon nanotubes and CNT MOSFETs 7

OR
16. (a) Explain the wave propagation through a potential barrier of height Vo, when electron
energy E<Vo using the solutions of Schrodinger wave equation. 7

(b) What is spintronics and spin valve? Explain the operation of a spin transistor 7

Module – IV
17. (a) What are the different types heterojunctions? Explain with the help of band diagrams.
7

(b) Explain the principle of MODFET with the help of band diagrams. 7

OR
18. (a) What is a heterojunction transistor. Explain its advantages over homo junction transistor
7

(b) Explain the characteristics of RTD with the help of band diagrams. 7

Module V
19. (a) By solving Schrodingers wave equation show how sub bands are formed in a quantum
wire 7
(b) What are the conditions for coulomb blockade? 7

OR
20. (a) By solving Schrodingers wave equation show how discrete energy levels are formed in a
quantum dot. 7

(b) Explain the formation of coulomb staircase in a double tunnel junction. 7

 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

INTEGRATED OPTICS & CATEGORY L T P CREDITS

AET474 PEC 2 1 0 3
PHOTONIC SYSTEMS

Preamble: This course aims to understand basic goals, principles and techniques of integrated
optical devices and photonic systems.

Prerequisite: AET362 Optoelectronic Devices

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Discuss optical wave guide structures

CO 2 Explain optical wave guide fabrication techniques and polymer Waveguide Devices

CO 3 Explain Integrated lasers, Optical Amplifiers and Modulators.

Analyze different types of photo detectors and Micro-Optical-Electro-Mechanical
CO4 Devices
CO5 Explain applications of Optical Integrated circuits and Nano photonics

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
1 2 10 11 12
CO 1 3 3 3
CO 2 3 3 3
CO 3 3 3 2 3
CO 4 3 3 3 2 3
CO 5 3 3 3 2 3

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember K1 10 10 10
Understand K2 30 30 60
Apply K3 10 10 30
Analyze K4
Evaluate K5
Create K6

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part
A contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each
question. Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each
module of which student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2
sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): To discuss optical wave guide structures.

1. List the important types of waveguide structures used in integrated optics
2. Explain the existence of different modes in a planar waveguide.
3. If two dual-channel waveguide directional couplers of identical channel geometry and
spacing are formed in the same substrate material, except that coupler A has an index
of refraction n A in the channels and coupler B has an index of refraction nB in the
channels, which coupler has the larger coupling coefficient k if nA > nB?

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): To explain optical wave guide fabrication techniques,

Polymer Waveguide Devices.
1. Explain different steps involved in thin film deposition of waveguide
fabrication.
2. Discuss the reasons for the Losses in Optical Waveguides
3. Explain the process for polyimide polymer channel waveguide fabrication.

Course Outcome 3 (CO3): Explain Integrated lasers, Optical Amplifiers and

Modulators.

1. Explain the characteristics of a semiconductor laser

2. Explain the working principle of an Integrated Optical Amplifier
3. Discuss the principle of operation of different electro-optic modulators

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Analyze different types of integrated photo detectors

and Micro-Optical-Electro-Mechanical Devices.

1. Explain the construction and operation of integrated PIN diode and APD.
2. Discuss the term responsivity with respect to a photo detector.
3. Analyze the Mechanical Properties of Silicon and application in thin
membrane devices

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Explain applications of Optical Integrated circuits

and Nano photonics

1. Explain the application OICs in sensors and other measuring instruments.

2. Discuss Opto-Electronic Integrated Transmitter Receiver system.
3. List out principle of line defect waveguide devices in Nano photonics.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

SYLLABUS
Module 1:
Review of Electromagnetics- Maxwell’s equations - Wave equation

Theory of optical waveguides - Planar waveguides, channel waveguides, graded index waveguides.
Light Propagation in Waveguides: The Beam Propagation Method, Advantages of Integrated Optics
-substrate materials for optical Integrated Circuits

Module 2:
Waveguide Fabrication Techniques, Epitaxially Grown Waveguides- Electro-Optic Waveguides,
Types of Polymers, Polymer Waveguide Devices, Optical Fiber Waveguide Devices, Losses in
Optical Waveguides, Fiber to Waveguide Couplers, Optical Fiber Couplers and Splitters.

Module 3:
Integrated Semiconductor Lasers and Modulators: Integrated Semiconductor Lasers, integrated
semiconductor optical amplifier, Monolithically Integrated Direct Modulators, The Electro-Optic Effect,
Mach-Zehnder Modulators, Acousto-Optic Modulators

Module 4 :
Integrated Optical Detectors – Depletion Layer Photodiodes, PIN, APD, Schottky barrier
photodiode, Metal-Semiconductor-Metal Photodiodes. Factors Limiting Performance of Integrated
Detector
Micro-Optical-Electro-Mechanical Devices: Thin Membrane Devices, Cantilever Beam Devices,
Mechanical Properties of Silicon.

Module 5:
OIC and Nano Photonics: Applications of Optical Integrated Circuits (Temperature Sensors, High
Voltage Sensors, Wavelength Meters and Spectrum Analysers etc.) Opto-Electronic Integrated
Transmitter Receiver, Recent Trends in Optical Telecommunications
Nano-photonics: Photonic Crystals, Fabrication of Nanostructures, Nanophotonic Devices.

Text Books
1. Robert Hunsperger, Integrated optics :Theory and technology 6/e Springer, 2009.
2. Lifante, Integrated Photonics: Fundamentals, John Wiley 2003
Reference Books
1. H. Nishihara, M. Haruna, and T. Suhara, Optical Integrated Circuits, McGraw-Hill
Professional, 1989.
2. Ff KeicoIizuka, Elements of photonics, John Wiley, 2002
3. Pappannareddy, Introduction to light wave systems, Artech House,1995

RELATED LINKS
Website of IEEE photonics society: www.ieee.org/photonics.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No. of
No Topic
Lectures
1 Review of Electromagnetics and Theory of optical waveguides
1.1 Maxwell’s equations 1
1.2 Wave equation 1
1.3 Planar waveguides, channel waveguides, graded index waveguide 2
1.4 Light Propagation in Waveguides: The Beam Propagation Method 1
1.5 Integrated Optics - Advantages 1
1.6 Substrate materials for optical Integrated Circuits 1

2 Waveguide Fabrication Techniques

2.1 Epitaxially Grown Waveguides- Electro-Optic Waveguides 2
2.2 Types of Polymers, Polymer Waveguide Devices 2
2.3 Optical Fiber Waveguide Devices 1
2.4 Losses in Optical Waveguides 1
2.5 Fiber to Waveguide Couplers 1
2.6 Optical Fiber Couplers and Splitters 1

3 Integrated Semiconductor Lasers and Modulators

3.1 Integrated Semiconductor Lasers 2
3.2 Integrated semiconductor optical amplifier 1
3.3 Monolithically Integrated Direct Modulators 1
3.4 The Electro-Optic Effect 1
3.5 Mach-Zehnder Modulators 1
3.6 Acousto-Optic Modulators 1

4 Integrated Optical Detectors, Micro-Optical-Electro-Mechanical Devices

4.1 Depletion Layer and waveguide Photodiodes. 2
4.2 Schottky barrier photodiode, Metal-Semiconductor-Metal Photodiodes 1
4.3 Factors Limiting Performance of Integrated Detectors 1
4.4 Thin Membrane Devices, Cantilever Beam Devices 1
4.5 Mechanical Properties of Silicon. 1

5 Optoelectronic ICs and Nano Photonics

5.1 Optoelectronic ICs 1
5.2 Applications of Optical Integrated Circuits (Temperature Sensors, 2
High Voltage Sensors, Wavelength Meters and Spectrum Analysers
etc.)
5.3 Opto-Electronic Integrated Transmitter Receiver 1
5.4 Recent Trends in Optical Telecommunications 1
5.5 Photonic Crystals, Fabrication of Nanostructures, 1
5.6 Nano photonic Devices 1

Assignment: At least one assignment should be simulation of wave propagation through integrated
optical components or devices on MATLAB or any optical simulation software.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Model Question paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

EIGHTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, (Model Question Paper)
Program: Applied Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering / Electronics &
Instrumentation Engineering
Course Code: AET474
Course Name: INTEGRATED OPTICS & PHOTONIC SYSTEMS
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours
PART A
Answer ALL Questions. Each Carries 3 mark.

1. What are the different substrate material used for fabrication of K3

monolithic optical ICs.
2 Briefly explain Beam Propagation Method. K2

3 Outline the epitaxial growing process of GaAlAs Waveguides. K2

4 List out any three polymers that are used in optical waveguides. K2
5 In order to produce a semiconductor laser, what two conditions K3
basic to the gain mechanism must be satisfied?
6 Explain the Electro-Optic effect experienced in certain materials. K2
7 Explain the term responsivity of a photo detector. K3
8 What are the three major categories of MOEM devices? K3
9 List out some features of Optical ICs. K2
10 How line defect can make use in construction of nanophotonic K2
waveguides?

PART – B
Answer one question from each module; each question carries 14 marks.
Module – I

11. Write down Maxwell’s equations for light propagating in free space 7 CO1 K3
a)
and explain each term.

11. Describe the structure of a three-layer waveguide and explain the 7 CO1 K3
b) modes in a planar wave guide.
OR
12.a) Describe the Absorption in Quantum wells and the Quantum 5 CO1 K3
Confined Stark effect.

12.b) Consider a PN junction Semiconductor sample. At equilibrium the 9 CO2 K3

acceptor concentration at P type region is NA=1016cm-3 and that of in
N region the donor concentration N D=5x1015cm-3. At a particular
temperature the hole concentration in P region is determined to be
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

1.1x10 16cm-3. Find the intrinsic concentration ni for the

semiconductor at this temperature. Find the equilibrium electron
concentration n in the N region at this temperature.

Module – II
13.a) Explain different steps involved in thin film deposition of waveguide 8 CO2 K2
fabrication.
13.b) Explain the reason for different types of losses in optical waveguides. 6 CO2 K3
OR
14.a) Describe the important characteristics of LiNbO3. 7 CO2 K2
b) Explain the Processing of Polystyrene for waveguide fabrication. 7 CO2 K2
Module – III
15.a) A semiconductor laser formed in a direct bandgap material is found 8 CO3 K2
to have an emission wavelength of 1.2 μm. The external quantum
efficiency is 15%. What is the approximate bandgap energy of the
material? If the output power is 20 mW, give an approximate
estimate of the input current.
15.b) Explain the structure of InGaAsP Integrated optical Amplifier. 6 CO3 K3

OR
16.a) Explain the operation of Raman-Nath-Type Modulator. 6 CO3 K2
16.b) With suitable diagrams explain the structure of a Mach-Zhender 8 CO3 K2
modulator. Also describe how an applied electric field affects the
optical signal.
Module – IV
17.a) Draw the layer diagram and explain the operation of a wave guide 6 CO4 K2
photo diode.

b) Explain the principle of Schottky-barrier photodiode and discuss the 8 CO4 K3

construction of MSM photodiode
OR
18.a) With a diagram explain a cantilever beam MOEM optical switch 9 CO5 K2
b) Explain the construction of thin membrane-based pressure sensor 5 CO5 K2
Module – V
19.a) Explain the advantages of optical integrated circuits. 4 CO5 K3
b) Describe the working of Optical Integrated Temperature Sensors 10 CO5 K3
and High Voltage Sensor
OR
20.a) With necessary figures explain integrated optical transmitter and 8 CO5 K2
receiver.
20.b) Write short notes on Nanophotonic waveguides and couplers 6 CO5 K2
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

AET416 INDUSTRIAL DRIVES AND CONTROL CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble:
To familiarize the concept of electrical machines and drives in industries for driving the
equipment.

Prerequisite:
Basics of Electrical and Electronics and their control circuitry.

Course Outcomes:
After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Explain the fundamental operations of transformer and alternator.

CO 2 Discuss single phase and three phase induction motor.
CO 3 Explain the basics of power electronics and chopper circuits.
CO 4 Explain the concepts of AC drives and induction motor drives.
CO 5 Discuss about the special electrical machines.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 3 3
1
CO 3 3
2
CO 3 3
3
CO 3 3
4
CO 3 3
5

Assessment Pattern
Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination
Tests
1 2
Remember 15 15
Understand 50 35 85
Apply
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution
Total CIE ESE ESE Duration
Marks
150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

End Semester Examination Pattern:

There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contains 10 questions with 2 questions from
each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer all questions. Part B
contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer any one. Each question
can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Explain the working principle of transformer.
2. Write the emf equation of transformer and alternator.
3. Explain the working principle of alternator and write the concept of parallel operation of
alternators.
Course Outcome 2 (CO2):
1. Mention different types of rotor construction in three phase induction motor.

2. What are the different starting methods of single-phase induction motor?

3. What is the speed control or braking methods in three phase induction motor?

Course Outcome 3 (CO3):

1. Explain the working of MOSFET.
2. Explain the working of IGBT.

3. Highlight the importance of step-up and step-down chopper.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. What are electric drives? List the advantages of electric drives.
2. Explain the working of various VSI fed induction moor drives.

3. Explain stator voltage and frequency control of induction motor.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Explain any one mode of working of variable reluctance stepper motor.
2. Explain the working of permanent magnet stepper motor.

3. Explain the working of AC servomotor.

 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Syllabus
INDUSTRIAL DRIVES AND CONTROL
Module 1 (7 Hours)
Introduction to machines
Transformers-principle of operation-EMF equation-types-losses-KVA rating-all day efficiency-
autotransformer-current transformer-potential transformer.
Alternators-principle of operation-emf equation-regulation of emf and mmf methods-parallel
operation.

Module 2 (7 Hours)
Induction Motor
Three phase induction motor-principle of working-advantages-types of induction motor based on
construction-effect of slip-synchronous watts-speed control using braking methods-losses.
Single phase induction motor-principle of operation-starting methods.

Module 3 (7 Hours)
Power Semiconductor Devices
Power diode and power MOSFET-(construction and working only)-Thyristors and IGBT-
(construction, working and characteristics)-Chopper-basic operating principle-step up and step down
chopper-Quadrant chopper.

Module 4 (7 Hours)
AC Drives
AC electric drives-basic block diagram-advantages and applications-VSI fed induction motor drive-
speed control of induction motor-stator voltage control-frequency control-rotor resistance control.

Module 5 (7 Hours)
Special Electrical Machines
Stepper motor-basic operating principle-advantages and applications-rotor and stator construction-
types-variable reluctance and permanent magnet stepper motor-Hybrid stepper motor-AC
servomotor-DC and AC tachogenerator.

Text Books
1. B L Theraja & AK Theraja, “Electrical Technology”, S Chand, 23/e.

2. P.S Bhimbra, “Power Electronics”, Khanna Publications, 5/e.

Reference Books
1. Dubey G K, “Fundamentals Of Electric Drives”, Narosa, 2/e.

2. J.B Gupta, “Electrical Machines (AC and DC Machines)”, S K Kataria and Sons.

3. Krishnan, Electric Motor Drives: Modeling, Analysis and Control, Pearson, 2015
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures

1 Introduction to machines (7 Hours)
1.1 Transformer-principle of operation-EMF equation-losses-KVA 2 Hours
rating-All day efficiency.
1.2 Types of transformer: step up and step-down transformer, 2 Hours
distribution transformer, power transformer- autotransformer-
instrument transformer: current transformer-potential
transformer.
1.3 Alternator-principle of operation-EMF equation-regulation of 3 Hours
emf and mmf method- parallel operation.
2 Induction Motor (7 Hours)
2.1 Three phase induction motor-principle of working-advantages- 2 Hours
types of induction motor based on construction (slip ring and
squirrel cage induction motor).
2.2 Effect of slip on induction motor-basic torque equation- 3 Hours
synchronous watts-losses-speed control using braking methods
(regenerative braking-plugging-dynamic braking).
2.3 Single phase induction motor-principle of operation-starting 2 Hours
methods (capacitor, split-phase, capacitor start capacitor run,
shaded pole, permanent magnet).
3 Power semiconductor devices (7 Hours)
3.1 Power diode (construction-working)-types of power diode 2 Hours
(general purpose, Schottky, fast recovery)-Thyristors (reverse
blocking mode, forward blocking mode, forward conduction
mode-characteristics).
3.2 MOSFET- (construction and working only)-IGBT- (construction, 2 Hours
working, characteristics).
3.3 Chopper-basic operating principle-step up and step-down 3 Hours
chopper-Quadrant chopper (Type A-Type B-Type C-Type D-
Type E).
4 AC Drives (7 Hours)
4.1 AC electric drives- basic block diagram-advantages-applications. 1 Hour
4.2 VSI fed induction motor drives-using PWM inverter-Chopper- 3 Hours
controlled rectifier-dual controlled rectifier.
4.3 Speed control of induction motor-stator voltage, frequency 3 Hours
controlled, rotor resistance controlled.
5 Special Electrical Machines (7 Hours)
5.1 Stepper motor-basic operating principle-advantages and 4 Hours
applications - rotor and stator construction-AC servomotor - AC
and DC tachogenerator.
5.2 Variable reluctance steeper motor-permanent magnet stepper 3 Hours
motor - Hybrid stepper motor.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Model Question paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

EIGHTH SEMESTER B. TECH. DEGREE EXAMINATION

Course Code: AET416

Program: Applied Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering/ Electronics &
Instrumentation
Course Name: INDUSTRIAL DRIVES AND CONTROL

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART A
Answer all Questions. Each question carries 3 Marks

1. Derive the EMF equation of transformer.

2. Briefly explain parallel operation of alternators.
3. Define synchronous watts.
4. Explain the braking methods of three phase induction motor.
5. Explain the working of a power diode.
6. What are the different types of choppers?
7. List any three drive circuits for an induction motor.
8. Explain rotor resistance speed control of induction motor.
9. List the advantages and applications of stepper motor.
10. Explain the working of AC servomotor.

PART B
Answer any one full question from each module. Each question carries 14 Marks

Module 1
11. (a) Explain the mmf method of finding voltage regulation of alternator. (10)
(b) Highlight the variation of losses of a given transformer when the load is halved. (4)
12. (a) Derive the emf equation of alternator. (7)
(b) Explain the working principle of transformer. (7)

Module 2
13. (a) Explain the starting methods of single-phase induction motor? (10)
(b) Explain the losses in three phase induction motor. (4)
14. (a) Explain the working principle of single-phase induction motor. (10)
(b) Explain the effect of slip in induction motor. (4)

Module 3
15. (a) Explain the construction and working of power MOSFET. (10)
(b) Explain the principle of operation of chopper. (4)
16. (a) Describe the construction and working of IGBT. (7)
(b) What are the types of power diode? (7)

Module 4
17. (a) Explain the frequency control of induction motor. (7)
(b) Explain the block diagram of electric drive and its advantages. (7)
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

18. (a) Explain any four VSI methods of induction motor. (8)
(b) Explain the speed control methods of induction motor. (6)

Module 5
19. (a) Explain the modes of operation in permanent magnet stepper motor. (10)
(b) List the advantages of stepper motor. (4)
20. (a) Explain the working of ac and dc tachogenerator. (7)
(b) Explain the working of variable reluctance stepper motor. (7)
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

AET 426 CONTROL OF POWER CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

CONVERTERS PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: This course helps the students to learn about various types of power electronic drives and their
control
Prerequisite: AET306 Power Electronics
Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1
Explain DC motor drives and their modelling
K2
CO 2
Describe the control of DC motor in different quadrants
K2
CO 3
Explain the modelling of induction motor and their speed control
K3
CO 4
Discuss the principle of synchronous motors and its control
K3
CO 5
Explain the different PWM techniques for power converters
K2

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO 10 PO 11 PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 12
CO 1 3 2
CO 2 3 2
CO 3 3 2
CO 4 3 2
CO 5 3 2
CO 6 3 2

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember K1 10 10 10
Understand K2 30 30 60
Apply K3 10 10 30
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

ESE
Total Marks CIE ESE
Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should
answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer
any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Explain the components of a power electronic drive

2. List and explain the main classification of power converters
3. Discuss the effect of the base drive wave shape on the switching power dissipation.
Course Outcome 2 (CO2):
1. Explain the advantages of closed loop control of Dc drives
2. Explain the principle of DC motor speed control
3. What do you mean by vector control
Course Outcome 3 (CO3):
1. Explain the features of VSI driven induction motor

2. Explain the torque speed characteristics of an induction motor

3. Derive the transfer function of an induction motor

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Explain the constructional details of a synchronous motor

2. Explain why the speed of a 3 Phase synchronous motor remains constant at various
loads when fed from a constant frequency
3. List the advantages of synchronous motor drives

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Explain the principle of third harmonic injection in sinusoidal PWM
2. Explain the principle of over modulation in sinusoidal and space vector PWM
3. Compare and contrast between sinusoidal PWM and space vector PWM
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

SYLLABUS
Module 1:
Introduction to Motor Drives: Components of Power Electronic Drives, Criteria for selection of Drive
components. DC Motor Drives: Equivalent circuit of DC Motor, Block diagram and transfer function.

Module 2:
Principle of DC Motor control, two quadrant three phase converter-controlled DC Motor drives,
Four-quadrant converter circuit.
Module 3:
Induction Motor Drives: Induction Motor equivalent circuit, Block diagram and transfer function,
Speed control by varying stator frequency and voltage. Principle of vector control, Comparison of
vector control and scalar control, Voltage source inverter driven induction motor.

Module 4:
Synchronous Motor Drives: Basic principles of synchronous motor operation and its equivalent
circuit, Methods of control.
Module 5:
Application of PWM in control of DC-DC and DC-AC converters, Classification of PWM, Quasi
square wave PWM, Frequency spectrum of PWM signals, Sinusoidal PWM, Space vector PWM,
Comparison of SPWM and SVPWM, Selective harmonic elimination PWM.

Text Books
1. R. Krishnan, Electric Motor drives – Modeling, Analysis and Control, PHI, 2008.

2. Umanand L., Power Electronics Essentials and Applications, Wiley India, 2009.

3. Ned Mohan et. al, Power Electronics: Converters, Applications and Design, 2/e, John Wiley.

Reference
1. Theodore Wildi, Electrical Machines, Drives and Power Systems, 6/e, Pearson Education.

2. Shepherd W. and L N Hulley, Power Electronics & Control of Motor, CambridgeUniversity

Press.

3. 6. Bubey, Power Electronics Drives, Wiley Eastern.

 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of
Lectures
1 Module 1
1.1 Introduction to Motor Drives: 1
1.2 Components of Power Electronic Drives 1
1.3 Criteria for selection of Drive components 1
1.4 DC Motor Drives: Equivalent circuit of DC Motor 2
1.5 Block diagram and transfer function. 2
2 Module 2
2.1 Principle of DC Motor control 2
2.2 two quadrant three phase converter-controlled DC Motor drives 3
2.3 Four-quadrant converter circuit. 2
3 Module 3
3.1 Induction Motor Drives 1
3.2 Induction Motor equivalent circuit 2
3.3 Block diagram and transfer function 2
3.4 Speed control by varying stator frequency and voltage 2
3.5 Principle of vector control 1
3.6 Comparison of vector control and scalar control 1
4 Module 4
4.1 Voltage source inverter driven induction motor 2
4.2 Synchronous Motor Drives 1
4.3 Basic principles of synchronous motor operation and its equivalent 1
circuit
4.4 synchronous motor control 1
5 Module 5
5.1 Application of PWM in control of DC-DC and DC-AC converters, 1
Classification of PWM
5.2 Quasi square wave PWM 1
5.3 Frequency spectrum of PWM signals 1
5.4 Sinusoidal PWM, Space vector PWM, comparison 2
5.5 Selective harmonic elimination PWM. 2

Assignment:
At least one assignment should be simulation of power electronic circuits using any software
package.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Model Question paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
EIGHTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, (Model Question Paper)
Program: Applied Electronics and Instrumentation/ Electronics & Instrumentation
Course Code: AET426
Control of Power Converters
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours
PART A
Answer ALL Questions. Each Carries 3 mark.
Draw the equivalent circuit of a DC motor and derive expression for
1 CO1 K2
electromagnetic torque
2 List and explain the main classification of power converters CO1 K2
What are the important factors to be considered while selecting a drive
3 CO2 K1
component
Distinguish between field control and armature control methods of
4 CO2 K2
varying speed of a DC motor
Draw the equivalent circuit model of an induction motor and find the
5 CO3 K1
expression for rotor speed
Compare and contrast between scalar control and vector control methods
6 CO3 K2
of induction motor
Explain why the speed of a 3-phase synchronous motor remains constant
7 CO4 K2
at various load when fed from a constant frequency
With schematic explain the principle of sinusoidal pulse width
8 CO5 K2
modulation
9 Explain the principle of quasi square wave PWM CO5 K1
10 Compare sinusoidal PWM and space vector PWM CO5 K2

PART – B
Answer one question from each module; each question carries 14 marks.

Module – I
CO
11(a) With a schematic diagram explain an adjustable speed drive? 9 K3
1
CO
11(b) Explain the coupling mechanisms used in motor drives 5 K3
1
OR
CO
12(a) Explain a servo drive with neat schematic diagram 9 K3
1
CO
12(b) Explain how tripping can be prevented in drives under sudden changes 5 K2
1
Module – II
With circuit diagram and waveform explain the operation of a four- CO
13(a) 9 K2
quadrant converter circuit 2
CO
13(b) Explain the torque speed characteristics of DC motor drive 5 K2
2
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

OR
A separately excited DC motor has the following parameters,
Ra=.5ohm, La=.003H and Ka=.8V/rad/sec. The motor has a load of CO
14(a) J=.0167 kg-m2,B1=.01 Nm/rad/sec with a load torque of 100 Nm. Its 8 K3
2
armature is connected to a dc supply voltage of 220 V and is given
the rated field current. Find the speed of the motor
CO
14(b) Explain the open loop speed control of DC drive 8 K2
2
Module – III
Explain the principle of speed control of induction motor by varying CO
15(a) 8 K2
stator frequency 3
Explain the generation mode and braking mode operation of CO
15(b) 6 K2
Induction motor drives 3
OR
With circuit schematics and waveforms describe the operation of a CO
16(a) 8 K2
voltage source driven induction motor 3
Explain the torque speed characteristics of wound rotor induction CO
16(b) 6 K2
motor drive 3
Module – IV
With block diagram explain a vector controlled permanent magnet CO
17(a) 8 K2
synchronous motor drive 4
With waveforms explain the operation of trapezoidal waveform CO
17(b) 6 K2
synchronous motor drive 4
OR
Derive expression for power developed in a salient pole CO
synchronous motor in terms of excitation voltage, load angle. 10 K2
18(a) 4
Neglect the armature resistance
CO
18(b) Explain the operation of load commutated synchronous motor drive 4 K2
4
Module – V
CO
19(a) Explain the application of PWM in control of DC-AC converters 7 K2
5
Write short note on the following
CO
19(b) I)Unipolar Sinusoidal PWM 7 K2
5
ii)Bipolar Sinusoidal PWM
OR
20 With the help of diagrams explain the principle of space vector CO
9 K2
(a) PWM 5
CO
20(b) Explain selective harmonic elimination PWM technique 5 K3
5
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

CATEGORY L T P CREDITS
AET436 Aviation Electronics PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: This course aims to develop a strong understanding of the basic principles of
aviation electronics

Prerequisite: Nil

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course, the student will be able to

CO 1 Explain the features of an instrument system.

CO 2 Summarize the principles of air data instruments.
CO 3 Illustrate the measurements of various parameters using power plant instruments

CO4 Identify various blocks of radar.

CO5 Explain the principle of radio navigation systems.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO10 PO 11 PO 12
1 2
CO 1 3 2
CO 2 3 3 2
CO 3 3 3 2
CO 4 3 3 2
CO5 3 3 2

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember K1 10 10 20
Understand K2 30 30 60
Apply K3 10 10 20
Analyse K4
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part
A contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each
question. Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each
module of which student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2
sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Explain the features of an instrument system.

1. Differentiate between static and dynamic characteristics of an instrument.

2. Explain the structure and functioning of a measurement system.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Summarize the principles of air data instruments.

1. Explain different techniques used to measure the speed of an air craft.

2. Differentiate between vertical and horizontal velocities of an aircraft.

Course Outcome 3 (CO3): Illustrate the measurements of various parameters using power
plant instruments

1. What are the various parameters to be monitored for the safe operation of an
aircraft engine?
2. How will you measure fuel flow of an aircraft?

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Identify various blocks of radar.

1. Explain the principle of a pulse radar.

2. Explain principle of coherent MTI radar.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Explain the principle of radio navigation systems.

1. Explain the principle of Instrument Landing System.

2. Explain LORAN
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

SYLLABUS

MODULE I
MEASUREMENT
Concept of Measurement-Errors and error estimation- Functional elements of an instrument System-System
representation- Static and dynamic characteristics- calibration- Estimate of system performance-classification
of aircraft Instruments-Instrument displays panels and cockpit layout.

MODULE II
AIR DATA INSTRUMENTS
Air data instruments-airspeed, altitude, Vertical speed indicators. Static Air temperature, Angle of attack
measurement. Synchronous data transmission system. Hydraulic control, Fly by wire control.

MODULE III
POWER PLANT INSTRUMENTS
Pressure measurement, temperature measurement, fuel quantity measurement, engine power and control
instruments-measurement of RPM, manifold pressure, torque, exhaust gas temperature, fuel flow, engine
vibration monitoring. Introduction-signal conditioners-Instrumentation amplifiers-filters. Data conversion -
multiplexers-A/D-D/A conversion.

MODULE IV
RADAR PRINCIPLES
The Radar Equation, Detection and False alarm probabilities - Pulse integration, block diagram of a simple
pulse radar and description of the various blocks - transmitter, antenna, duplexer, mixer and detector, receiver
front end, displays.

MODULE V
TYPES OF RADARS AND RADIO NAVIGATION
CW and FM CW Radars-Tracking radars-MTI radars block diagram and principles of coherent MTI radars,
Synthetic Aperture radar. Different types of radio navigation- ADF, VOR/DME- Doppler -LORAN and
Omega, Satellite Navigation systems. Instrument Landing Systems.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Text Books
1. Pallet, E.H.J. 'Aircraft Instruments & Integrated systems', Longman Scientific and
Technical, McGraw-Hill, 1992.
2. Murthy, D.V.S., 'Transducers and Measurements', McGraw-Hill, 1995
3. Doeblin.E. O, 'Measurement Systems Application and Design', McGraw-Hill, New York,
1986.

Reference books

1. HarryL.Stilz, 'Aerospace Telemetry', Vol I to IV.

2 Nagaraja, N.S. “Elements of Electronic Navigation”, Tata McGraw-Hill Pub. Co., New
Delhi, 1975.
3. Slater, J.M. Donnel, C.F.O and others, “Inertial Navigation Analysis and Design” ,
McGraw-Hill Book Company, New York, 1964.
4. Sen, A.K. & Bhattacharya, A.B. “Radar System and Radar Aids to Navigation”, Khanna
Publishers, 1988.
5. M.I. Skolnik, Radar Hand book (Second Edition) McGraw Hill, 1990.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of
Lectures
1 Measurement
1.1 Concept of Measurement-Errors and error estimation- 1
1.2 Functional elements of an instrument System-System representation- 2
1.3 Static and dynamic characteristics- calibration 1
1.4 Estimate of system performance 1
1.5 classification of aircraft Instrument displays panels and cockpit layout 2

2 Air data instruments

2.1 airspeed, altitude, vertical speed indicators 2
2.2 Static Air temperature 1
2.3 Angle of attack measurement 1
2.4 Synchronous data transmission system 2
2.5 Hydraulic control, Fly by wire control 2
3 Power plant Instruments
3.1 Pressure measurement, temperature measurement, 1
3.2 fuel quantity measurement, 1
3.3 engine power and control instruments 1
3.4 measurement of RPM, manifold pressure, torque, exhaust gas 2
temperature, fuel flow, engine vibration monitoring
3.5 signal conditioners-Instrumentation amplifiers-filters 1
3.6 Data conversion - multiplexers-A/D-D/A conversion 1
4 Radar Principles
4.1 The Radar Equation 1
4.2 Detection and False alarm probabilities, Pulse integration 1
The block diagram of a simple pulse radar and description of the various
4.3 1
blocks
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

4.4 transmitter, antenna, duplexer 2

4.5 mixer and detector, receiver front end, displays 2
5 Types of radars and radio navigation
5.1 CW and FM CW Radars 2
Tracking radars-MTI radars block diagram and principles of coherent
5.2 1
MTI radars
5.3 Synthetic Aperture radar 1
5.4 Different types of radio navigation- ADF, VOR/DME 1
5.5 Doppler -LORAN and Omega 1
5.6 Satellite Navigation systems. Instrument Landing Systems 1
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

EIGHTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
Program: Applied Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering/ Electronics &
Instrumentation Engineering
Course Code: AET436
Course Name: AVIATION ELECTRONICS
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART A
(Answer all questions; each question carries 3 marks) Marks

1 Differentiate between static and dynamic characteristics of an instrument. 3

2 What is meant by calibration errors? How can they be minimised. 3

3 Differentiate between vertical and horizontal velocities of an aircraft. 3

4 Define and explain the term ‘’angle of attack’. 3

5 What method can be used to measure the temperature of hot gases at more than 3
1000K
6 Explain two strategies to measure high values of pressure. 3

7 What are the factors on which the range of a radar depends on? 3

8 What are the advantages of using higher frequencies in a radar system? Explain. 3

9 Explain the principle of LORAN. 3

10 What is Doppler effect? How is it used in radars 3

PART B
(Answer any two complete questions from each module)

Module -1

11 With a block diagram explain the structure and functioning of a measurement 14

system.
OR
12 What are the different types of display technology used in air crafts? give detailed 14
comparison
Module -2
13 What are the various techniques which can be used to measure the speed of an air 14
craft? Explain in detail
OR
14 With suitable diagrams explain the principle of fly by wire control. 14

Module -3
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

15 What are the various parameters to be monitored for the safe operation of an 14
aircraft engine? Explain in detail.
OR
16 With circuit diagrams explain the principles of A/D conversion and D/A 14
conversion.

Module -4
17 a) Derive Radar range equation. 7
b) With a block diagram explain the principle of a pulse radar. 7
OR
18 a) What is meant by radar cross section? Explain. 7
b) What are the factors which determine radar cross section? 7
Module -5
19 a) With a block diagram explain the working of a CW radar. 7
b) Explain the principle of a Synthetic Aperture radar. 7
OR
20 a) What are the principles of satellite navigation systems? 7
b) Explain the principle of ILS system. 7
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

AET446 DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM CATEGORY L T P CREDITS

PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: This course aims to analyze and design of digital control systems.

Prerequisite: AET301: CONTROL SYSTEMS

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

Understand the basic elements, their functions and Interconnections in a digital

CO 1
control system.
CO 2 Develop the pulse transfer function and steady state error analysis of digital control
systems
CO 3 Understand frequency domain analysis and analyse stability of linear digital control
systems.
CO 4 Develop state space representation of discrete time systems and find solution of state
equation.
CO 5 Understand the concept of controllability and observability and design discrete data
control systems with state variable feedback.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 1 3 2
CO 2 3 2
CO 3 2 3
CO 4 2 3 2
CO 5 3 2

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember K1 20 20
Understand K2 20 20
Apply K3 10 10 20
Analyze K4 10 10 20
Evaluate K5 10 10 20
Create

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. PartA
contains 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each
question. Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each
module of which student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2
sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Understand the basic elements, their functions and
Interconnections in a digital control system.

1. To control fluid intake, a fluid level control system consists of a tank, a level sensor, a fluid
supply, and an actuator. Obtain an analog fluid control system's block diagram. Make
changes to the block diagram to indicate how the fluid level can be managed digitally.

2. Explain how to model the sampling process mathematically. Also, with and without
aliasing, plot the amplitude spectrum of the sampler output.

3. With suitable diagrams explain how data reconstruction is done in zero order hold and first
order hold. Derive transfer functions for each

CO 2 Develop the pulse transfer function and steady state error analysis of digital control
systems

1. Determine the pulse transfer function of the closed loop system given below

2. Derive the expression for acceleration error constant and velocity error constant of a Type 1
digital system

3. Describe the mapping of the following locus from s-plane to z-plane

i. Constant damping loci
ii. Constant frequency loci
iii. Constant damping ratio loci

CO 3 Understand frequency domain analysis and analyse stability of linear digital control
systems.

1. Sketch the root locus plot for the given system

0.3935
( )=
( − 1)( − 0.6065)
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

2. Test the stability of the polynomial using Jury’s stability test

( )= + . − . − . + . + . =

3. Explain in detail about gain margin and phase margin

CO 4 Develop state space representation of discrete time systems and find solution of
state equation.

1. Obtain the state transition Matrix of the given state space representation

( + 1) = ( ) + ( )
( )= ( )+ ( )
Where
0 1 1
= ; = and C=[1 0]
−0.16 −1 1

2. Obtain the state space representation of the following transfer function in observable
canonical form and controllable canonical form.
( ) 0.368 + 0.264
=
( ) 1 − 1.368 + 0.368

1
3. Evaluate the state equation for the following state space representation with (0) =
−1
0 1 0
= ; = and C=[1 0]
−0.21 1 1

CO 5 Understand the concept of controllability and observability and design discrete data
control systems with state variable feedback.

1. Consider the system ( + 1) = ( )+ ( ), ( )= ( )+ ( ) where

−2 1 1
= ; = and = [0 1]
1 −2 1

Check whether the system is controllable or not.

2. Explain the concept of pole placement by state feedback.

3. Find out the state feedback gain matrix K for the following system by converting the
system into controllable canonical form such that the closed loop poles are located at 0.5
and 0.6
( + 1) = −1 −1 ( ) + 0 ( )
0 −2 1
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

SYLLABUS
Module 1:
Introduction:
Basic Elements of discrete data control systems, advantages of discrete data control systems,
examples. Signal conversion & processing: Digital signals & coding, data conversion &
quantization, sample and hold devices. Mathematical modelling of the sampling process, Design
of maximum sampling frequency of digital systems in terms of the sensor delay; Data
reconstruction and filtering of sampled signals: Zero order hold & first order Hold.
Module 2:
Discrete time control systems:
Pulse transfer function, Z transform analysis of closed loop and open loop systems- Modified z-
transfer function- Steady state error analysis of digital systems- Examples on static error coefficients.
Bilinear transformation- mapping from s-plane to z-plane.
Module 3:
Analysis of digital control systems:
Stability analysis of linear digital control systems - Routh Hurwitz criteria, Jury’s test. Root loci of
digital control systems – rules for construction of root locus. Frequency domain analysis - Bode plots-
Gain margin and Phase margin.
Module 4:
State Space Techniques:
State space representation of discrete time systems- Transfer function from state space model-various
canonical forms, discrete time state transition matrix- conversion of transfer function model to state
space model-characteristics equation- solution of discrete state equations.
Module 5:
Pole placement:
Controllability and Observability - Response between sampling instants using state variable
approach-Pole placement using state feedback. Dynamic output feedback- closed loop pole
placement.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Text Books
1. M. Gopal, Digital Control and State variable methods, 4 th edition- Tata McGraw Hill
2. B. C. Kuo, Digital control systems, 2 nd Edition, Oxford University Press, 2007
3. M. Sami Fadali & Antonio Visioli, Digital Control Engineering- Analysis & Design,
2nd edition, ELSIEVER.
4. Katsuhiko Ogata,Discrete-Time Control Systems,2nd Edition, Prentice Hall of
India,2005.

Reference Books
1. John Dorsey, Continuous & Discrete Control Systems, 2001, Tata McGraw Hill
2. Richard C Dorf and Robert H. Bishop, Modern Control Systems, Pearson Education, 2001.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of
Lectures
1 Introduction:
1.1 Basic Elements of discrete data control systems, advantages of discrete 1
data control systems, examples.
1.2 Signal conversion & processing: Digital signals & coding, data 2
conversion & quantization, sample and hold devices.
1.3 Mathematical modelling of the sampling process 1
1.4 Design of maximum sampling frequency of digital systems in terms of 1
the sensor delay.
1.5 Data reconstruction and filtering of sampled signals: Zero order hold & 2
first order Hold.
2 Discrete time control systems:
2.1 Pulse transfer function, Z transform analysis of closed loop and open 2
loop systems
2.2 Modified z- transfer function 1
2.3 Steady state error analysis of digital systems- Examples on static error 2
coefficients
2.4 Bilinear transformation- mapping from s-plane to z-plane. 1
3 Analysis of digital control systems:

3.1 Stability analysis of linear digital control systems - Routh Hurwitz 1

criteria
3.2 Jury’s test 1
3.3 Root loci of digital control systems – rules for construction of root 2
locus.
3.4 Frequency domain analysis - Bode plots 2

3.5 Gain margin and Phase margin 2

4 State Space Techniques:
4.1 State space representation of discrete time systems- Transfer function 2
from state space model
4.2 various canonical forms, discrete time state transition matrix 3
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

4.3 conversion of transfer function model to state space model 2

4.4 characteristics equation- solution of discrete state equations. 1
5 Pole placement:
5.1 Controllability and Observability 2
5.2 Response between sampling instants using state variable approach 1
5.3 Pole placement using state feedback 1
5.4 Dynamic output feedback- closed loop pole placement 2
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

EIGHTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION

Program: Applied Electronics and Instrumentation/ Electronics & Instrumentation

Course Code: AET446
Course Name: DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours
PART A
Answer all questions, each carries 3 marks. Marks
1 State Shannon’s sampling theorem. What is the need for sampling? (3)

2 Derive the transfer function of Zero Order Hold from its impulse response. (3)
3 What do you mean by frequency warping? Using bilinear transformation, obtain the (3)
discrete time function Hd(z) for the continuous time function given below:

4 Map the following s- plane poles onto the z- plane using conformal mapping: (3)

() = ±2 ( ) = −4 ± 5
5 Write the necessary and sufficient conditions for Jury stability test for the (3)
characteristic equation

6 Define Gain margin and Phase margin. Also write the equations for the same. (3)

7 Derive the expression for Transfer function from the state space model given by (3)
( + 1) = ( )+ ( )
( )= ( )+ ( )
8 Find the characteristic equation and also the eigen values of the system having the (3)
state equation given below:

What do you mean by controllability and observability of discrete time control

9 (3)
systems? Also write the equations for the controllability and observability matrix.

10
(3)
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Derive the equation for the state feedback control law in pole placement using state
feedback

Answer any two full questions, each carries 14 marks.

11 a) Write any 4 advantages of digital control over analogue control systems. (4)
b) With the help of a neat block diagram, explain the basic elements of a digital control
system. Mention any 1 example and explain each block. (10)
OR
12 Consider the following second order transfer function. Select a suitable range of (14)
sampling period for the system, if the system has a sensor delay of 0.02 seconds.

13 a)
Map the following s- plane poles onto the z- plane using conformal mapping:
(4)

b)
(10)

14 OR
For the non-unity feedback system shown below, derive the equations for the static (14)
position error constant Kp , static velocity error constant Kv and static acceleration
error constant Ka.

15 a) Briefly explain the concept of stability of a system in z-plane. (4)

b) After forming the Jury table, predict the stability of the digital system represented by
the characteristic equation given below. (Use Jury stability criterion) (10)
+ 0.2 + + 0.3 − 0.1 = 0
OR
16 Draw the bode plot and determine the phase margin and gain margin for the
following system with open loop transfer function G(z) (sampling period T=1sec)
(14)
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

17 Obtain the controllable canonical state space model for the transfer function given
below. Also draw the block diagram of the state model with unit delay blocks. (14)

OR
18 (14)

19 A closed loop computer control system is shown in figure. The digital controller is
(14)
described by the difference equation

The state variable model of the plant is given below:

Obtain the discrete time state space model for the above closed loop system.

OR
20

(8)

(6)
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

AET456 POWER PLANT CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

INSTRUMENTATION PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble:
The course is designed to learn about the working of different types of power plants. The major
objectives of the course are to study about boilers, various measurements techniques and various
control techniques used in power plants.
Course Outcomes:
After the completion of the course the student will be able to
CO 1 Explain the basic concepts about different types of power plants.
CO 2 Describe the working of boilers in power plants.
CO 3 Discuss the measurement and control in boiler accessories.
CO 4 Explain the measurements of electrical and non-electrical parameters in power
plants.
CO 5 Describe about turbine monitoring and controls in power plants.
Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes
PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 2 2 3
1
CO 2 3
2
CO 2 2 3
3
CO 2 3
4
CO 2 3
5
Assessment Pattern
Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember
Understand 50 50 100
Apply
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE Duration

Marks
150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks

Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

End Semester Examination Pattern:

There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contains 10 questions with 2 questions from each module,
having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from
each module of which student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions
and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):
1. Discuss the differences in power generation methods in thermal and wind power plants.
2. What are the major reliability aspects to be considered in nuclear power plants?
3. Explain about power generation method in hydroelectric power plants.
4. Discuss about control and safety instrumentation in nuclear power plants.
Course Outcome 2 (CO2):
1. Explain the importance of air to fuel ratio in power plants.

2. Discuss why feed water conditioning is required in power plants?

3. Describe the working of boilers in power plants.
4. Explain why treatment of flue gas is needed in power plants?
Course Outcome 3 (CO3):
1. Explain the need of pressure measurement in boiler.
2. Describe about feedwater control.
3. Discuss the importance of drum level measurement in boiler.

4. Explain the importance of Automatic Turbine Runs up Systems.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Describe a method for the measurement of current.
2. Discuss about the significance of interlocks in boiler operation.

3. Explain a method for the measurement for voltage.

4. Discuss about the role of Distributed Control System in power plants.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Why dust monitoring is important in power plants?

2. Describe the importance of pedestal vibration.

3. Discuss the importance of flame monitoring.
4. Explain a method for the measurement of eccentricity.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Model Question paper

Course Code: AET456
Course Name: POWER PLANT INSTRUMENTATION
Max.Marks:100 Duration: 3 Hours
PARTA
Answer all Questions. Each question carries 3 Marks
1. Discuss the differences in power generation methods in thermal and wind power plants.
2. What are the major reliability aspects to be considered in nuclear power plants?
3. Explain the importance of air to fuel ratio in power plants.
4. Discuss why feed water conditioning is required in power plants?
5. Explain the need of pressure measurement in boiler.
6. Describe about feedwater control.
7. Describe a method for the measurement of current.

8. Discuss about the significance of interlocks in boiler operation.

9. Why dust monitoring is important in power plants?

10. Describe the importance of pedestal vibration.

PART B
Answer any one full question from each module. Each question carries 14 Marks
Module 1
11. Explain about power generation method in hydroelectric power plants.
12. Discuss about control and safety instrumentation in nuclear power plants.

Module 2
13. Describe the working of boilers in power plants.
14. Explain why treatment of flue gas is needed in power plants?

Module 3
15. Discuss the importance of drum level measurement in boiler.
16. Explain the importance of Automatic Turbine Runs up Systems.

Module 4
17. Explain a method for the measurement for voltage.
18. Discuss about the role of Distributed Control System in power plants.
Module 5
19. Discuss the importance of flame monitoring.
20. Explain a method for the measurement of eccentricity.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Syllabus

Course Code: AET456

Course Name: POWER PLANT INSTRUMENTATION
Module 1 (7 Hours)

Introduction to power plants

Brief survey of methods of power generation - Hydro, Thermal, Nuclear, Solar and Wind power,
Power generation and distribution, Introduction to thermal power plant processes.

Importance of instrumentation in power generation, Nuclear power plant instrumentation, Piping and
instrumentation diagram of different types in nuclear power plant. Nuclear reactor control loops,
Control and safety instrumentation.
Module 2 (7 Hours)
Boiler systems
Boiler – types, Details of boiler processes - turbine units and its range systems, feed water systems,
steam circuits, air preheating, air to fuel ratio, burner tilting and bypass damper.

Soot blowing operation - Soot blower types, combustion process, products of combustion, fuel
systems, treatment of flue gases, steam turbine, alternator, feed water conditioning, turbine bypass
valves.

Module 3 (7 Hours)

Measurement and control in boiler accessories

Drum level measurement, Radiation detector, Steam pressure and temperature measurement.

Controls in boiler: Boiler drum level control method, feed water control, steam temperature control,
Cooling system, Automatic Turbine Runs up Systems.

Module 4 (7 Hours)
Measurements of electrical and non-electrical parameters
Measurements of Electrical measurements – Current, voltage, power, frequency and power factor.

Measurements of non-electrical parameters in power plants – fuel, air and steam – Distributed
Control System in power plants, Interlocks in boiler operation.
Module 5 (7 Hours)
Turbine monitoring & Control

Measurement in boiler and turbine: Smoke and dust monitor, flame monitoring, Smoke density
measurement – dust monitor.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Introduction to turbine supervising system, pedestal vibration, shaft vibration, eccentricity

measurement, Installation of non-contracting transducers for speed measurement.

Text Books
1. Gill A.B, “Power Plant Performance”, Butterworth, London, 1984.

2. P.C Martin, I.W Hannah, “Modern Power Station Practice”, Pergamon, 3/e.

3. Sam. G.Dukelow, “The Control of Boilers”, 2nd Edition, ISA Press, New York, 1991.

Reference Books
1. David Lindsley, “Boiler Control Systems”, McGraw Hill, New York, 1991.

2. Jervis M.J, “Power Station Instrumentation”, Butterworth Heinemann, Oxford, 1993.

3. Modern Power Station Practice, Vol.6, “Instrumentation, Controls and Testing”, Pergamon
Press, Oxford, 1971.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of
Lectures
1 Introduction to power plants (7 hours)
1.1 Brief survey of methods of power generation - Hydro, Thermal, Nuclear, 3 hrs
Solar and Wind power, Power generation and distribution, Introduction
to thermal power plant processes.
1.2 Importance of instrumentation in power generation, Nuclear power plant
instrumentation, Piping and instrumentation diagram of different types 4 hrs
in nuclear power plant. Nuclear reactor control loops, Control and safety
instrumentation.
2 Boiler systems (7 hours)
2.1 Boiler – types, Details of boiler processes - turbine units and its range 3 hrs
systems, feed water systems, steam circuits, air preheating, air to fuel
ratio, burner tilting and bypass damper.
2.2 Soot blowing operation - Soot blower types, combustion process, 4 hrs

products of combustion, fuel systems, treatment of flue gases, steam

turbine, alternator, feed water conditioning, turbine bypass valves.

3 Measurement and control in boiler accessories (7 hours)

3.1 Drum level measurement, Radiation detector, Steam pressure and 3 hrs
temperature measurement.
3.2 4 hrs
Controls in boiler: Boiler drum level control method, feed water control,
steam temperature control, Cooling system, Automatic Turbine Runs up
Systems.

4 Measurements of electrical and non-electrical parameters (7 hours)

4.1 Measurements of Electrical measurements – Current, voltage, power, frequency 3 hrs
and power factor.
4.2 Measurements of non-electrical parameters in power plants – fuel, air 4 hrs
and steam – Distributed Control System in power plants, Interlocks in
boiler operation.

5 Turbine monitoring & Control (7 hours)

5.1 3 hrs
Measurement in boiler and turbine: Smoke and dust monitor, flame
monitoring, Smoke density measurement – dust monitor.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

5.2 Introduction to turbine supervising system, pedestal vibration, shaft 4 hrs

vibration, eccentricity measurement, Installation of non-contracting
transducers for speed measurement.

Assignment:
At least two assignments should be given.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

AET466 MEMS CATEGORY L T P CREDITS

PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: This course aims to impart knowledge in the design and fabrication of
microsystems

Prerequisite: Nil

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Explain theLaws of scaling, multidisciplinary nature of MEMS and various

Engineering disciplines in MEMS.
CO 2 Describe the various actuation mechanisms employed in MEMS devices and the
geometry of typical sensors and actuators
CO 3 Discuss the various process steps in microfabrication

CO4 Explain the various micromachining techniques and packaging techniques

employed in MEMS
CO5 List and explain the multi-disciplinary applications of MEMS

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
1 2 10 11 12
CO 1 3 3 3 3 2 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 2 2
CO5 3 3 3 3 3

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember K1 10 10 10
Understand K2 30 30 60
Apply K3 10 10 30
Analyse K4
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10marks
Continuous Assessment Test(2numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part
A contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each
question. Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each
module of which student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2
sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Explain the Laws of scaling, multidisciplinary nature of

MEMS and various Engineering disciplines in MEMS.
1. Explain the scaling laws that applies to MEMS

2. Discuss the multidisciplinary nature of MEMS

3. Discuss Microfluidics, MOEMS, Bio-MEMS and RF MEMS

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Describe the various actuation mechanisms employed in
MEMS devices and the geometry of typical sensors and actuators.
1. Explain the various actuation mechanisms employed MEMS sensors and actuators
2. Discuss parallel plate sensing employed in MEMS.

3. Describe the principle various types micro sensors, like inter-digitated finger capacitors or
comb drive sensors
Course Outcome 3 (CO3): Discuss the various process steps in microfabrication.

1. Explain Czochralski crystal growth process of single crystal silicon

2. Compare low pressure CVD (LPCVD) and Plasma Enhanced CVD (PECVD)

3. Describe the various steps of photolithography

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Explain the various micromachining techniques and

packaging techniques employed in MEMS.

1. Compare bulk and surface micromachining technique.

2. Discuss MEMS packaging techniques, viz, die preparation, surface bonding,

wire bonding

3. Explain LIGA process with an example

 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): List and explain the multi-disciplinary applications

of MEMS.

1. Describe MEMS medical pressure sensors.

2. Discuss the geometry and operation Digital Mirror Devices

3. Explain MEMS microphone

SYLLABUS
Module 1:
Introduction: Overview of microelectronics manufacture and Microsystem technology. Definition
– MEMS materials. Laws of scaling. The multi-disciplinary nature of MEMS. Survey of materials
central to micro engineering. Application of MEMS in various industries.

Module 2:
Microsensors and Actuators: Working Principle of Microsystems – various micro sensing and
actuation techniques – parallel plate electrostatic sensing - micro sensors – various types –
interdigitated finger capacitors or comb drive sensors - micro accelerometers.

Module 3:
Micro Fabrication: Substrates – Single crystal silicon wafer formation – Czochralski crystal growth
process – Photolithography - Ion Implantation – Diffusion – Oxidation – Chemical Vapour
Deposition – LPCVD – PECVD – Physical Vapour Deposition – Etching process – various types –
Photo resists

Module 4:
Microsystem Manufacturing: MEMS Process – Bulk Micromachining – Surface Micromachining
-Sacrificial etching process –LIGA Process – SLIGA – Die level – device level – System level –
packaging techniques – die preparation - surface bonding – wire bonding – sealing

Module 5:
MEMS Applications: Bio-MEMS - Medical pressure sensors, Optical MEMS - Digital Mirror
Devices (DMDs), Microfluidics – InkJet Print head technology, MEMS inertial sensors –
Gyroscopes, RF MEMS – Switches, MEMS Microphones.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Text Books
1. Tai-Ran- Hsu,MEMS and Microsystems – Design and Manufacture, Tata McGraw-
Hill Publishing Company Limited, 2010
2. Chang Liu, Foundation of MEMS, Pearson Education, 2012

Reference Books
1. Mohamed Gad –el -Hak, “MEMS Handbook”, CRC Press, 2002
2. Rai- Choudhury P, “MEMS and MOEMS – Technology and Applications”, PHI Learning
Private Limited, 2009
3. M. H. Bao, “Micromechanical Transducers: Pressure sensors, accelerometers and
gyroscopes”, Elsevier Pvt. Ltd., NewYork, 1 st Edition, 2000
4. Marc Madou, “Fundamentals of Microfabrication”, CRC Press, 1 st Ed., 1997
5. Edited by D. Uttamchandani, “Handbook of MEMS for wireless and mobile applications”,
Woodhead Publishing Limited, 2013
6. Stephen D. Senturia, “Microsystem Design”, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 1st Ed. 2001
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of
Lectures
1 MEMS –Introduction
1.1 Overview of microelectronics manufacture and Microsystem 1
technology
1.2 Quasi-fundamental scaling laws applicable to MEMS 2
1.3 Multi-disciplinary nature of MEMS and Microsystem 1
1.4 Application of MEMS in various industries 1

2 Microsensors and Actuators

2.1 Overview of various micro sensing and actuation techniques 1
2.2 Parallel plate electrostatic sensing - analysis 2
2.3 Inter-digitated finger capacitors or comb drive sensors 2

2.4 Micro accelerometers - design 1

3 Microfabrication
3.1 Single crystal silicon wafer formation – Czochralski crystal growth 1
process
3.2 Photolithography 1
3.3 Ion Implantation – Diffusion – Oxidation 1
3.3 Chemical Vapour Deposition – LPCVD – PECVD – Physical Vapour 3
Deposition – Sputtering process
3.4 Etching process – various types – Photo resists 2

4 Microsystem Manufacturing
4.1 MEMS Process – Bulk Micromachining – Surface Micromachining 2
4.2 Sacrificial etching process – release of membranes 1

4.3 LIGA Process – process steps , example , SLIGA 2

4.4 MEMS packaging techniques – die preparation - surface bonding – wire 2
bonding - sealing
5 MEMS Applications
5.1 Bio-MEMS - Medical pressure sensors 2
5.2 Optical MEMS - Digital Mirror Devices (DMDs), 2
5.3 Microfluidics – InkJet Print head technology, 1
5.4 MEMS inertial sensors – Gyroscopes 2

5.5 MEMS microphones and RF MEMS switches 2

Assignment:
1. List the multidisciplinary applications of MEMS
2. Perform a study of Bio-MEMS, microfluidics, MOEMS, RFMEMS
3. Discuss various MEMS sensors and actuators
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Model Question paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
EIGHTH SEMESTER B.TECH. DEGREE EXAMINATION, (Model Question Paper)
Program: Applied Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering/ Electronics &
Instrumentation Engineering
Course Code: AET466
Course Name: MEMS
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3Hours
PART A
Answer ALL Questions. Each Carries 3 mark.

1. List the applications of MEMS devices in industry K2

2 Comment on the multi-disciplinary nature of MEMS. K2

3 Discuss the principal components of Microsystem. K2
4 Explain the various actuation mechanisms employed in MEMS devices K2
5 Write a brief note on positive and negative photoresists K2
6 Compare Low Pressure CVD and Plasma Enhanced CVD K2
7 Discuss the principle of LIGA process of fabricating MEMS devices K2
8 Explain the MEMS packaging techniques surface bonding and wire K2
bonding.
9 Explain the principle of RF MEMS switches. K2
10 Distinguish between Bio-MEMS and MOEMS. K2

PART – B
Answer one question from each module; each question carries 14 marks.
Module – I

11. a) Describe the quasi-fundamental scaling laws that applies to MEMS 7 CO1 K3
11. b) Perform a comparative study of microelectronics and microsystem 7 CO1 K2
OR
12.a) Comment on the material properties central to microengineering 7 CO1 K3
12.b) Explain the features of MEMS and list the critical factors that affect 7 CO1 K3
commercialization of MEMS devices

Module – II

13. a) Discuss the principle of parallel-plate electrostatic microsensors. Draw a 8 CO2 K3

coupled electro – mechanical model and derive an expression for the
electrostatic force at equilibrium
13. b) With sketches, explain the geometry and principle of micro grippers and 6 CO2 K2
micro valves
OR
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

14.a) Explain the sensing principle of longitudinal and transverse comb drive 8 CO2 K3
sensing. Derive an expression for the magnitude of force in transverse
comb drive
14.b) With appropriate diagrams, explain the principle of micromotors and 6 CO2 K2
micropumps

Module – III

15. a) Describe the Czochralski growth process of obtaining single crystal 7 CO3 K2
silicon
15. b) Explain the process of wet chemical etching. Draw the etching profiles of 7 CO3 K2
isotropic and anisotropic etching
OR
16.a) With appropriate figures, explain the steps of photolithography 8 CO3 K2
16.b) Describe the sputtering process of deposition employed in 6 CO3 K2
microfabrication

Module – IV

17. a) Compare bulk and surface micromachining process of fabricating MEMS 6 CO4 K2
devices
17. b) With figures, list the various stages of micromachining a MEMS 8 CO4 K3
cantilever. Discuss the sacrificial etching process
OR
18.a) With an example, describe the LIGA process of MEMS manufacturing 8 CO4 K3
18.b) Explain four important functions of microsystem package. 6 CO4 K2

Module – V

19. a) Discuss Bio-MEMS. Explain the principle of MEMS medical pressure 8 CO5 K2
sensor
19. b) Describe the geometry and operation of MEMS microphone 6 CO5 K2
OR
20. a) Comment on Optical MEMS. Explain the principle of Digital Mirror 7 CO1 K2
Devices (DMDs)
20. b) Discuss the geometry and principle of MEMS gyroscopes. 7 CO1 K2
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

CATEGORY L T P CREDITS
AET476 Robotics and Industrial Automation PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: The purpose of this course is providing the knowledge of automation

components, tools, systems and to give an overview on the classification and components of
industrial robots.

Prerequisite: NIL
Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Design and implement automated systems using pneumatics.

CO 2 Provide hydraulic solutions for designing automated systems.
Devise Assembly automated systems using feeders, orienteers and escapement
CO 3
devices
CO 4 Perform selection of gripping mechanism for robotic application.
CO 5 Perform kinematic and dynamic analyses with simulation.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
1 2 10 11 12
CO 1 3 2 3
CO 2 3 2 3
CO 3 3 3
CO 4 3 2 3
CO 5 3 2 3

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember K1 10 10 10
Understand K2 30 30 80
Apply K3 10 10 10
Analyze K4
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total
CIE ESE ESE Duration
Marks
150 50 100 3 hours
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks
End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part
A contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each
question. Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each
module of which student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2
sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Design and implement automated systems using

pneumatics.
1. Mention the applications of hydraulic in engineering field.

2. Sketch and explain the basic hydraulic system.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Provide hydraulic solutions for designing automated

systems.
1. What are the factors that influence the power input to the compressor?

Course Outcome 3 (CO3): Devise Assembly automated systems using feeders,

orienteers and escapement devices.
1. Discuss about the need for robots

2. Explain about major parts of a robot with their functions.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Perform selection of gripping mechanism for robotic

application.

1. What is repeatability of industrial robot?

2. Classify sensors for robot applications.
3. Discuss in detail about functions & need of industrial robots.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Perform kinematic and dynamic analyses with

simulation.

1. What is g-factor? How grippers are classified based on g factor.

2. Give two applications where vacuum grippers are widely used in robots.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

SYLLABUS
Module 1:
Hydraulic System Elements: Pumps, types, working, characteristics, applications: Types of
conductors, and connectors, their selection: Seals and packing, types, materials, applications.
Hydraulic Actuators: Linear and Rotary, types, working, cushioning effect, mounting,
Control Elements: Pressure control Valves, direct acting type, pilot operated, sequence,
counterbalancing, unloading, pressure reducing, construction and working: Direction control valves,
types, construction and working.
Module 2:
Pneumatics: Air compressors, types, working, selection criteria; FRL unit, construction and
working; Pneumatic cylinders and air motors, construction and working, Comparison of air,
hydraulic and electric motor.
Pneumatic System Control Elements: Flow control valves, working of variable flow control, quick
exhaust, time delay and shuttle valve
Module 3:
Robotics-Introduction-Types of robots, Overview of robot subsystems, resolution, repeatability and
accuracy, Degrees of freedom of robot’s classification with respect to geometrical configuration
(Anatomy), Controlled system & chain type: Serial manipulator & Parallel Manipulator.
Module 4:
Components of Industrial robotics-precession of movement resolution, accuracy & repeatability-
Dynamic characteristics- speed of motion, load carrying capacity & speed of response-Sensors-
Internal sensors: Position sensors, & Velocity sensors, External sensors: Proximity sensors, Tactile
Sensors, & Force or Torque sensors.
Module 5:
Grippers - Mechanical Gripper-Grasping force-Engel Berger-g-factors-mechanisms for actuation,
Magnetic gripper, vacuum cup gripper-considerations in gripper selection & design, Industrial
robots’ specifications. Selection based on the Application

Text Books
1. Espositio A., "Fluid Power with Applications", Pearson, 2002.
2. Majumdar S. R., "Oil Hydraulic Systems", Tata McGraw Hill 2000

Reference Books
1. Majumdar S. R., "Pneumatic systems-principles and Maintenance", Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2000.
2. Janaki Raman P.A., "Robotics and image processing", Tata McGraw Hill, 1995.
3. Yoram Koren, "Robotics", McGraw Hill, 1992.
4. Groover M. P., “Industrial Robotics”, Mc Graw Hill
5. John J. Craig, “Introduction to Robotics”, Pearson
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No. of
Sl. No Topic
Lectures
1 Hydraulic System Elements
1.1 Pumps, types, working, characteristics, applications 1
1.2 Types of conductors, and connectors, their selection 1
1.3 Seals and packing, types, materials, applications 1
Hydraulic Actuators
1.4 Linear and Rotary - types and working 1
1.5 Cushioning effect, mounting 1
Control Elements
Pressure control Valves, direct acting type, pilot operated, sequence,
1.6 1
construction and working.
1.7 Counterbalancing, unloading, pressure reducing, construction and working. 1
1.8 Direction control valves, types, construction and working. 1
2 Pneumatics
2.1 Air compressors, types, working, selection criteria 1
2.2 FRL unit, construction and working 1
2.3 Pneumatic cylinders and air motors, construction and working 1
2.4 Comparison of air, hydraulic and electric motor. 1
Pneumatic System Control Elements
2.5 Flow control valves, working of variable flow control 1
2.6 Quick exhaust, time delay and shuttle valve 2
3 Robotics
3.1 Robotics-Introduction-Types of robots 1
3.2 Overview of robot subsystems, resolution, repeatability and accuracy 2
Degrees of freedom of robot’s classification with respect to geometrical
2
configuration (Anatomy)
3.3 Controlled system & chain type 1
3.4 Serial manipulator & Parallel Manipulator. 1
4 Components of Industrial robotics
Components of Industrial robotics-precession of movement resolution,
4.1 2
accuracy & repeatability
4.2 Dynamic characteristics- speed of motion, load carrying capacity & speed of 2
response
4.3 Sensors-Internal sensors: Position sensors, & Velocity sensors 2
External sensors: Proximity sensors, Tactile Sensors, & Force or Torque 2
4.4
sensors.
5 Grippers
5.1 Mechanical Gripper-Grasping force-Engel Berger 1
5.2 G-factors-mechanisms for actuation 1
5.3 Magnetic gripper, vacuum cup gripper 1
5.4 Considerations in gripper selection & design 1
5.5 Industrial robots’ specifications 1
5.6 Selection based on the Application 1
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Model Question paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

EIGHTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, (Model Question Paper)
Course Code: AET476
Program: Applied Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering/Electronics and
Instrumentation Engineering
Course Name: Robotics & Industrial Automation
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours
PART A

Answer ALL Questions. Each Carries 3 mark.

1. What are the types of hydraulic actuators? CO1 K2

K2
2 Compare hydraulic and pneumatic systems CO1
K2
3 What is compression ratio? CO2
K2
4 What are the different types of air compressor? CO2
K2
5 What are the components of a robot? CO3
K2
6 What are the laws of robotics? CO3
K2
7 What do you mean by torque sensor? CO4
K2
8 What is meant by accuracy of industrial robot? CO4
K2
9 What is the principle of vacuum cup grippers? CO5
K2
10 What is meant by grippers? What are the types of grippers CO5

PART – B
Answer one question from each module; each question carries 14 marks.

Module – I

11. a) Describe the elements of hydraulic actuation system components in

9 CO1 K2
detail
11. b) explain external gear pump with neat sketch 5 CO1 K2
OR
12.a) How are the control valve classified? Write the classification of the
8 CO1 K2
pressure control valve.
12.b) Define pump and state the purpose of the pump in hydraulic system
6 CO1 K2
and classify pumps
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Module – II

13 a) What is the difference between rotary air compressor and

9 CO2 K2
reciprocating air compressor?
13 b) What are shuttle valve? 5 CO2 K2
OR
14 a) What are the components of pneumatic system? 8 CO2 K2
14 b) What is a quick exhaust valve? Mention it's application. 6 CO2 K2

Module – III

15 a) Describe the classification of robots by control system. 9 CO3 K2

15 b) What is the degree of freedom in the robotics? How can it be
5 CO3 K2
determined?
OR
16 a) Define a manipulator& also compare serial and parallel
8 CO3 K2
manipulator.
16 b) How to calculate the degree of freedom in serial manipulator. 6 CO3 K2

Module – IV

17 a) Briefly explain the working principle of any two types of position

8 CO4 K2
sensors with neat sketch.
17 b) Write short notes on the following
i). accuracy
6 CO4 K2
ii). precision
iii). repeatability
OR
18 a) Describe the working principle of proximity sensor with neat
8 CO4 K2
sketch.
18 b) Briefly explain the dynamic characteristics of robot. 6 CO4 K2

Module – V

19 a) Explain mechanical grippers & their linkage mechanism with neat

9 CO5 K2
sketches.
19 b) List out the important factors to be considered in the selection &
5 CO5 K2
design of grippers.
OR
20 a) Discuss about vacuum cup grippers along with their advantages &
9 CO5 K2
disadvantages.
20 b) Give the specification of industrial robot 5 CO5 K2
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
ECT418 MECHATRONICS
PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: This course introduces students to the rapidly emerging, multi-disciplinary, and
exciting field of Mechatronics.

Prerequisite: Nil

Course Outcome: After the successful completion of the course the student will be able to

Understand the working principles of various sensors and actuators in Mechatronics

CO1
systems and be able to choose the suitable one for the real world application
CO2 Formulate and simulate models of mechatronics systems
CO3 Explain the implementation of PLC in mechatronics applications

CO4 Explain the standard fabrication techniques and principle of operation of MEMS devices
Design and Analysis of commonly encountered mechatronics systems for real time
CO5 applications

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3
CO2 3 3
CO3 3 3 2
CO4 3 3
CO5 3 3

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester

Category 1 2 Examination
Remember 10 10 20
Understand 30 30 60
Apply 10 10 20
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total ESE
CIE ESE
Marks Duration
150 50 100 3 hours
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should
answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer
any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Understand the working principles of various sensors and actuators in
Mechatronics systems and be able to choose the suitable one for the real-world application

1. Illustrate the working of a strain gauged load cell

2. Explain the working of any one non-contact temperature measurement system
3. Explain the principle of operation and suggest two applications of Hall effect sensor in
mechatronic systems.
4. With neat sketches explain the working of a double acting hydraulic actuator.
5. Design a hydraulic circuit to operate a winch fitted with a hydraulic motor. The
motor should be run clockwise, counter clockwise and stopped. Use a manually
operated valve.
6. Explain any two situations when pneumatic actuators are preferred over
hydraulic ones.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Formulate models of mechatronics systems

1. Derive the mathematical model of a general electrical system and draw its analogy with a
mechanical system.
2. Explain the working of a mechanical device using closed loop control system
with the help of a suitable example.

Course Outcome 3 (CO3): Explain the implementation of PLC in mechatronics applications

1. Explain ‘latching’ in PLC logic with an example.

2. Illustrate the significance of Internal Relays in PLC program
3. Consider a pneumatic system with single-solenoid controlled valves and
involving two cylinders A and B, with limit switches a–, a+, b–, b+ detecting
the limits of the piston rod movements. Design a ladder programme with the
requirement being when the start switch is triggered, the sequence A+, B+, A–,
10s time delay, B– occurs and stop at that point until the start switch is triggered
again.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Course Outcome 4(CO4): Explain the standard fabrication techniques and principle of operation of
MEMS devices
1. Explain the steps involved in photolithography. State the chemicals used in each
of the stages along with the operating conditions.
2. Explain the criteria for choice of surface or bulk micromachining techniques in the design of
micro systems.
3. Explain with block diagram the steps in LIGA process. State two advantages of LIGA process
over other micro machining techniques.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Design and Analysis of commonly encountered mechatronics systems
for real time applications
1. With the help of a neat sketch explain the different mechatronics modules used
in automatic car park barrier system
2. Explain with a neat sketch the mechatronic implementation of a household weighing machine
3. With a neat sketch, explain the physical system and working of a pick and place
robot.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

SYLLABUS

MODULE I
Introduction to Mechatronics: Structure of Mechatronics system. Comparison between traditional
and mechatronics approach. Sensors - Characteristics -Temperature, flow, pressure sensors.
Displacement, position and proximity sensing by magnetic, optical, ultrasonic, inductive, capacitive
and eddy current methods. Encoders: incremental and absolute. Resolvers and synchros.
Piezoelectric sensors. Acoustic Emission sensors. vibration sensors. Force and tactile sensors. Range
finders: ultrasonic and light-based range finders

MODULE II
Actuators: Hydraulic and Pneumatic actuators - Directional control valves,
pressure control valves, process control valves. Rotary actuators.
Development of simple hydraulic and pneumatic circuits using standard
Symbols. Electrical drives: DC, AC, brushless, servo and stepper motors. Harmonic drive. Magneto
strictive actuators and piezoelectric actuators.

MODULE III
System modeling - Mathematical models and basic building blocks of general mechanical, electrical,
fluid and thermal systems. Typical elements of open and closed loop control systems. Adaptive
controllers for machine tools.
Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC) –Basic structure, input/ output processing. Programming:
Timers, Internal Relays, Counters and Shift registers. Development of simple ladder programs for
specific purposes.

MODULE IV
Micro Electro Mechanical Systems (MEMS): Fabrication: Deposition, Lithography,
Micromachining methods for MEMS -Surface and Bulk, Deep Reactive Ion Etching (DRIE) and
LIGA processes. Principle, fabrication and working of MEMS based pressure sensor, accelerometer
and gyroscope.

MODULE V
Mechatronics in Robotics- choice of Sensors and Actuators. Robotic vision system - Image
acquisition: Vidicon, charge coupled device (CCD) and charge injection device (CID) cameras.
Image processing techniques: histogram processing: sliding, stretching, equalization and
thresholding.
Case studies of Mechatronics systems: Automatic camera, bar code reader, simple weighing
machine, pick and place robot, automatic car park barrier system, automobileengine management
system.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Text Books:

1. Bolton W., Mechatronics: Electronic Control Systems in Mechanical and Electrical

Engineering, Person Education Limited, New Delhi, 2007

2. Ramachandran K. P., G. K. Vijayaraghavan, M. S. Balasundaram, Mechatronics:

IntegratedMechanical Electronic Systems, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2008.

3. Saeed B. Niku, Introduction to Robotics: Analysis, Systems, Applications, Person Education

,Inc., New Delhi, 2006.

4. Devdas Shetty, Richard A. Kolk, “Mechatronics System Design”, Thomson Learning

Publishing Company, Vikas publishing house, Second edition, 2001.

Reference Books:

1. David G. Aldatore, Michael B. Histand, Introduction to Mechatronics and

MeasurementSystems, McGraw-Hill Inc., USA, 2003.
2. Gordon M. Mair, Industrial Robotics, Prentice Hall International, UK, 1998.
3. HMT, Mechatronics, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2004.
4. Vijay K. Varadan, K. J. Vinoy, S. Gopalakrishnan, Smart Material Systems and MEMS:
Design and Development Methodologies, John Wiley & Sons Ltd., England, 2006.
5. Bishop, Robert H. The Mechatronics Handbook-2 Volume Set. CRC press, 2002.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Course Plan Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of
Lectures
Introduction to Mechatronics: Structure of Mechatronics system. 1
Comparison between traditional and mechatronics approach
Sensors - Characteristics -Temperature, flow, pressure sensors. 1
Displacement, position and proximity sensing by magnetic, 1
1 optical, ultrasonic, inductive, capacitive and eddy current methods
Encoders: incremental and absolute. Resolvers and synchros. 1
Piezoelectric sensors. Acoustic Emission sensors. vibration 1
sensors, Force and tactile sensors
Range finders: ultrasonic and light-based range finders 1

Actuators: Hydraulic and Pneumatic actuators - Directional control 1

valves
pressure control valves, process control valves, 1
Rotary actuators. 1
2 Development of simple hydraulic and pneumatic circuits using 1
standard Symbols.
Electrical drives: DC, AC, and 1
brushless, servo 1
stepper motors. Harmonic drive. 1

System modeling - Mathematical models and basic building blocks 2

of general mechanical, electrical, fluid and thermal systems.
Typical elements of open and closed loop control systems, Adaptive 1
controllers for machine tools
3 Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC) –Basic structure, input/ 1
output processing.
Programming: Timers, Internal Relays, Counters and Shift 2
registers.
Development of simple ladder programs for specific purposes 1

Micro Electro Mechanical Systems (MEMS): Fabrication: 1

Deposition, Lithography
Micromachining methods for MEMS -Surface and Bulk, 2
4
Deep Reactive Ion Etching (DRIE) and LIGA processes. 1
Principle, fabrication and working of MEMS based pressure 3
sensor, accelerometer and gyroscope

Mechatronics in Robotics- choice of Sensors and Actuators. 1

Robotic vision system - Image acquisition: Vidicon, charge coupled 2
5 device (CCD) and charge injection device (CID) cameras.
Image processing techniques: histogram processing: sliding, 2
stretching, equalization and thresholding.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Case studies of Mechatronics systems: Automatic camera, bar code 2

reader, simple weighing machine, picks and place robot,
Automatic car park barrier system, automobile engine 1
management system.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Model Question Paper

A P J ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
EIGHTH SEMESTER B TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
COURSE: ECT418 MECHATRONICS
TIME: 3 HRS MAX. MARKS: 100
PART A
Answer All Questions
1 Differentiate between absolute and incremental encoders 3
2 List six examples of temperature sensors 3
3 Explain how cushioning is achieved in pneumatic actuators with a sketch. 3
4 Mention any two differences between finite position and infinite position 3
valves
5 List any 2 controlling factors in wet etching. 3
6 Sketch and label a MEMS based pressure sensor 3
7 What is latching? Draw a simple latched circuit 3
8 Write down the describing equations of basic mechanical building blocks 3
9 Illustrate the histogram processing technique for enhancing the image contrast 3
10 Bring out any 3 differences between CCD and CID camera. 3

PART B
Answer one question from each module. Each question carries 14 marks.
Module I
11(A) Explain the working of an optical absolute encoder. How the number of 6
tracks and sectors of absolute encoder is related to the resolution of the
encoder?
11(B) Explain the structure of a mechatronics system. How is it different form the 8
traditional approach?
OR
12(A) Explain the sensor characteristics to be considered when choosing a sensor 8
for a mechatronics application
12(B) Compare the working of resolver and synchro 6

Module II

13(A) Develop a pneumatic circuit with standard symbols, to operate two 8

cylinders in sequence. Explain its working.

13(B) Explain the constructional features and working of brushless DC motor 6

OR

14(A) Illustrate the working of Harmonic Drives with neat sketches 8

14(B) Design a hydraulic circuit to operate a winch fitted with a hydraulic motor. 6
The motor should be run clockwise, counter clockwise and stopped. Use a
manually operated valve.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Module III

15(A) Draw and explain the block diagram of a feedback control system. 4

15(B) Develop a PLC ladder program for the following sequence: Start a motor 10
with push switch, and then after a delay of 90s, start a pump. When the
motor is switched off, the pump will get switched off after a delay of 5s.
Mention the logic used for each rung in the program to substantiate your
answer.
OR

16(A) Explain how a PLC can be used to handle analog inputs? 4

16(B) Explain the model a fluid flow system with basic building blocks, clearly 10
mention all assumptions
Module IV

17(A) Explain the steps involved in photolithography. State the chemicals used in 6
each of the stages along with the operating conditions
17(B) Compare and contrast various micro manufacturing techniques 8

OR

18(A) Describe the various mechanical problems associated with surface 6

micromachining
18(B) Explain the LIGA process associated with MEMS fabrication 8

Module V

19(A) With the help of a neat sketch explain the different mechatronics modules 10
used in automatic car park barrier system

19(B) List any four applications of robotic vision systems 4

OR
20(A) Explain the working of Barcode reader with reference to the coding 10
schemes. Mention the steps to process the digits in a barcode for a particular
product. Develop the steps in a program for reading the barcode.

20(B) List the steps in thresholding technique in image processing 4

 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

AET428 Automotive Electronics CATEGORY L T P CREDITS

PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: This course provides an overview of the electronic systems found in automotive
designs including critical systems, navigation, sensor interfacing, safety systems and
communication systems.

Prerequisites: Fundamentals of analog and digital circuits, Control Engineering,

Microcontrollers.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

Explain the fundamentals of automotive electronics

CO 1 (K2)
CO 2 (K2) Discuss the various communication technologies on board vehicles
Illustrate the working of various control algorithms implemented in vehicles for
CO 3 (K3) the purpose of automation
Describe the need and working of various sensors used for vehicle automation
CO4 (K2)
Apply the knowledge of electronics for safety and security in vehicles
CO5 (K3)

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
1 2 10 11 12
CO 1 3
CO 2 3 2
CO 3 3 3 2
CO 4 3 2
CO 5 3 3 2 3

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember K1 10 10 20
Understand K2 30 40 80
Apply K3 10

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks
End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain
10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students
should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student
should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Explain the fundamentals of automotive electronics

1. What are the major roles of electronics in an automobile?
2. Differentiate between Open loop and Closed loop systems.
3. Differentiate between External exhaust-gas recirculation and Exhaust-gas
turbocharging.
4. Explain the actuation process of HDEV high-pressure fuel injector.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Discuss the various communication technologies on board

vehicles.
1. Explain various Network topologies used in automotive.
2. Draw and explain a typical network topology in a new generation compact
class car.
3. With a neat diagram explain Data transfer during turn signalling
4. With neat diagrams, explain function of a Basic CAN Bus.

Course Outcome 3 (CO3): Illustrate the working of various control

algorithms implemented in vehicles for the purpose of automation

1. What are the digital modules available in the automotive control

unit?
2. Enumerate the structural features of a control software.
3. Explain crankshaft position calculation procedure.
4.What is meant by Combustion-synchronous interrupt?

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Describe the need and working of various sensors
used for vehicle automation.
1. What are the characteristics of Position sensors?
2. Explain the principle of Potentiometric fuel-level sensor.
3. What are the applications of Magneto static sensors.
4. Explain the working principle of Hall Effect sensor.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Apply the knowledge of electronics for safety and
security in vehicles.
1. Illustrate the working of ABS.
2.Explain the working principle of ACC.
3.How EBD avoid accidents? Explain its principle.
4. Explain the principle of Pedestrian Airbags in modern cars.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

SYLLABUS

AET 428: AUTOMOTIVE ELECTRONICS

SECTION 1: Automotive Electronics Fundamentals
.
Module 1: Introduction to Automotive Electronics (7Hrs)
Overview of vehicle electronic systems, Review the trends in automotive electronics as well as issues that are
driving the automotive industry, Integration of electronic components and systems in vehicles, Embedded
processors and microcontrollers, Interfaces to peripherals and to sensors.
SECTION 2: Electronic Systems
Module 2: Automotive Communications Systems (7Hrs)
Introduction to communications standards, Introduction to networks, safety critical issues and reliability,
Communication protocols for automotive application. CAN, LIN Bus and others, Telematics for automotive
applications, GPRS, GPS for use in and automotive environment. Automotive Diagnostics.

Module 3: Automotive Control and Power Systems (7Hrs)

Electronic control methods (analog and digital). Stability algorithms for control (cruise control, traction
control), Actuator limiting, wind-up, gain scheduling and others, Energy management strategies: regenerative
breaking, start-stop, torque boost, Sensing and control systems. Interfacing using power devices.

Module 4: Sensors and Interfacing (7Hrs)

Introduction to electronic instrumentation for sensors: temperature, distance, velocity, speedometer, anti-
collision and others, Interfacing electronics with Operational Amplifiers.
DA/AD converters, limitations, topologies and processing for sensors.
SECTION 3: Safety and Security Systems
Module 5: Automotive Safety Systems and DAS (7Hrs)
Introduction to safety systems, Passive system electronics: Airbag and sensors Active systems electronics:
Antilock-braking system (ABS), Electronic Stability Program (ESP), Anti-slip regulation (ASR) and others,
Driver Assistance Systems: Advanced active systems electronics: ACC, Active safety system applications:
lane detection, blind spot, crash avoidance control electronics.

Text Books

1.Robert Bosch Gmbh 2013, Bosch Automotive Electrics and Automotive Electronics: Systems and
Components, Networking and Hybrid Drive. Publication Date: July 31, 2013 ISBN-13: 978-3658017835.
6th
2. Williams B. Ribbens, 2012. Understanding Automotive Electronics. Seventh Edition, Elsevier Åström,
Wittenmark. Computer Controlled Systems. 3rd ed. Prentice Hall, 1997 Ed.

Reference Books

1. James D. Halderman. 2013. Advanced Automotive Electricity and Electronics. Prentice Hall.
2. S. Krueger, W.Gessner 2002, Advanced Microsystems for Automotive Applications. Springer
3.Tom Denton 2004, Automobile Electronic & Electronic Systems, 3rd edition Ed.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Course Content and Lecture schedule

Topic No. of
Lectures
Module 1: Introduction to Automotive Electronics (7Hrs)
1.1 Overview of vehicle electronic systems 1
1.2 Review the trends in automotive electronics as well as issues that 2
are driving the automotive industry
1.3 Integration of electronic components and systems in vehicles 1
1.4 Embedded processors and microcontrollers 1
1.5 Interfaces to peripherals and to sensors 1
Module 2: Automotive Communications Systems (7Hrs)
2.1 Introduction to communications standards 1
2.2 Introduction to networks, safety critical issues and reliability 1
2.3 Communication protocols for automotive application CAN, LIN 2
Bus and others
2.4 Telematics for automotive applications 1
2.5 GPRS, GPS for use in and automotive environment 1
2.6 Automotive diagnostics 1
Module 3: Automotive Control and Power Systems (7Hrs)
3.1 Electronic control methods (analog and digital) 1
3.2 Stability algorithms for control (cruise control, traction control) 1
3.3 Actuator limiting, wind-up, gain scheduling and others 2
3.4 Energy management strategies: regenerative breaking, start-stop, 2
torque boost, Sensing and control systems
3.5 Interfacing using power devices. 1
Module 4: Sensors and Interfacing (7Hrs)
4.1 Introduction to electronic instrumentation for sensors: temperature, 2
distance, velocity, speedometer, anti-collision and others,.
4.2 Interfacing electronics with Operational Amplifiers 2
4.3 DA/AD converters 1
4.4 Limitations, topologies and processing for sensors 2
Module 5: Automotive Safety Systems and DAS (7Hrs)
5.1 Introduction to safety systems: Passive and Active systems 1
electronics
5.2 Antilock-braking system (ABS), Electronic Stability Program 2
(ESP), Anti-slip regulation (ASR) and others
5.3 Driver Assistance Systems: Advanced active systems electronics: 2
ACC
5.4 Active safety system applications: lane detection, blind spot, crash 2
avoidance control electronics
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Model Question paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
EIGHTH SEMESTER B. TECH. DEGREE EXAMINATION,
Program: Applied Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering/ Electronics and
Instrumentation
Course Code: AET428
Course Name: Automotive Electronics
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours
PART A

Answer ALL Questions. Each Carries 3 mark

1 What are the functions of Motronic engine-management? 3 CO1 K2
System?
2 How the fuel injector works? 3 CO1 K2
3 Enumerate the requirements of a typical automotive bus system. 3 CO2 K1
4 What are the major components of Multimedia networking? 3 CO2 K1
5 What is meant by Combustion-synchronous interrupt? 3 CO3 K2
6 List out the essential digital modules in an automotive control unit. 3 CO3 K1
7 Explain the functions of a temperature sensor in an IC engine. 3 CO4 K2
8 What are D/A converters? Give any two applications in 3 CO4 K2
automobiles.
9 What are the advantages of ESP? Explain 3 CO5 K1
10 What is the principle behind Line detection? 3 CO5 K2

PART – B
Answer one question from each module; each question carries 14 marks.
Module – I
11 With a neat diagram, Explain Electronic ignition system 8 CO1 K2
(a) configuration.
(b) Draw a basic automotive computer block diagram and explain 6 CO1 K2
OR
12(a) With a neat diagram, explain Automotive digital instrumentation 8 CO1 K2
system.
(b) What are the functions of a microcontroller in an IC Engine? 3 CO1 K1
(c) What is meant by COP in an ignition system? 3 CO2 K1
Module2
13 What is the need for a communication network in an automobile? 6 CO2 K2
(a) Explain
(b) Explain LIN bus standard in detail. 8 CO2 K1
OR
14(a) Explain the GPS system structure in a vehicle with necessary 8 CO2 K2
diagrams.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

(b) What is meant by OBD? Explain 6 CO2 K2

Module 3

15(a) What are the essential components of a digital control system? 5 CO3 K2
Explain
(b) Differentiate between Cruise control and Traction Control. 4 CO3 K2
(c) With a diagram, explain digital speed measurement system. 7 CO3 K2
OR
16(a) With necessary sketches, explain various energy management 10 CO3 K2
strategies in an automobile.
(b) Explain the concept of Actuator Limiting. CO3 K2
Module 4
17(a) Explain the principle of Anti-collision sensor. 6 CO4 K2
(b) What is the need for an Op-amp in electronic control? Explain, 6 CO4 K2
(c) What is meant by interfacing? 2 CO4 K2
OR
18 (a) Give the principle of distance measurement using sensor. 4 CO4 K2
(b) Explain how an A/D converter is interfaced with a temperature sensor. 6 CO4 K2
(c) What is a knock sensor? Explain 4 CO4 K1
Module 5
19(a) With examples, differentiate between passive and active safety 4 CO5 K2
systems.
(b) Explain ACC in detail with neat diagrams. 10 CO5 K2
OR
20(a) Illustrate the working of ABS in detail. 8 CO5 K2
(b) How Blind spot detection is done in vehicles? 3 CO5 K2
(c) What are the pedestrian safety measures available in modern cars? 3 CO5 K2
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

AET 438 CYBER SECURITY CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble:
Cyber security is the protection of computer systems and networks from information disclosure, theft
of or damage to their hardware, software, or electronic data, as well as from the disruption or
misdirection of the services they provide. The objective of this course is to familiarize various types
of cyber-attacks and cyber-crimes and to give an overview of the cyber laws. Students should also
aware of the defensive techniques against these attacks.

Prerequisite: A Sound knowledge in Computer networks, the Internet and computer operating
systems.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO1 Explain the basic concepts and terminologies of cyber security, cyber forensic and cyber
forensics investigation process. (K2)
CO2 Illustrate the basic concepts of system and network vulnerabilities and usage of
vulnerability scanning tools. (K3)
CO3 Describe the principles of network forensics and network defense tools. (K2)
CO4 Analyze different cybercrimes and understand provisions of Indian IT Act 2000. (K2, K4)
CO5 Evaluate critically, the anti-forensic practices and understand steps in cybercrime
investigation. (K2)

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
1 2 10 11 12
CO 1 3 2 2 2
CO 2 3 3 2 2
CO 3 3 2 2 2 3 2
CO 4 2 3 2 2
CO 5 2 3 2 2

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

/Tests
1 2
Remember K1 10 10 10
Understand K2 20 20 40
Apply K3 10 10 30
Analyze K4 10 10 20
Evaluate
Create
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry
14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Explain the basic concepts and terminologies of cyber security,
cyber forensic, and cyber forensics investigation process.
1. Understand the basic concepts and terminologies in cyber security.

2. Familiarize basic concepts and terminologies of cyber forensic.

3. Understand basic steps in cyber forensic investigation.

Sample questions:

1.Explain the need for cyber security. Discuss different issues and terminologies
associated with cyber security.

2. Explain what do you mean by digital evidence? Comment on digital forensics

standards and guidelines.

3. Discuss the steps involved in cyber forensic investigation. Illustrate the steps of an
email forensic investigation.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Illustrate the basic concepts of system and network vulnerabilities
and usage of vulnerability scanning tools.
1. Understand the vulnerabilities of stand alone and networked systems

2. Describe the usage of vulnerability scanners for stand alone and networked systems.
3. Familiarize the functionalities and usages of different network sniffers and injection tools.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Sample Questions:

1. Explain the need for vulnerability scanners. Explain how vulnerability scanners
assess computers, networks or application programs for known weakness.

2. Compare and contrast between authenticated and unauthenticated vulnerability

scanners.

3. Illustrate the usage of vulnerability scanners such as OpenVAS, Metasploit.

4. Compare the functionalities of vulnerability scanners for stand-alone systems and

networked systems.

5. Illustrate the usage of network vulnerability scanners Netcat, Socat.

6. Briefly explain the need for port and service tools.

7. Explain the need for Network Sniffers and Injection tools. Also discuss the usage of
the following utilities: Tcpdump and Windump, Wireshark, Ettercap and Hping.

Course Outcome 3 (CO3): Describe the principles of Network Forensics and Network
Defense tools.
1. Study the basic principles layered network architecture and its vulnerability to attacks.
2. Understand the basic principles of forensic foot print and forensic artifacts.
3. Describe the functionalities and usages of firewalls and packet filters.

Sample questions:

1. With a neat sketch explain the OSI reference model for computer networks. Discuss the layers and
services that take care of the system security.

2. Compare and contrast between firewalls and packet filters. Discuss how do you configure firewall
for a networked system.

3. Discuss the need for virtual private network, Explain how do you create a VPN.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Analyze different cybercrimes and understand provisions

of Indian IT Act 2000.

1. Categorize different cybercrimes. What do you mean by ethical hacking?

2. Prepare a list of cybercrimes happened in the past. Comment on cyberspace and

criminal behavior in the post Internet world.

3. Discuss different anti forensic practices. Explain anti-forensics detection techniques.

 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Sample questions:

1. Prepare a list of computer crimes that happened in the past. Comment on the criminal behavior in
the cyberspace in a post Internet scenario.

2. Discuss the term contaminant. Comment on the destruction of data due to cyber-attacks. Explain
how data can be recovered?
Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Evaluate critically, anti-forensic practices and understand steps in
cybercrime investigation.

1. Evaluate critically the anti-forensic practices such as data wiping and shredding.
2. Understand basic steps in cyber-crime investigations.
3. Familiarize with the terminologies of computer forensics analysis.

Sample questions:
1. Briefly explain different anti forensic practices demonstrated by cyber attackers and hackers.
Comment on data wiping and shredding.
2. Describe spoofing and data modification. Discuss how to detect the spoofing and data
modifications.
3. Discuss the steps in cyber-crime investigation. Also explain steps in network intrusion detection
and investigation of network traffic.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

SYLLABUS

Module - 1 (Introduction Cyber Security)

Introduction to Cyber Security: Basic terminologies, practices and standards. Vulnerability
Scanning: Overview of vulnerability scanning, Open Port / Service Identification, Banner / Version
Check, Traffic Probe, Vulnerability Probe, Vulnerability Examples, OpenVAS, Metasploit.
Networks Vulnerability Scanning - Netcat, Socat, understanding Port and Services tools - Datapipe,
Fpipe. Network Sniffers and Injection tools – Tcpdump and Windump, Wireshark, Ettercap, Hping.

Module -2 (Cyber Forensics)

Introduction to Cyber Forensics, Cyber Forensics, Forensics Investigation Process - Forensic
Protocol for Evidence Acquisition - Digital Forensics Standards and Guidelines - Digital Evidence –
Cybercrime, Types of Cybercrimes - Recent Data Breaches - Recent Cyber security Trends - Case
Study: Sim Swapping Fraud, ATM Card Cloning, Hacking email for money, Google Nest Guard.
Challenges in Cyber Forensics, Skills Required to Become a Cyber Forensic Expert, Cyber Forensic
Tools.

Module 3 (Network Forensics and Defense tools)

The OSI Model, Forensic Footprints, Seizure of Networking Devices, Network Forensic Artifacts,
ICMP Attacks, Drive-By Downloads, Network Forensic Analysis Tools, Phishing, Types of
Phishing, Email Forensics, Steps of an email forensic investigation. Network Defense toolsFirewalls
and Packet Filters: Firewall Basics, Packet Filter Vs Firewall, Virtual Private Networks, Linux
Firewall, Windows Firewall.

Module -4 (Introduction to Cyber Crime and law)

Cyber Crimes, Types of Cybercrime, Hacking, Attack vectors, Cyberspace and Criminal Behavior,
Clarification of Terms, Traditional Problems Associated with Computer Crime, Introduction to
Incident Response, Digital Forensics, Computer Language, Network Language, Realms of the Cyber
world, A Brief History of the Internet, Recognizing and Defining Computer Crime, Contemporary
Crimes, Computers as Targets, Contaminants and Destruction of Data, Indian IT ACT 2000.

Module- 5 (Anti Forensic practices and Cyber Crime Investigation)

Anti-forensic Practices - Data Wiping and Shredding: Data Remanence, Degaussing, Trail
Obfuscation: Spoofing, Data Modification, Anti-forensics Detection Techniques.
Cyber Crime Investigation- Investigating Network Intrusions and Cyber Crime, Network Forensics
and Investigating logs, investigating network Traffic, Investigating Web attacks, Router Forensics.
Computer Forensics Analysis- Discovery of Electronic Evidence- Identification of data-
Reconstructing Past events networks.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Text Book
1. Nina Godbole and Sunit Belpure, Cyber Security Understanding Cyber Crimes, Computer
Forensics and Legal Perspectives, Wiley.
2. Niranjan Reddy, “Practical Cyber Forensics: An Incident-Based Approach to Forensic
Investigations”, Apress, 2019.
3. Computer forensics: computer crime scene investigation, Volume 1 (Charles River Media, 2008)
By John R. Vacca.

Reference Books
1. Understanding Cryptography: A Textbook for Students and Practitioners: Christofpaar, Jan
Pelzl.
2. Live Hacking: The Ultimate Guide to Hacking Techniques & Countermeasures for Ethical
Hackers & IT Security Experts Ali Jahangiri
3. Handbook of Digital and Multimedia Forensic Evidence [Paperback] John J. Barbara
4. Computer Forensics: Investigating Network Intrusions and Cyber Crime (EcCouncil Press
Series: Computer Forensics)
5. Cyber Forensics: Understanding Information Security Investigations (Springer's Forensic
Laboratory Science Series) by Jennifer Bayuk.
6. Information warfare: Information warfare and security: (ACM Press) by Dorothy Elizabeth
Robling Denning
7. Shema, Mike. Anti-Hacker Tool Kit, Fourth Edition. McGraw-Hill Osborne Media, 2014.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Teaching Plan (35 Hours)

Module 1 : Introduction Cyber Security (6 hours)
1.1 Introduction to Cyber Security: Basic terminologies, practices and 1 hour
standards. Introduction to Vulnerability Scanning: Overview of
vulnerability scanning,
1.2 ROpen Port / Service, Identification, Banner / Version Check, Traffic 1 hour
Probe, Vulnerability Probe.
1.3 Vulnerability Examples, OpenVAS, Metasploit. 1 hour

1.4 Networks Vulnerability Scanning - Netcat, Socat, understanding Port. 1 hour

1.5 Services tools - Datapipe, Fpipe. 1 hour
1.6 Network Sniffers and Injection tools – Tcpdump and Windump, 1 hour
Wireshark, Ettercap, Hping.
Module 2 : Cyber Forensics (7 hours)
2.1 Introduction to Cyber Forensics, Cyber Forensics, Forensics 2 hours
Investigation Process - Forensic Protocol for Evidence Acquisition
2.2 Digital Forensics Standards and Guidelines - Digital Evidence 1 hour

2.3 Cybercrime, Types of Cybercrimes - Recent Data Breaches 1 hour

2.4 Recent Cyber security Trends - Case Study: Sim Swapping Fraud, ATM 1 hour
Card Cloning, Hacking email for money,
2.5 1 hour
Case Study: Google Nest Guard
2.6 1 hour
Challenges in Cyber Forensics, Skills Required to Become a Cyber
Forensic Expert, Cyber Forensic Tools.
Module 3 : Network Forensics and Defense tools (8 hours)
3.1 The OSI Model, Forensic Footprints, Seizure of Networking Devices 1 hour
3.2 Network Forensic Artifacts, ICMP Attacks, Drive-By Downloads 1 hour

3.4 Network Forensic Analysis Tools, Phishing, Types of Phishing, Email 1 hour
Forensics, Steps of an email forensic investigation.
3.5 Nesterov accelerated GD, Stochastic GD. 1 hour
3.6 AdaGrad, RMSProp, Adam. 1 hour
3.7 Network Defense tools. Firewalls and Packet Filters: Firewall Basics, 2 hour
Packet Filter Vs Firewall.
3.9 Virtual Private Networks, Linux Firewall, Windows Firewall. 1 hour

Module 4 : Introduction to Cyber Crime and law (7 hours)

4.1 Cyber Crimes, Types of Cybercrime, Hacking, Attack vectors, 1 hour
Cyberspace and Criminal Behavior

4.2 Clarification of Terms, Traditional Problems Associated with Computer 1 hour

Crime.

4.3 Introduction to Incident Response, Digital Forensics, Computer 1 hour

Language, Network Language.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

4.4 Realms of the Cyber world, A Brief History of the Internet. 1 hour

4.5 Recognizing and Defining Computer Crime, Contemporary Crimes, 1 hour

Computers as Targets, Contaminants and Destruction of Data, Indian IT
ACT 2000.

4.6 Indian IT ACT 2000. 2 hours

Module 5 : Anti Forensic practices and Cyber Crime Investigation (7 hours)

5.1 Anti-forensic Practices - Data Wiping and Shredding. 1 hour
5.2 Data Remanence, Degaussing, Trail Obfuscation: Spoofing, Data 1 hour
Modification, Anti-forensics Detection Techniques.
5.3 Anti-forensics Detection Techniques. 1 hour
5.4 Cyber Crime Investigation- Investigating Network Intrusions and 1 hour
Cyber Crime.
5.5 Network Forensics and Investigating logs, Investigating network 1 hour
Traffic
5.6 Investigating Web attacks, Router Forensics. 1 hour
5.7 Computer Forensics Analysis- Discovery of Electronic Evidence- 1 hour
Identification of data- Reconstructing Past events networks.

Assignments:

Assignment 1: Case Study: Windows Malware Analysis of Data Stealing Malware

Assignment 2: Case Study: Listing Partitions, Memory Acquisition of Linux System, SysScout
Tool, Raw Image Analysis.
Assignment 3: Case Study: Anti-forensics Detection Techniques- Stegdetect
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Model Question paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

EIGHTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, (Model Question Paper)
Program: Applied Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering/ Electronics and
Instrumentation Engineering

Course Code: AET438

Course Name: Cyber Security
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART A
Answer ALL Questions. Each Carries 3 mark.

1 CO1 K3
Explain the need for vulnerability scanning for standalone
computers and networked computers.
2 Discuss the functionalities of port and service tools. CO1 K2
3 CO2 K2
What do you mean by digital evidence? Comment on forensic
protocol for evidence acquisition.

4 CO2 K2
Explain the skills required to become a cyber forensic expert.

5 Discuss network forensic artifacts. Also explain ICMP attacks. CO3 K3

6 Explain the term Phishing, Discuss different types of Phishing. CO3 K3
Also explain how to identify Phishing.
7 Comment on hacking in cyber space. What do you understand by K2
ethical hacking?
8 Briefly explain the provisions in Indian IT Act for the protection CO4 K3
of data.
9 Explain data wiping and shredding. What are the steps to be taken CO5 K2
if you lose your data due to attacks ?
10 Discuss the consequence of trail obfuscation. CO5 K2

PART – B
Answer one question from each module; each question carries 14 marks.
Module – I

11. a) Explain steps in vulnerability scanning in computer networks. 8 CO1 K3

Briefly explain the usages of networks vulnerability scanning
using Netcat and Socat utilities
11. b) Comment on authenticated and unauthenticated vulnerability scanners. 6 CO2 K3
OR
12.a) Illustrate how network vulnerability scanners identify and detect 8 CO1 K3
vulnerabilities arising from the mis-configurations or flawed
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

programming within a network-based asset such as a firewall,

router or a web server

12. b) Explain the functionalities of sniffers and injection tools. Explain 6 CO2 K3
the usages of Tcpdump.

Module – II

13 a) Explain the steps in forensics investigation process. Comment on digital 9 CO2 K2

forensics standards and guidelines. Also prepare a list of digital
evidences.

13 b) Briefly explain the recently happened cybercrimes such as sim 5 CO2 K2

swapping fraud, ATM card cloning.
OR

14 a) Discuss different cyber forensic tools and their usage. Explain email 9 CO2 K2
based frauds that happened in the past. Also discuss how you can secure
your emails.

14 b) Comment on recent data breaches. Explain how to make the data secure 5 CO2 K2
in your systems?
Module – III

15 a) Illustrate with a neat sketch the OSI reference model for computer 9 CO3 K3
networks. Explain the functionalities of each layer. Also explain how
data security is maintained.
15 b) 5 CO3 K3
Compare and contrast between firewalls and packet filters. Discuss how
do you configure firewall for a networked system.

OR

16 a) Explain the concept of forensic footprints. Discuss how do you conduct 6 CO3 K2
Network Forensic Analysis? Also comment on network forensic analysis
tools
16 b) Discuss the need for virtual private networks. Explain how do you set 4 CO3 K2
up a VPN.
16 c) Discuss the operating system dependency of firewalls. Compare and 4 CO3 K3
contrast between Linux firewall, Windows firewall.

Module – IV

17 a) Briefly explain different type of cybercrimes. Also comment on 9 CO3 K2

traditional problems associated with computer crimes. Prepare a list of
notorious cyber crimes happened in the past.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

17 b) Comment on different provisions in the Indian IT Act 2000 for 5 CO4 K3

information security.

OR

18 a) Explain the term contaminants and destruction of data. Critically 9 CO3 K2

investigate the vulnerability of data stored in web servers. Comment on
the protection of shared data in the web.
18 b) Comment on the criminal behavior in cyber space in the 21 st century. 5 CO3 K2

Module – V

19 a) Describe spoofing and data modification. Discuss how to detect the 8 CO4 K3
spoofing and data modifications.

19 b) Briefly explain different anti forensic practices demonstrated by cyber 6 CO4 K3

attackers and hackers.

OR

20 a) Illustrate network intrusion with example. Explain steps involved in 6 CO4 K3

investigating network intrusions.
20 b) Discuss data remanence. What are the uses of these data that persists 4 CO4 K3
beyond noninvasive means to delete it in cyber forensic investigation?
20 c) Briefly explain the steps in router forensics. How digital evidences 4 CO2 K2
collected from the routers help in investigation?
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

AET448 INSTRUMENTATION AND CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

CONTROL FOR PEC 2 1 0 3
PETROCHEMICAL INDUSTRIES

Preamble:
The course is designed to learn about the instrumentation systems used in petrochemical
industries. The major objectives of the course are to give an exposure on the important
parameters to be monitored and analysed in these industries and to imbibe knowledge in various
techniques used for the measurement of primary industry parameters.

Course Outcomes:
After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Discuss the origin and favourable geological conditions for the formation and
accumulation of petroleum and natural gas.

CO 2 Explain the processes involved in petroleum production.

CO 3 Interpret or create P&I diagrams for any process.

CO 4 Understand the control of petroleum industries equipment such as Distillation

Column, Heat Exchangers, Evaporators and Pumps.

CO 5 Explain the necessity of considering economic and safety/pollutionfactors in

petrochemical engineering design and practice

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO PO PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
3 4 10 11 12
CO 1 2 3
CO 2 2 3
CO 3 2 3 3
CO 4 2 2 2 3
CO 5 2 2 2 3 3
Assessment Pattern
Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester Examination
1 2
Remember
Understand 40 40 80
Apply 10 10 20
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Mark distribution

Total CIE ESE ESE Duration

Marks

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks

Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern:

There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each
module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2
questions from each module of which student should answer any one. Each question can have
maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Summarize about source rock maturation and migration.

2. Discuss in detail the process of entrapment of oil and gas in a petroleum reservoir with
a neat diagram.

3. Describe the process of generation of petroleum in source rocks in detail.

4. Explain about different oil and gas traps: Anticline trap, Fault trap, Stratigraphic trap,
Salt dome trap.
5. Understand the different refinery products.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2):

1. Explain the process of extracting the petroleum products through distillation column
and thermal conversion process.

2. How ethylene, acetylene and propylene are produced from petroleum.

3. Explain the conversion process such as catalytic cracking and catalytic hydro
reforming.
Course Outcome 3 (CO3):

1. What are instrument categories and which instruments are handled by piping
department?
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

2. What is the use of P&ID diagram and how many of its types?
3. Draw the P&ID diagram of the given process?
Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Explain the cascade control of a chemical reactor with heating and cooling facilities.

2. Describe the physical mechanism and importance of dryers in petroleum refineries and
the construction of tray dryers.
3. Explain the temperature and pressure control in the chemical reactors.
4. Explain Instrumentation and control of evaporators
5. Explain the Physics of a Liquid to liquid heat exchanger. Discuss the mechanisms
involved
Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. With sketches and block diagrams, explain effluent and water treatment control.

2. How is chemical oxidation method utilized in waste water treatment?

3. Give an account of instrumentation and control in effluent treatment.

 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Model Question paper

Course Code: AET448

Course Name: INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PETROCHEMICAL

INDUSTRIES

Max.Marks:100 Duration: 3 Hours

PARTA

Answer all Questions. Each question carries 3 Marks

1. Summarize about source rock maturation and migration.

2. Discuss in detail the process of entrapment of oil and gas in a petroleum reservoir with
a neat diagram.

3. What is meant by the term coking? How it is performed?

4. How ethylene and propylene is produced from petroleum?

5. Draw the P&ID diagram of various process lines?

6. How are variables detected in continuous dryers?

7. Explain the operation of heat exchangers used in petroleum industry?

8. What is Reboiler? Sum up their salient features?

9. What do you mean by throttling control?

10. How is chemical oxidation method utilized in waste water treatment?

PART B

Answer any one full question from each module. Each question carries 14 Marks

Module 1

11. Describe the process of generation of petroleum in source rocks in detail.

12. Explain about different oil and gas traps: Anticline trap, Fault trap, Stratigraphic trap,
Salt dome trap.
Module 2

13. Explain the catalytic cracking process with neat sketch?

 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

14. Explain the process of crude oil distillation with a brief process flow diagram

Module 3

15. With the help of a neat sketch explain cascade control of a chemical reactor with heating
and cooling facilities
16. Explain any two methods of temperature control in chemical reactors

Module 4

17. Explain Instrumentation and control of any two types of evaporators

18. Explain the aspects of a feed forward control. How will you apply computer
technologies to this system?

Module 5

19. Explain ON-OFF control and throttling control of reciprocating pumps in detail.

20. Discuss the methods of ON/OFF control of

a) Rotary Pumps
b) Reciprocating Pumps
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PETROCHEMICAL INDUSTRIES

Syllabus

Module 1: BASICS OF PETROLEUM ENGINEERING (7 Hours)

Origin of Petroleum, oil and gas traps. Physical and chemical characteristics of crude oil, source
rock and maturation, Migration of oil mechanism. Reservoir rock and cap rocks. Application
of remote sensing in petroleum resource development, Basin exploration strategies.
Entrapment of oil-type mechanisms. Refinery Products, Refinery Steps.

Module 2: PROCESSES IN PETROLEUM INDUSTRIES (7 Hours)

Atmospheric Distillation of Crude oil – Vacuum Distillation of Crude Oil – Coking Thermal
Process- Chemical oxidation-Chemical reduction-Polymerisation-Alkylation-Isomerisation-
Production of Ethylene, Acetylene- and propylene from petroleum.

Catalytic Cracking Process, Catalytic reforming process.

Module 3: CONTROL IN PETROLEUM INDUSTRIES (7 Hours)

P&I Symbols: Process lines, Instrument bubbles, Process Equipment, Valve Types. P&I
Diagram of Petroleum Refinery – Control of Distillation Column – Temperature Control – Feed
Control – Reflux Control – Reboiler Control- Control of Chemical Reactors: Temperature
Control, Pressure Control

Module 4: CONTROL IN PETROLEUM INDUSTRIES (7 Hours)

Control of Heat Exchangers and Evaporators – Variables and Degrees of freedom – Liquid to
Liquid Heat Exchangers – Steam Heaters – Condenser – Reboiler and Vaporizers – Cascade
Control – Feed forward Control. Evaporators: Types of Evaporators.

Module 5: CONTROL and SAEFTY IN PETROLEUM INDUSTRIES (7 Hours)

Control of Pumps: Centrifugal Pumps: On-off control – Pressure Control- Flow Control –
Throttling Control – Rotary Pumps: On-off Control Pressure Control. Reciprocating Pumps:
On-off Control and Throttling Control.

Effluent and Water Treatment Control: Chemical Oxidation – Chemical Reduction –

Naturalization – Precipitation – Biological control.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Reference Books

1. J. CH Garry, Hardward G.E and M.J.Kaiser, Petroleum Refining Technology and economics
CRC Press V Edition

2. Liptak B.G. Instrumentation in process industries, Chilton book Company, 1994

3. Dr. Ram Prasad, “Petroleum Refining Technology”, Khanna Publisher, 1st edition, 2000.

4. Liptak B.G, “Instrument Engineers Handbook”, Volume II, 1989.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of
Lectures
1 Module 1 (7 hours)
Origin of Petroleum, oil and gas traps. Physical and chemical
1.1 characteristics of crude oil, source rock and maturation. Migration of 3 hrs
oil mechanism.
Reservoir rock and cap rocks. Application of remote sensing in
1.2 petroleum resource development, Basin exploration strategies.
3 hrs
Entrapment of oil-type mechanisms.
1.3 Refinery Products and Refinery Steps 1hr
2 Module 2 (7 hours)
2.1 Atmospheric Distillation of Crude oil 1 hr

2.2 Vacuum Distillation of Crude Oil 1 hr

2.3 Coking and Thermal Process 1 hr

Chemical oxidation-Chemical Reduction-Polymerisation-

2.4 2 hrs
Alkylation-Isomerisation

2.5 Production of Ethylene, Acetylene- and propylene from petroleum 1 hr

2.6 Catalytic Cracking Process, Catalytic reforming process. 1 hr

3 Module 3 (7 hours)

P&I Symbols: Process lines, Instrument bubbles, Process Equipments,

3.1 2 hrs
Valve Types. P&I Diagram of Petroleum Refinery

Control of Distillation Column – Temperature Control – Feed Control,

3.2 3 hrs
Reflux Control – Reboiler Control
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

3.3 Control of Chemical Reactors: Temperature Control, Pressure Control 2 hrs

4 Module 4 (7 hours)
4.1 Control of Heat Exchangers and Evaporators 1 hr
4.2 Variables and Degrees of freedom 1 hr
4.3 Liquid to Liquid Heat Exchangers – Steam Heaters – Condenser 2 hrs

4.4 Reboiler and Vaporizers 1 hr

4.5 Cascade Control – Feed forward Control. 1 hr

4.6 Evaporators: Types of Evaporators 1 hr

5 Module 5 (7 hours)
Control of Pumps: Centrifugal Pumps: On-off control – Pressure
5.1 2 hrs
Control- Flow Control – Throttling Control
Rotary Pumps: On-off Control, Pressure Control 2 hrs
5.2 Reciprocating Pumps: On-off Control and Throttling Control.

Effluent and Water Treatment Control: Chemical Oxidation – chemical

5.4 Reduction – Naturalization – Precipitation – Biological control. 3 hrs

Assignment:

At least two assignments should be given.

 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

WIRELESS CATEGORY L T P CREDITS

AET 458
COMMUNICATION PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: This course aims to impart the concepts of communication engineering and the basics
of wireless communication.

Prerequisite: AET401 COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Illustrate the knowledge of mobile radio propagation mechanism in the wireless

communication scenario (K3).
CO 2 Explain the effect of small-scale fading and multipath in the wireless communication
systems (K2).
CO 3 Apply the knowledge of wireless channel capacity and diversity in the wireless
communication system design (K3).
CO 4 Describe the features of Cellular concept in the mobile communication scenario (K2).

CO 5 Demonstrate the characteristics of modern wireless communication systems and the

multiple access techniques (K2).

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO PO PO PO
9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 2 2
CO 2 2 1 2
CO 3 3 2 2
CO 4 2 1 2
CO 5 2 1 2

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember K1
Understand K2 30 30 66
Apply K3 20 20 34
Analyse K4
Evaluate
Create
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each
question. Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each
module of which student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2
sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): To illustrate the knowledge of mobile radio propagation

mechanism in the wireless communication scenario.

1. Which are the basic propagation mechanisms in the mobile communication systems?
2. Define Brewster angle?
3. Derive the expression for two the power received at a distance of d from the transmitter
T? The receiver is assumed with a height of hr using Two ray ground reflection model?
4. How do you describe the Fresnel zones while calculating the diffraction of wireless
signals?

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): To explain the effect of small scale fading and multipath in the
wireless communication systems.
1. Define level crossing rate (LCR) and average fade duration of a Rayleigh fading
channel?
2. Define outage probability?
3. Discuss the features of small-scale fading channel based on multipath time delay
spread?
4. Which are the factors influencing small scale fading?

Course Outcome 3 (CO3): To apply the knowledge of wireless channel capacity and
diversity in the wireless communication system design.
1. Draw the block schematic representation of Maximal ratio combiner?
2. What is the importance of diversity in the wireless communication systems?
3. Derive the expression for bit error probability of QPSK under AWGN channel
4. Prove with the help of necessary equations, “The average SNR of the receiver
shall be improved by selection diversity”
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): To describe the features of Cellular concept in the mobile
communication scenario (K2).

1. Discuss the methods to improve the capacity of cellular networks?

2. Differentiate between hard and soft handoff in mobile communication?
3. Differentiate cochannel interference and adjacent channel interference?
4. What do you mean by ‘microcell’ in a cellular system?

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): To demonstrate the characteristics of modern wireless

communication systems and the multiple access techniques

1. Discuss the features of 4G cellular systems?

2. Discuss any one method to generate PN sequences?
3. Explain the importance of multi carrier communication?
4. Discuss the features of maximal length codes?
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

SYLLABUS

MODULE I:

Mobile radio propagation: Introduction to radio propagation, Free space propagation model, Basic
propagation mechanisms, Reflections, Ground reflection (Two ray) model. Diffraction: Fresnel Zone
geometry, Knife edge diffraction model, Scattering: Radar cross section model.

MODULE II

Small scale fading and multipath: Small scale multipath propagation, Impulse response model of a
multipath channel, Parameters of mobile multipath channels, Types of small scale fading, Rayleigh and
Ricean distributions, Shadow fading, Combined pathloss and shadowing, Outage probability under
fading and shadowing [2]. Level crossing and fading statistics.

MODULE III:

Capacity of wireless channels: Capacity in AWGN, capacity of flat fading channels, capacity of
frequency selective fading channel [2].

Diversity: Realization of independent fading paths, Receiver diversity: System model, Selection
combining, Threshold combining, maximum ratio combining, equal gain combining. Transmitter
diversity: Channel known at the transmitter, channel unknown at the transmitter- The Alamouti scheme.

MODULE IV

Mobile Communication
Cellular concept: Cellular concept, Frequency reuse, Channel assignment strategies, hand off
strategies, Interference and system capacity: Co channel interference and system capacity, channel
planning for wireless systems, adjacent channel interference. Improving coverage and capacity in
cellular system: Cell splitting, Sectoring, Repeaters, and Microcells.

MODULE V
Advanced wireless Communication Techniques: Introduction to Modern Wireless Communication
Systems, Second generation cellular networks, third generation wireless networks, fourth generation
wireless technologies, fifth generation wireless technologies.
Spread spectrum communication: Pseudo–noise sequences: Properties of PN sequences. Generation
of PN Sequences, generator polynomials, Maximal length codes.
Multiple Access Techniques: TDMA, FDMA and CDMA– RAKE receiver. Introduction to
Multicarrier communication- OFDM.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Text Books
1. Theodore S. Rappaport: Wireless communication principles and practice, Pearson
Education, 1990
2. Andrea Goldsmith: Wireless communications, Cambridge university Press, 2005.

Reference Books
1. Savo G. Glisic, Advanced Wireless Communications 4G Technologies, John Wiley& Sons, Ltd,
2004
2. Wayne Tomasi, Advanced Electronic Communications Systems, Pearson, 2014.
3. Andreas F. Molisch, Wireless communications, Wiley, 2011
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No. Topic No. of lecture

hours
1 Mobile radio propagation
1.1 Introduction to radio propagation, Free space propagation model, 1
1.2 Basic propagation mechanisms, Reflections 1
1.3 Ground reflection (Two ray) model. 1
1.4 Diffraction: Fresnel Zone geometry 1
1.5 Knife edge diffraction model 1
1.6 Scattering: 1
1.7 Radar cross section model 1
2 Small scale fading and multipath
2.1 Small scale multipath propagation 1
2.2 Impulse response model of a multipath channel 1
2.3 Parameters of mobile multipath channels 1

2.4 Types of small scale fading 2

2.5 Rayleigh and Ricean distributions, Shadow fading 1
2.6 Combined pathloss and shadowing, Outage probability under fading 1
and shadowing , Level crossing and fading statistics
3 Capacity of wireless channels
3.1 Capacity in AWGN 1
3.2 Capacity of flat fading channels 1
3.3 Capacity of frequency selective fading channel 1
Diversity:
3.4 1
Realization of independent fading paths, Receiver diversity: System
model,
3.5 Selection combining, Threshold combining, maximum ratio 1
combining, equal gain combining
3.6 Transmitter diversity: Channel known at the transmitter, 1
3.7 1
Channel unknown at the transmitter- The Alamouti scheme

4
Mobile Communication
4.1 Cellular concept, Frequency reuse 1
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

4.2 Channel assignment strategies 1

4.3 Hand off strategies 1
4.4 Interference and system capacity 1
4.5 Co channel interference and system capacity 1
4.6 Channel planning for wireless systems, adjacent channel 1
interference.
4.7 Improving coverage and capacity in cellular system: Cell splitting, 1
Sectoring, Repeaters, and Microcells
5 Advanced wireless Communication Techniques
5.1 Introduction to Modern Wireless Communication Systems, Second 1
generation cellular networks, third generation wireless networks
5.2 Fourth generation wireless technologies, fifth generation wireless 1
technologies.
Spread spectrum communication
5.3 Pseudo–noise sequences: Properties of PN sequences 1
5.4 Generation of PN Sequences, generator polynomials 1
5.5 Maximal length codes 1
Multiple Access Techniques:

5.6 TDMA, FDMA and CDMA– RAKE receiver. 1

5.7 Introduction to Multicarrier communication- OFDM 1

 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Model Question paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

EIGHTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, (Model Question Paper)
Course Code: AET458
Program: Applied Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering

Course Name: Wireless Communication

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART A
Answer ALL Questions. Each Carries 3 mark.

1. Derive the expression for the free space pathloss for a radio signal. Calculate CO1 K3
the free pace path loss for a signal having frequency of 42 GHz when it travels
a distance of 100meter? What is the physical significance of the result?
2. How do you define radar cross section (RCS) of a scattering object? CO1 K2
3. Briefly describe the multipath channel parameters that can be determined CO2 K2
from the power delay profile?
4. Write down the expression for the probability density function of Rayleigh CO2 K2
distribution and Ricean distribution?
5. Differentiate between SNR and SINR of wireless signals? CO3 K3
6. Draw the generalized block schematic for the space diversity CO3 K2
7. Define frequency reuse in the cellular communication system? CO4 K2
8. How do you define cochannel reuse ratio in mobile communication? CO4 K2
9. Draw the block schematic of M branch RAKE receiver CO5 K2
10. Write short notes on OFDM CO5 K2

PART – B
Answer one question from each module; each question carries 14 marks.
Module – I
11. Derive the expression for the free space propagation model of a 14 CO1 K3
wireless communication system?
OR
12 A mobile is located 5km away from a base station and uses a vertical 14 CO1 K3
λ/4 monopole antenna with a gain of 2.55 dB to receive cellular radio
signals. The E field at 1 km from the transmitter is measured to be
10 V/m. The carrier frequency used for this system is 900 MHz.
a) Find the length and the effective aperture of the receiving
antenna?
b) Find the received power at the mobile using two ray ground
reflection model assuming the height of the transmitting
antenna is 50m and the receiving antenna is 1.5m above the
ground.?
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Module – II
13. Discuss the features of the impulse response model of a multi path 14 CO2 K2
channel?
OR
14. Discuss the features of the small scale fading based on the doppler 14 CO2 K2
spread?

Module – III
15 a). Discuss the features of various space diversity techniques.? 8 CO3 K3
b) Derive the expression for bit error probability of BPSK under 6 CO3 K3
AWGN channel?
OR
16 a). Derive the expression for average SNR of maximal ratio combining 7 CO3 K3
diversity technique?
b). Discuss the features of Alamouti scheme? 7 CO3 K3

Module – IV
17 a). Discuss the channel assignment strategies in the mobile 9 CO4 K2
communication system
b). Discuss the use of cell splitting in mobile communication system? 5 CO4 K2
OR
18 a). Briefly discuss the handoff strategies associated with cellular 14 CO4 K2
communication system?
Module – V
19 a). 9 CO5 K2
Compare TDMA, FDMA and CDMA technologies?

b). Discuss the properties of PN sequences? 5 CO5 K2

OR
20 Compare the features of 1G, 2G, 3G mobile communication 14 CO5 K2
technologies?
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

AET468 OPTICAL INSTRUMENTATION CATEGORY L T P CREDITS

PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble: This course aims to study about optical communication and optical instruments

Prerequisite: Nil

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Explain the basic concepts of fiber optics

CO 2 Learn the basic concepts of fiber optic sensors and fiber connection techniques
CO 3 Elaborate study of various types of Interferometers

CO 4 Acquire basic knowledge in Laser and discuss its applications

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3 3 2 2 3
CO 2 3 3 2 2 3
CO 3 3 3 2 2 3
CO 4 3 3 2 2 3

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember K1 10 10 10
Understand K2 35 35 60
Apply K3 5 5 30
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each
question. Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each
module of which student should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2
sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Explain the basic concepts of fiber optics

1. Explain the operating principle of Optical fiber.

2. Discuss Fiber fabrication process in detail.

3. Define Numerical Aperture and Acceptance cone.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Learn the basic concepts of fiber optic sensors and fiber
connection techniques
1. Illustrate the working of fiber optic system for measurement of different fiber
characteristics.

2. Explain the different connecting methods of optical fibers.

3. Discuss about various optical modulators.

Course Outcome 3 (CO3): Elaborate study of various types of Interferometers

1. Illustrate the working of various interferometers.

2. Discuss the Interferometric method for measurement of pressure, temperature, current, voltage.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Acquire basic knowledge in Laser and discuss its
applications

1. Derive Einstein relations of Laser.

2. Demonstrate the application of Laser in Material processing.

3. Demonstrate the medical application of Laser.

 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

SYLLABUS
Module 1:
Optical Fiber Concepts: Principle of Optical fiber – Acceptance angle and acceptance cone –
Numerical aperture – V-number –Types of optical fibers (Material, Refractive index and mode) –
properties – Optical source: LED – Optical detectors: PIN and APD – Optical fiber fabrication.

Module 2:
Optic sensors and modulators: Fibre optic sensors – Fibre optic instrumentation system for
measurement of fibre characteristics – Modulators – fiber optic gyroscope – Optical Spectrum
Analyzer.
Fiber connections: Fiber connectors – Splicing Techniques.

Module 3:
Interferometers: Fabry-perot and Michelson interferometers – Interferometric method for
measurement of pressure, temperature, current, voltage – Interferometeric method of measurement of
optical components.

Module 4:
Lasers: Principles of operation – Einstein relations – Population inversion – Optical feedback – Classes
of laser – Solid state, gas and liquid dye lasers– Semiconductor lasers – Q-switching and mode locking
– Properties of laser light.

Module 5:
Laser applications: Laser for measurement of atmospheric effect and pollutants – Laser Doppler
Anemometry (LDA) – Material processing: Laser heating, Melting, Cutting and Welding.
Medical application of lasers: Laser and Tissue interaction – Oncology: Removal of tumors of vocal
chords, Dermatology.

Text Books
1. G. Keiser, “Optical Fibre Communication”, McGraw Hill, 1995.
2. J. Wilson and J. F. B. Hawkes, “Optoelectronics: An Introduction”, Prentice Hall of
India.
Reference Books
1. John M. Senior, Optical Fibre Communications-Principles and practice”, Pearson Education
Limited.
2. Fowles G. R., “Introduction to Modern Optics”, 2nd Edition, Holt, Rienhart, Winston, 1975.
3. Rudolf Kingslake, “Applied Optics and Optical Engineering”, Vol: I-V, Academic Press.
4. K. Thyagarajan, and A. K. Ghatak, “Lasers: Theory and Applications”, Plenum Press.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of
Lectures
1 Optical Fiber Concepts
1.1 Principle of Optical fiber, Acceptance angle and acceptance cone, 1
Numerical aperture
1.2 V-number, Types of optical fibers (Material, Refractive index and 1
mode), properties
1.3 Optical source: LED 1
1.4 Optical detectors: PIN and APD 2
1.5 Optical fiber fabrication 1

2 Optic sensors and modulators

2.1 Fibre optic sensors 1
2.2 Fibre optic instrumentation system for measurement of fibre 1
characteristics
2.3 Modulators 1
2.4 Fiber optic gyroscope – Optical Spectrum Analyzer 1
Fiber connections
2.5 Fiber connectors & Splicing Techniques 2

3 Interferometers
3.1 Fabry-perot and Michelson interferometers 2
3.2 Interferometric method for measurement of pressure, temperature, 2
current, voltage.
3.3 Interferometeric method of measurement of optical components 3

4 Lasers
4.1 Principles of operation, Einstein relations 2
4.2 Population inversion, Optical feedback 2
4.3 Classes of laser – Solid state, gas and liquid dye lasers– Semiconductor 2
lasers
4.4 Q-switching and mode locking – Properties of laser light 3

5 Laser applications
5.1 Laser for measurement of atmospheric effect and pollutants – Laser 2
Doppler Anemometry (LDA)
5.2 Material processing: Laser heating, Melting, Cutting and Welding 2
Medical application of lasers
5.3 Laser and Tissue interaction 1
5.4 Oncology: Removal of tumors of vocal chords, Dermatology 2
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Model Question paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

EIGHTH SEMESTER B. TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION (Model Question Paper)
Program: Applied Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering/ Electronics & Instrumentation
Engineering
Course Code: AET468
Course Name: OPTICAL INSTRUMENTATION
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours
PART A

Answer ALL Questions. Each Carries 3 marks.

1. Define: (a) Acceptance cone (b) V-number K1

2 Differentiate between Step-index and Graded index fiber. K2
3 Explain the working of an Optical spectrum analyzer with neat K2
block diagram.
4 Explain Fiber optic current sensor. K2
5 Discuss how interference patterns are formed. K2
6 Discuss on the different variations of Beam Splitter. K2
7 Explain the working of any one Solid state laser. K2
8 List out the properties of Laser light. K1
9 Discuss any one application of Laser in Dermatology. K2
10 Define: (1) Slew rate, (2) CMRR, (3) offset voltage and current:- K2

PART – B
Answer one question from each module. Each question carries 14 marks.

Module – I

11.a) Explain the principle behind light propagation through an optical 6 CO1 K3
fiber. Derive the expression for Numerical aperture.
11.b) Explain the working of LED with neat diagrams. Compare the 8 CO1 K2
working of Edge emitting LED & Surface emitting LED.
OR
12.a) Explain the fiber fabrication process in detail using fiber drawing 9 CO1 K2
apparatus with outside vapor phase oxidation process.
12.b) With necessary diagrams explain the operation of PIN photodiode. 5 CO1 K2

Module – II

13 a) What are fiber optic sensors? Explain how Temperature can be 8 CO2 K2
measured using extrinsic fiber optic sensors.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

13 b) Explain how fiber dispersion can be measured using Optic fiber 6 CO2 K2
instrumentation system.
OR
14 a) Explain the working of Fiber optic gyroscope. Derive the expression for 9 CO2 K3
phase shift.
14 b) Explain any one type of Splicer and Connector used in optical field. 5 CO2 K2

Module – III

15 a) Discuss how an optical flat is being tested using Fizeau interferometer. 5 CO3 K2
15 b) Derive the expression for path difference in a Fabry-perot interferometer. 9 CO3 K3
OR
16 a) Explain Interferometric method for measurement of pressure and 8 CO3 K2
temperature.
16 b) Explain the working of a Michelson interferometer. 6 CO3 K2

Module – IV

17 a) Derive the Einstein relations for two-level atomic energy system and 9 CO4 K3
calculate the ratio of rate of spontaneous emission to the rate of
stimulated emission.
17 b) Explain how population inversion can be achieved in a Laser. 5 CO4 K2
OR
18 a) Discuss the principle of Q-switching? Explain the three different 14 CO4 K2
methods of Q switching in detail.

Module – V

19 a) Explain the working of Laser Doppler Anemometer with neat diagrams 8 CO4 K2
and expressions.
19 b) Explain the interaction between lasers and tissues. 6 CO4 K2
OR
20 a) Explain the application of Laser in Material Processing in detail. 14 CO4 K3
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

CATEGORY L T P CREDITS
RENEWABLE ENERGY
AET478 TECHNOLOGY PEC 2 1 0 3

Preamble:
This course introduces about different new and renewable sources of energy. Design of some of the
systems are also discussed

Prerequisite: Nil

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to:
CO 1 Describe the environmental aspects of renewable energy resources.
CO 2 Explain the operation of various renewable energy systems.
CO 3 Design solar PV systems.
CO 4 Explain different emerging energy conversion technologies and storage.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12
CO 1 3 3 2
CO 2 3 3 2
CO 3 3 3 2
CO 4 3 3 2

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

Tests
1 2
Remember (K1) 10 10 10
Understand (K2) 20 20 40
Apply (K3) 20 20 50
Analyse (K4) - - -
Evaluate (K5) - - -
Create (K6) - - -

End Semester Examination Pattern :

There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each
module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2
questions from each module of which student should answer any one. Each question can have
maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Explain the environmental impacts of wind energy systems. (K1)
2. Explain the limitations of renewable energy systems (K2)

Course Outcome 2 (CO2):

1. With the help of a block diagram, explain the working of a wind energy conversion system.
(K2)
2. Explain the working of a small hydro power plant with the help of a diagram. (K2)

Course Outcome 3 (CO3):

1. Design a grid connected solar photovoltaic system. (K3).
2. Design a solar photovoltaic system for a water pumping system. (K3).

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Explain how energy can be generated from alcohol. (K2)
2. Explain the need for energy storage systems. Discuss how energy can be stored in batteries. (K2).
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Syllabus

Module 1

Introduction, Environmental Aspects Of Energy-Ecology-Greenhouse Effect-Global Warming-

Pollution-Various Pollutants and their Harmful Effects-Green Power-The United Nations Framework
Convention On Climate Change (UNFCC)- Environment-Economy-Energy and Sustainable
development-Kyoto Protocol -Classification of Energy Resources; Conventional Energy Resources -
Availability and their limitations; Non-Conventional Energy Resources –Classification, Advantages,
Limitations; Comparison of Conventional and Non-Conventional Energy Resources; World Energy
Scenario; Indian Energy Scenario.

Module 2
SOLAR THERMAL SYSTEMS: Introduction, Solar Constant, Basic Sun-Earth Angles, Measurement
of Solar Radiation Data(Numerical Problems)–Pyranometer and Pyrheliometer -Solar Thermal
Collectors –General description and characteristics –Flat plate collectors –Heat transfer processes –
Solar concentrators(Parabolic trough, Parabolic dish, Central Tower Collector)
SOLAR ELECTRIC SYSTEMS: Introduction- Solar Photovoltaic –Solar Cell fundamentals,
characteristics, classification, construction of Module, Panel and Array-Effect of
shadowing-.Maximum Power Point Tracker (MPPT) using buck-boost converter. Solar PV Systems –
stand-alone and grid connected-Design steps for a Stand-Alone system; Applications –Street lighting,
Domestic lighting and Solar Water pumping systems.

Module 3
Wind Energy–Introduction–Wind Turbine Types (HAWT and VAWT) and their construction- Wind
power curve-Betz’s Law-Power from a wind turbine(Numerical Problems)-Wind energy conversion
system(WECS) – Fixed–speed drive scheme-Variable speed drive scheme.-Effect of wind speed and
grid condition(system integration).
Small hydro power: Classification as micro, mini and small hydro projects -Basic concepts and types
of turbines - Classification, Characteristics and Selection

Module 4
ENERGY FROM OCEAN: Tidal Energy –Principle of Tidal Power, Components of Tidal Power Plant
(TPP), Classification of Tidal Power Plants, Advantages and Limitations of TPP.
Ocean Thermal Energy Conversion (OTEC): Principle of OTEC system, Methods of OTEC power
generation –Open Cycle (Claude cycle), Closed Cycle (Anderson cycle) and Hybrid cycle (block
diagram description of OTEC); Site-selection criteria, Biofouling, Advantages & Limitations of OTEC.

Module 5
BIOMASS ENERGY: Introduction, Photosynthesis process, Biomass fuels, Biomass conversion
technologies, Urban waste to Energy Conversion, factors affecting biogas generation, types of biogas
plants –KVIC and Janata model;.
EMERGING TECHNOLOGIES: Fuel Cell, Hydrogen Energy, alcohol energy and power from satellite
stations.

ENERGY STORAGE: Necessity Of Energy Storage-Pumped storage-Compressed air storage-

Flywheel storage-Batteries storage-Hydrogen storage.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Text books
1. A.A.M. Saigh(Ed): Solar Energy Engineering, Academic Press, 1977
2. Abbasi S. A. and N. Abbasi, Renewable Energy Sources and Their Environmental
Impact, Prentice Hall of India, 2001.
3. Thomas E. Kissell, David M. Buchla, Thomas L. Floyd Renewable energy systems, Pearson
2017
References:

1. Boyle G. (ed.), Renewable Energy -Power for Sustainable Future, Oxford University Press, 1996
2. Earnest J. and T. Wizelius, Wind Power Plants and Project Development, PHI Learning, 2011.
3. F. Kreith and J.F. Kreider: Principles of Solar Engineering, McGraw Hill, 1978
4. G.N. Tiwari: Solar Energy-Fundamentals, Design, Modelling and Applications, Narosa
Publishers, 2002
5. J.A. Duffie and W.A. Beckman: Solar Energy Thermal Processes, J. Wiley, 1994
6. Johansson T. B., H. Kelly, A. K. N. Reddy and R. H. Williams, Renewable Energy –Sources for
Fuel and Electricity, Earth scan Publications, London, 1993.
7. Khan B. H., Non-Conventional Energy Resources, Tata McGraw Hill, 2009.
8. D.P.Kothari, K.C.Singal, RakeshRanjan, Renewable Energy Sources and Emerging
Technologies, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2009
9. Rao S. and B. B. Parulekar, Energy Technology, Khanna Publishers, 1999.
10. Sab S. L., Renewable and Novel Energy Sources, MI. Publications, 1995.
11. Sawhney G. S., Non-Conventional Energy Resources, PHI Learning, 2012.
12. Tiwari G. N., Solar Energy-Fundamentals, Design, Modelling and Applications, CRC Press,
2002.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule:

No. of
No Topic
Lectures
1 Environmental impacts of various energy resources. (7 hours)
1.1 Introduction, Environmental Aspects Of Energy-Ecology-Greenhouse 1
Effect-Global Warming
1.2 Pollution-Various Pollutants and their Harmful Effects-Green Power - 2
The United Nations Framework Convention On Climate Change
(UNFCC)
1.3 Environment-Economy-Energy and Sustainable development-Kyoto 1
Protocol -Classification of Energy Resources
1.4 Conventional Energy Resources -Availability and their limitations 1
1.5 Non-Conventional Energy Resources –Classification, Advantages, 2
Limitations; Comparison of Conventional and Non-Conventional Energy
Resources; World Energy Scenario; Indian Energy Scenario.
2 Solar radiation data, solar thermal and electric systems. (7 hours)
2.1 Introduction, Solar Constant, Basic Sun-Earth Angles, Measurement of 2
Solar Radiation Data(Numerical Problems)–Pyranometer and
Pyrheliometer
2.2 Solar Thermal Collectors –General description and characteristics –Flat 1
plate collectors –Heat transfer processes
2.3 Solar concentrators(Parabolic trough, Parabolic dish, Central Tower 1
Collector)
2.4 Solar Photovoltaic –Solar Cell fundamentals, characteristics, 1
classification, construction of Module, Panel and Array-Effect of
shadowing
2.5 Maximum Power Point Tracker (MPPT) using buck-boost converter. 1
Solar PV Systems –stand-alone and grid connected-Design steps for a
Stand-Alone system
2.6 Applications –Street lighting, Domestic lighting and Solar Water 1
pumping systems.
3 Wind energy and small hydro plant (6 Hours)
3.1 Wind Energy–Introduction–Wind Turbine Types (HAWT and VAWT) 1
and their construction
3.2 -Wind power curve-Betz’s Law-Power from a wind turbine(Numerical 1
Problems)
3.3 Wind energy conversion system(WECS) – Fixed–speed drive scheme- 1
3.4 Variable speed drive scheme.-Effect of wind speed and grid 1
condition(system integration)
3.5 Small hydro power: Classification as micro, mini and small hydro 2
projects -Basic concepts and types of turbines - Classification,
Characteristics and Selection
4 Energy from ocean (7 Hours)
4.1 Tidal Energy –Principle of Tidal Power, Components of Tidal Power 2
Plant (TPP)
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

4.2 Classification of Tidal Power Plants, Advantages and Limitations of 1

TPP.
4.3 Ocean Thermal Energy Conversion (OTEC): Principle of OTEC system, 1
Methods of OTEC power generation
4. 4 Open Cycle (Claude cycle), Closed Cycle (Anderson cycle) 1
4. 5 Hybrid cycle (block diagram description of OTEC) 1
4. 6 Site-selection criteria, Biofouling, Advantages & Limitations of OTEC. 1
5 Emerging technologies (9 Hours)
5.1 Introduction, Photosynthesis process, Biomass fuels, Biomass 2
conversion technologies
5.2 Urban waste to Energy Conversion, factors affecting biogas generation, 2
types of biogas plants –KVIC and Janata model
5.3 Types of biogas plants –KVIC and Janata model 1
5.4 Fuel Cell, Hydrogen Energy 1
5.5 Alcohol energy and power from satellite stations. 1
5.6 Necessity Of Energy Storage-Pumped storage-Compressed air storage 1
5.7 Flywheel storage-Batteries storage-Hydrogen storage. 1
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Model Question paper

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

EIGHTH SEMESTER B. TECH. DEGREE EXAMINATION
Program: Applied Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering/ Electronics & Instrumentation
Course Code: AET478
Course Name: RENEWABLE ENERGY TECHNOLOGY
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours
PART A (3 x 10 = 30 Marks)
Answer all Questions. Each question carries 3 Marks
1. What do you mean by global warming? Explain its adverse effects.

2. Write notes on Indian energy scenario.

3. Determine the local apparent time corresponding to 11.30 IST on July 1, at Delhi (280 35’ N,770

12’E). The equation of time correction on July 1 is -4 minutes.

4. Draw and explain the V- I characteristics of a solar cell.

5. Define tip speed ratio, cut in speed and cut out speed of a wind turbine.

6. Explain the factors to be considered for the selection of small hydro plants.

7. Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of tidal power plants.

8. Explain the principle of operation of a OTEC plant. What are its advantages?

9. Explain how power can be derived from satellite stations.

10. Explain how energy can be stored using flywheels.

PART B (14 x 5 = 70 Marks)

Answer any one full question from each module. Each question carries 14 Marks
Module 1

11. a. Illustrate the relation between energy and sustainable development. (4)

b. Compare the advantages and disadvantages of different conventional sources of energy.

(10)
12. a. Write notes on Kyoto protocol. (4)

b. List out the advantages and disadvantages of different non-conventional sources of energy.
(10)

Module 2

13. a. With the help of a diagram, explain the working of a pyrheliometer. (7)

b. Explain how a stand-alone solar PV system can be designed. (7)

14. a. With the help of a diagram, explain the working of a flat plate collector. (7)

b. Explain how Maximum Power Point Tracking can be done using a buck boost converter.
(7)
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Module 3
15. a. Derive an expression for power derived from wind. Explain the characteristic of a wind turbine.
(7)
b. A propeller wind machine has rotor diameter of 40 m. It is operating at location having wind
speed of 35kmph and rotating at 20 rpm. Calculate theoretically the power which the machine
can extract from the wind considering both wake rotation and effect of drag. Assume ξ=.012.
(7)

16. a. With the help of a diagram, explain a wind energy conversion system with variable speed drive
scheme. (8)
b. Explain the different types of turbines used in small hydro plants. (6)

Module 4

17. With the help of a diagram, explain the working of different types of tidal powerplants.
(14)
18. a. With the help of a diagram, explain the working of an OTEC system using hybrid cycle.
(10)

b. Write notes on the factors to be considered for site selection of OTEC plants. (4)

Module 5

19. a. With the help of a diagram, explain a biomass gasification based electric power generation.
(8)
b. Explain the working of a fuel cell with the help of a diagram (6)
20. a. With the help of a diagram, explain the working of KVIC model biogas plant. (10)
b. Write notes on pumped storage plants (4)
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

COMPREHENSIVE COURSE CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

AET404
VIVA PCC 1 0 0 1

Preamble: The objective of this Course viva is to ensure the basic knowledge of each student in
the most fundamental core courses in the curriculum. The viva voce shall be conducted based on
the core subjects studied from third to eighth semester. This course helps the learner to become
competent in placement tests and other competitive examinations.

Guidelines
1. The course should be mapped with a faculty and classes shall be arranged for practicing questions
based on the core courses listed in the curriculum.
2. The viva voce will be conducted by the same three-member committee assigned for final project
phase II evaluation. It comprises of Project coordinator, expert from Industry/research Institute and
a senior faculty from a sister department.
3. The pass minimum for this course is 25.
4. The mark will be treated as internal and should be uploaded along with internal marks of other
courses.
5. Comprehensive Viva should be conducted along with final project evaluation by the three-member
committee.

Mark Distribution
Total marks: 50, only CIE, minimum required to pass : 25 Marks
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
AED 416 PROJECT PHASE II
PWS 0 0 12 4

Preamble: The course ‘Project Work’ is mainly intended to evoke the innovation and invention
skills in a student. The course will provide an opportunity to synthesize and apply the knowledge
and analytical skills learned, to be developed as a prototype or simulation. The project extends to
2 semesters and will be evaluated in the 7th and 8th semester separately, based on the achieved
objectives. One third of the project credits shall be completed in 7th semester and two third in 8th
semester. It is recommended that the projects may be finalized in the thrust areas of the respective
engineering stream or as interdisciplinary projects. Importance should be given to address societal
problems and developing indigenous technologies.

Course Objectives
1. To apply engineering knowledge in practical problem solving.
2. To foster innovation in design of products, processes or systems.
3. To develop creative thinking in finding viable solutions to engineering problems.

Course Outcomes [COs]: After successful completion of the course, the students will be able to:

Model and solve real world problems by applying knowledge across domains
CO1
(Cognitive knowledge level: Apply).
Develop products, processes or technologies for sustainable and socially relevant
CO2
applications (Cognitive knowledge level: Apply).
Function effectively as an individual and as a leader in diverse teams and to
CO3
comprehend and execute designated tasks (Cognitive knowledge level: Apply).
Plan and execute tasks utilizing available resources within timelines, following ethical
CO4
and professional norms (Cognitive knowledge level: Apply).
Identify technology/research gaps and propose innovative/creative solutions
CO5
(Cognitive knowledge level: Analyze).
Organize and communicate technical and scientific findings effectively in written and
CO6
oral forms (Cognitive knowledge level: Apply).

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
1
2 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2
CO1
CO2 2 2 2 1 3 3 1 1 1 1

CO3 3 2 2 1

CO4 2 3 2 2 3 2

CO5 2 3 3 1 2 1

CO6 2 2 2 3 1 1
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Abstract POs defined by National Board of Accreditation

PO # Broad PO PO# Broad PO

PO1 Engineering Knowledge PO7 Environment and Sustainability

PO2 Problem Analysis PO8 Ethics

PO3 Design/Development of solutions PO9 Individual and team work

Conduct investigations of
PO4 complex problems PO0 Communication

PO5 Modern tool usage PO11 Project Management and Finance

PO6 The Engineer and Society PO12 Lifelong learning

PROJECT PHASE II

Phase 2 Targets

1. In depth study of the topic assigned in the light of the report prepared under Phase - I;
2. Review and finalization of the approach to the problem relating to the assigned topic.
3. Preparing a detailed action plan for conducting the investigation, including teamwork.
4. Detailed Analysis/ Modeling / Simulation/ Design/ Problem Solving/Experiment as needed.
5. Final development of product/ process, testing, results, conclusions and future directions.
6. Preparing a paper for Conference Presentation/ Publication in Journals, if possible.
7. Presenting projects in Project Expos conducted by the University at the cluster level and/ or
state level as well as others conducted in India and abroad.
8. Filing Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) if applicable.
9. Preparing a report in the standard format for being evaluated by the Department Assessment
Board.
10. Final project presentation and viva voce by the assessment board including the external expert.

Evaluation Guidelines & Rubrics

Total: 150 marks (Minimum required to pass: 75 marks).

11. Project progress evaluation by guide: 30 Marks.
12. Two interim evaluations by the Evaluation Committee: 50 Marks (25 marks for each
evaluation).
13. Final evaluation by the Final Evaluation committee: 40 Marks
14. Quality of the report evaluated by the evaluation committee: 30 Marks

(The evaluation committee comprises HoD or a senior faculty member, Project coordinator and
project supervisor. The final evaluation committee comprises of Project coordinator, expert from
Industry/research/academic Institute and a senior faculty from a sister department).
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Evaluation by the Guide

The guide/supervisor must monitor the progress being carried out by the project groups on regular
basis. In case it is found that progress is unsatisfactory it should be reported to the Department
Evaluation Committee for necessary action. The presence of each student in the group and their
involvement in all stages of execution of the project shall be ensured by the guide. Project
evaluation by the guide: 30 Marks. This mark shall be awarded to the students in his/her group by
considering the following aspects:

Project Scheduling & Distribution of Work among Team members: Detailed and extensive
Scheduling with timelines provided for each phase of project. Work breakdown structure well
defined. (5)

Literature survey: Outstanding investigation in all aspects. (4)

Student’s Diary/ Daily Log: The main purpose of writing daily diary is to cultivate the habit of
documenting and to encourage the students to search for details. It develops the students’ thought
process and reasoning abilities. The students should record in the daily/weekly activity diary the
day to day account of the observations, impressions, information gathered and suggestions given,
if any. It should contain the sketches & drawings related to the observations made by the students.
The daily/weekly activity diary shall be signed after every day/week by the guide. (7)

Individual Contribution: The contribution of each student at various stages. (9)

Completion of the project: The students should demonstrate the project to their respective guide.
The guide shall verify the results and see that the objectives are met. (5)
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

EVALUATION RUBRICS for PROJECT Phase II: Interim Evaluation - 1

No. Parameters Marks Poor Fair Very Good Outstanding
Good evidence of an implementable
Some of the aspects of the proposed
The project is not addressing any project. There is some evidence for The project has evolved into incorporating
idea can be implemented. There is
useful requirement. The idea is the originality of the work done by the an outstandingly novel idea. Original work
still lack of originality in the work
Novelty of idea, and evolved into a non-implementable team . There is fresh specifications/ which is not yet reported anywhere else.
done so far by the team. The project
Implementation scope one. The work presented so far is features/improvements suggested by Evidence for ingenious way of innovation
2-a 5 is a regularly done theme/topic
[CO5] lacking any amount of original work without any freshness in terms of the team. The team is doing a design which is also Implementable. Could be a
[Group Evaluation] by the team. from fundamental principles, and patentable / publishable work.
specifications, features, and/or
there is some independent learning
improvements.
and engineering ingenuity.

(0 – 1 Marks) (2 – 3 Marks) (4 Marks) (5 Marks)

Good evidence of task allocation Excellent display of task identification and

being done, supported by project distribution backed by documentary
No task distribution of any kind. Task allocation done, but not journal entries, identification of tasks evidence of team brainstorming, and
Effectiveness of task effectively, some members do not
Members are still having no clue on through discussion etc. However, the project journal entries. All members are
2-b distribution among 5 what to do. have any idea of the tasks assigned. task distribution seems to be skewed, allocated tasks according to their
team members. Some of the tasks were identified but and depends a few members heavily
[CO3] capabilities, and as much as possible in an
not followed individually well. than others. Mostly the tasks are being equal manner. The individual members are
[Group Evaluation]
followed by the individual members. following the tasks in an excellent manner.

(0 – 1 Marks) (2 – 3 Marks) (4 Marks) (5 Marks)

Little or no evidence of continued There is some improvement in the Good evidence of planning done and Excellent evidence of enterprising and
planning or scheduling of the primary plan prepared during phase I. being followed up to a good extent extensive project planning and follow-up
project. The students did not stick to There were some ideas on the after phase I. Materials were listed since phase I. Continued use of project
Adherence to project the plan what they were going to materials /resources required, but not management/version control tool to track
and thought out, but the plan wasn't
schedule. build nor plan on what materials / really thought out. The students have followed completely. Schedules were the project. Material procurement if
2-c 5 resources to use in the project. The some idea on the finances required, applicable is progressing well. Tasks are
[CO4] prepared, but not detailed, and needs
[Group Evaluation] students do not have any idea on the but they have not formalized a budget updated and incorporated in the schedule.
improvement. Project journal is
budget required even after the end of plan. Schedules were not prepared. presented but it is neither complete A well-kept project journal showed
phase - I. No project journal kept or The project journal has no useful nor updated regularly. evidence for all the above, in addition to
the journal. details on the project. the interaction with the project guide.

(0 - 1 Marks) (2 - 3 Marks) (4 Marks) (5 Marks)

 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

The team showed some interim The interim results showed were good
There were significant interim results
Interim Results. results, but they are not complete / and mostly consistent/correct with
There are no interim results to show. presented which clearly shows the progress.
2-d [CO6] 5 consistent to the current stage, Some respect to the current stage. There is
[Group assessment] corrections are needed. room for improvement.
(0 - 1 Marks) (2 - 3 Marks) (4 Marks) (5 Marks)
Very poor presentation and there is Presentation is average, and the Good presentation. Student has good Exceptionally good presentation. Student
Presentation
no interim results. The student has student has only a feeble idea about idea about the team's project. The has excellent grasp of the project. The
2-e [Individual 5
no idea about the project proposal. the team work. overall presentation quality is good. quality of presentation is outstanding.
assessment]
(0 - 1 Marks) (2 - 3 Marks) (4 Marks) (5 Marks)

Phase-II Interim Evaluation - 1 Total Marks: 25

 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

EVALUATION RUBRICS for PROJECT Phase II: Interim Evaluation – 2

No Parameters Marks Poor Fair Very Good Outstanding

The student does not show any The student appears to apply some The student is able to show some Excellent knowledge in design procedure
Application of evidence of applying engineering basic knowledge, but not able to evidence of application of engineering and its adaptation. The student is able to
engineering knowledge on the design and the show the design procedure and the knowledge in the design and apply knowledge from engineering
knowledge methodology adopted. The student's methodologies adopted in a development of the project to good domains to the problem and develop
2-f [CO1] 10 contribution in application of comprehensive manner. extent. solutions.
[Individual engineering knowledge in the project
Assessment] is poor.

(0 – 3 Marks) (4 – 6 Marks) (7 - 9 Marks) (10 Marks)

The individual contribution is evident.

Involvement of No evidence of any Individual There is evidence for some amount Evidence available for the student acting
The student has good amount of
individual participation in the project work. of individual contribution, but is as the core technical lead and has excellent
5 involvement in core activities of the
members limited to some of the superficial contribution to the project.
2-g [CO3] project.
tasks.
[Individual
Assessment] (0 - 1 Marks) (2 - 3 Marks) (4 Marks) (5 Marks)

None of the expected outcomes are Many of the expected outcomes are Most of the stated outcomes are met.
Only a few of the expected outcomes
Results and achieved yet. The team is unable to achieved. Many observations and Extensive studies are done and inferences
are achieved. A few inferences are
inferences upon derive any inferences on the failures/ inferences are made, and attempts to drawn. Most of the failures are addressed
5 made on the observed failures/issues.
execution [CO5] issues observed. Any kind o f identify the issues are done. Some and solutions suggested. Clear and valid
2-h No further work suggested.
[Group Assessment] observations or studies are not made. suggestions are made for further work. suggestions made for further work.

(0 - 1 Marks) (2 - 3 Marks) (4 Marks) (5 Marks)

Documentation and The individual student has no idea on The individual's presentation is done
Presentation's overall quality needs The individual’s presentation
presentation. the presentation of his/her part. The professionally and with great clarity. The
5 to be improved. performance is satisfactory.
2-i .[CO6] presentation is of poor quality. individual’s performance is excellent.
[Individual assessment]
(0 - 1 Marks) (2 - 3 Marks) (4 Marks) (5 Marks)

Phase-II Interim Evaluation - 2 Total Marks: 25

 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

EVALUATION RUBRICS for PROJECT Phase II: Final Evaluation

No Parameters Marks Poor Fair Very Good Outstanding
The team is able to show evidence of Excellent knowledge in design procedure
Engineering The team does not show any evidence The team is able to show some of the
application of engineering knowledge and its adaptation. The team is able to
2-j knowledge. [CO1] of applying engineering knowledge design procedure and the
10 in the design and development of the apply knowledge from engineering
[Group Assessment] on the design and the methodology methodologies adopted, but not in a
project to good extent. There is scope domains to the problem and develop an
adopted. comprehensive manner.
for improvement. excellent solution.

(0 – 3 Marks) (4 – 6 Marks) (7 - 9 Marks) (10 Marks)

Relevance of the The project has some relevance with The project is relevant to the society The project is exceptionally relevant to
project with respect to The project as a whole do not have respect to social and/or industrial and/or industry. The team is mostly society and/or industry. The team has
2-k any societal / industrial relevance at application. The team has however successful in translating the problem made outstanding contribution while
societal and/or 5
industrial needs. all. made not much effort to explore into an engineering specification and solving the problem in a professional and/
[Group Assessment] further and make it better. managed to solve much of it. or ethical manner.
[CO2]
(0 - 1 Marks) (2 - 3 Marks) (4 Marks) (5 Marks)
Some of the aspects of the proposed Good evidence of an implementable
The project is not addressing any The project has evolved into incorporating
idea appears to be practical. There is project. There is some evidence for the
useful requirement. The idea is an outstandingly novel idea. Original work
still lack of originality in the work originality of the work done by the
evolved into a non-implementable which is not yet reported anywhere else.
done. The project is a regularly done team. There is fresh specifications/
Innovation / novelty / one. The work presented so far is Evidence for ingenious way of innovation
theme/topic without any freshness in features/improvements suggested by the which is also Implementable. Could be a
lacking any amount of original work
2-i Creativity 5 terms of specifications, features, and/ team. The team is doing a design from
[CO5] by the team. patentable publishable work.
or improvements. fundamental principles, and there is
[Group Assessment] some independent learning and
engineering ingenuity. Could be
translated into a product / process if
more work is done.

(0 - 1 Marks) (2 - 3 Marks) (4 Marks) (5 Marks)

 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Only a few of the expected outcomes

None of the expected outcomes are are achieved. A few inferences are Many of the expected outcomes are Most of the stated outcomes are met.
Quality of results / achieved. The team is unable to made on the observed failures/issues. achieved. Many observations and Extensive studies are done and inferences
conclusions / 10 derive any inferences on the No further work suggested. inferences are made, and attempts to drawn. Most of the failures are addressed
2-m solutions. [CO1] failures/issues observed. Any kind of identify the issues are done. Some and solutions suggested. Clear and valid
[Group Assessment] observations or studies is not made. suggestions are made for further work. suggestions made for further work.

(0 – 3 Marks) (4 – 6 Marks) (7 - 9 Marks) (10 Marks)

 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

Presentation slides follow a good style

Presentation slides follow professional The presentation slides are exceptionally
The presentation slides are shallow format and there are only a few issues.
style formats to some extent. However, good. Neatly organized. All references
Organization of the slides is good. Most
Presentation - Part I and in a clumsy format. It does not its organization is not very good.
of references are cited properly. The cited properly. Diagrams/Figures, Tables
Preparation of slides. 5 follow proper organization. Language needs to be improved. All and equations are properly numbered,
flow is good and team presentation is
[CO6] references are not cited properly, or and l i s ted. Results/ inferences clearly
neatly organized. Some of the results
[Group Assessment]. acknowledged. Presentation slides highlighted and readable.
are not clearly shown. There is room
needs to be more professional.
for improvement.

2-n (0 - 1 Marks) (2 - 3 Marks) (4 Marks) (5 Marks)

Good presentation/ communication by
Presentation - Part The student is able to explain some of Clear and concise communication
the student. The student is able to
II: Individual The student is not communicating the content. The student requires a lot exhibited by the student. The
explain most of the content very well.
Communication 5 properly. Poor response to of prompts to get to the idea. There are presentation is outstanding. Very
There are however, a few areas where
[CO6] questions. language issues. confident and tackles all the questions
the student shows lack of preparation.
[Individual without hesitation. Exceptional traits of
Language is better.
Assessment]. communicator.
(0 - 1 Marks) (2 - 3 Marks) (4 Marks) (5 Marks)

Phase-II Final Evaluation, Marks: 40

 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

EVALUATION RUBRICS for PROJECT Phase II: Report Evaluation

Sl.
No. Parameters Mark Poor Fair Very Good Outstanding
s
The prepared report is shallow and not Project report shows evidence of
Project report follows the standard The report is exceptionally good. Neatly
as per standard format. It does not systematic documentation. Report is
format to some extent. However, its organized. All references cited properly.
follow proper organization. Contains mostly following the standard style
organization is not very good. Diagrams/Figures, Tables and equations
mostly unacknowledged content. Lack format and there are only a few issues.
2-o Report [CO6] 30 Language needs to be improved. All are properly numbered, and listed and
of effort in preparation is evident. Organization of the report is good.
references are not cited properly in the clearly shown. Language is excellent and
References are not cited. Mostly consistently formatted. Most of
report. There is lack of formatting follows professional styles. Consistent
Unprofessional and inconsistent references/sources are cited/
consistency. formatting and exceptional readability.
formatting. acknowledged properly.

(0 - 11 Marks) (12 - 18 Marks) (19 - 28 Marks) (29 - 30 Marks)

Phase - II Project Report Marks: 30

 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

S8 MINOR
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
AED482 MINI PROJECT
PWS 0 0 3 4

Preamble: Mini Project Phase I: A Project topic must be selected either from research literature
or the students themselves may propose suitable topics in consultation with their guides. The
object of Project Work I is to enable the student to take up investigative study in the broad field
of Applied Electronics and Instrumentation, either fully theoretical/practical or involving both
theoretical and practical work to be assigned by the Department on a group of three/four students,
under the guidance of a supervisor. This is expected to provide a good initiation for the student(s)
in R&D work. The assignment to normally include:
1. Survey and study of published literature on the assigned topic;
2. Preparing an Action Plan for conducting the investigation, including team work;
3. Working out a preliminary Approach to the Problem relating to the assigned topic;
4. Block level design documentation
5. Conducting preliminary Analysis/ Modelling/ Simulation/ Experiment/ Design/
Feasibility;
6. Preparing a Written Report on the Study conducted for presentation to the Department;

CO1 Identify and synthesize problems and propose solutions to them.

CO2 Prepare work plan and liaison with the team in completing as per schedule.

Validate the above solutions by theoretical calculations and through

CO3
experimental

CO4 Write technical reports and develop proper communication skills.

CO5 Present the data and defend ideas.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 3 3 3 3 2
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1
*1-slight/low mapping, 2- moderate/medium mapping, 3-substantial/high mapping
Assessment Pattern
The End Semester Evaluation (ESE) will be conducted as an internal evaluation based on the
product, the report and a viva- voce examination, conducted by a 3-member committee
appointed by Head of the Department comprising HoD or a senior faculty member, academic
coordinator for that program and project guide/coordinator. The Committee will be
evaluating the level of completion and demonstration of functionality/specifications,
presentation, oral examination, working knowledge and involvement.

The Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) is conducted by evaluating the progress of the
mini project through minimum of TWO reviews. At the time of the 1st review, students are
supposed to propose a new system/design/idea, after completing a thorough literature study
of the existing systms under their chosen area. In the 2nd review students are expected to
highlight the implementation details of the proposed solution. The review committee should
assess the extent to which the implementation reflects the proposed design. A well coded,
assembled and completely functional product is the expected output at this stage. The final
CIE mark is the average of 1st and 2nd review marks.
A zeroth review may be conducted before the beginning of the project to give a chance for
the students to present their area of interest or problem domain or conduct open brain
storming sessions for innovative ideas. Zeroth review will not be a part of the CIE evaluation
process.

Marks Distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE

150 75 75

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Marks awarded by Guide : 15 marks
Project Report : 10 marks
Evaluation by the Committee : 40 Marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: The following guidelines should be followed

regarding award of marks.
(a) Demonstration : 50 Marks
(b) Project report : 10 Marks
(d) Viva voce : 15marks

Course Plan
In this course, each group consisting of three/four members is expected to design and develop
a moderately complex software/hardware system with practical applications. This should be a
working model. The basic concept of product design may be taken into consideration.
Students should identify a topic of interest in consultation with Faculty-in-charge of
miniproject/Advisor. Review the literature and gather information pertaining to the chosen
topic. State the objectives and develop a methodology to achieve the objectives. Carryout the
design/fabrication or develop codes/programs to achieve the objectives. Demonstrate the
novelty of the project through the results and outputs. The progress of the mini project is
evaluated based on a minimum of two reviews.

The review committee may be constituted by the Head of the Department. A project report is
required at the end of the semester. The product has to be demonstrated for its full design
specifications. Innovative design concepts, reliability considerations, aesthetics/ergonomic
aspects taken care of in the project shall be given due weight.
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

S8 HONOURS
 Applied Electronics and Instrumentation

CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
AED496 MINI PROJECT
PWS 0 0 3 4

Preamble: Mini Project Phase I: A Project topic must be selected either from research literature
or the students themselves may propose suitable topics in consultation with their guides. The
object of Project Work I is to enable the student to take up investigative study in the broad field
of Applied Electronics and Instrumentation, either fully theoretical/practical or involving both
theoretical and practical work to be assigned by the Department on a group of three/four students,
under the guidance of a supervisor. This is expected to provide a good initiation for the student(s)
in R&D work. The assignment to normally include:
1. Survey and study of published literature on the assigned topic;
2. Preparing an Action Plan for conducting the investigation, including team work;
3. Working out a preliminary Approach to the Problem relating to the assigned topic;
4. Block level design documentation
5. Conducting preliminary Analysis/ Modelling/ Simulation/ Experiment/ Design/
Feasibility;
6. Preparing a Written Report on the Study conducted for presentation to the Department;

CO1 Identify and synthesize problems and propose solutions to them.

CO2 Prepare work plan and liaison with the team in completing as per schedule.

Validate the above solutions by theoretical calculations and through

CO3
experimental

CO4 Write technical reports and develop proper communication skills.

CO5 Present the data and defend ideas.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 3 3 3 3 2
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1
*1-slight/low mapping, 2- moderate/medium mapping, 3-substantial/high mapping
Assessment Pattern
The End Semester Evaluation (ESE) will be conducted as an internal evaluation based on the
product, the report and a viva- voce examination, conducted by a 3-member committee
appointed by Head of the Department comprising HoD or a senior faculty member, academic
coordinator for that program and project guide/coordinator. The Committee will be
evaluating the level of completion and demonstration of functionality/specifications,
presentation, oral examination, working knowledge and involvement.

The Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) is conducted by evaluating the progress of the
mini project through minimum of TWO reviews. At the time of the 1st review, students are
supposed to propose a new system/design/idea, after completing a thorough literature study
of the existing systms under their chosen area. In the 2nd review students are expected to
highlight the implementation details of the proposed solution. The review committee should
assess the extent to which the implementation reflects the proposed design. A well coded,
assembled and completely functional product is the expected output at this stage. The final
CIE mark is the average of 1st and 2nd review marks.
A zeroth review may be conducted before the beginning of the project to give a chance for
the students to present their area of interest or problem domain or conduct open brain
storming sessions for innovative ideas. Zeroth review will not be a part of the CIE evaluation
process.

Marks Distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE

150 75 75

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Marks awarded by Guide : 15 marks
Project Report : 10 marks
Evaluation by the Committee : 40 Marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: The following guidelines should be followed

regarding award of marks.
(a) Demonstration : 50 Marks
(b) Project report : 10 Marks
(d) Viva voce : 15marks

Course Plan
In this course, each group consisting of three/four members is expected to design and develop
a moderately complex software/hardware system with practical applications. This should be a
working model. The basic concept of product design may be taken into consideration.
Students should identify a topic of interest in consultation with Faculty-in-charge of
miniproject/Advisor. Review the literature and gather information pertaining to the chosen
topic. State the objectives and develop a methodology to achieve the objectives. Carryout the
design/fabrication or develop codes/programs to achieve the objectives. Demonstrate the
novelty of the project through the results and outputs. The progress of the mini project is
evaluated based on a minimum of two reviews.

The review committee may be constituted by the Head of the Department. A project report is
required at the end of the semester. The product has to be demonstrated for its full design
specifications. Innovative design concepts, reliability considerations, aesthetics/ergonomic
aspects taken care of in the project shall be given due weight.